Dell PowerEdge FN I/O Module Command Line Reference Guide 9.10(0.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2016 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual property laws.
Contents 1 About this Guide..................................................................................................................... 48 Objectives.................................................................................................................................. 48 Audience.................................................................................................................................... 49 Conventions.................................................................
cd................................................................................................................................................. 68 copy............................................................................................................................................ 69 copy running-config startup-config....................................................................................70 delete......................................................................................
end.............................................................................................................................................102 exec-timeout...........................................................................................................................102 exit............................................................................................................................................. 103 feature unique-name........................................................
telnet......................................................................................................................................... 145 telnet-peer-stack-unit.......................................................................................................... 146 terminal length........................................................................................................................ 147 terminal monitor...........................................................................
ip access-group...................................................................................................................... 176 show ip access-lists................................................................................................................177 show ip accounting access-list........................................................................................... 178 Standard IP ACL Commands........................................................................................
Route Map Commands.........................................................................................................232 continue................................................................................................................................... 232 description............................................................................................................................... 233 match interface...................................................................................
permit icmp.............................................................................................................................309 permit........................................................................................................................................ 311 deny udp (for IPv6 ACLs).......................................................................................................312 deny tcp (for IPv6 ACLs)......................................................................
bgp asnotation........................................................................................................................ 351 bgp bestpath as-path ignore............................................................................................... 352 bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax...............................................................................353 bgp bestpath med confed....................................................................................................
neighbor default-originate...................................................................................................382 neighbor description............................................................................................................. 383 neighbor distribute-list......................................................................................................... 384 neighbor ebgp-multihop.............................................................................................
show ip bgp paths community........................................................................................... 429 show ip bgp peer-group...................................................................................................... 430 show ip bgp regexp............................................................................................................... 432 show ip bgp summary...........................................................................................................
show ipv6 protocol-queue-mapping................................................................................ 461 show mac protocol-queue-mapping............................................................................... 462 14 u-Boot.................................................................................................................................. 463 boot change............................................................................................................................
description.............................................................................................................................. 490 fc-map..................................................................................................................................... 490 fcoe-map................................................................................................................................. 491 fcoe priority-bits..................................................................
hardware-address............................................................................................................ 532 host......................................................................................................................................532 lease.................................................................................................................................... 532 netbios-name-server................................................................................
17 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP)..........................................................................................552 ecmp-group............................................................................................................................ 552 hash-algorithm....................................................................................................................... 553 hash-algorithm ecmp...........................................................................................
show fip-snooping config....................................................................................................589 show fip-snooping enode................................................................................................... 590 show fip-snooping fcf........................................................................................................... 591 show fip-snooping sessions................................................................................................
ip igmp query-interval...........................................................................................................622 ip igmp query-max-resp-time............................................................................................ 623 ip igmp snooping enable......................................................................................................623 ip igmp snooping fast-leave................................................................................................
show interfaces.................................................................................................................661 show interfaces configured........................................................................................... 664 show interfaces dampening.......................................................................................... 665 show interfaces description...........................................................................................
speed (for 1000/10000 interfaces)...............................................................................705 stack-unit port-group port mode ethernet................................................................706 vlan tagged (CMC)........................................................................................................... 706 vlan untagged (CMC)....................................................................................................... 707 25 IPv4 Routing.................
show ip fib stack-unit............................................................................................................ 741 show ip interface.................................................................................................................... 742 show ip management-route................................................................................................744 show ip multicast-cam stack-unit...................................................................................
ipv6 name-server................................................................................................................... 780 ipv6 nd dad attempts............................................................................................................. 781 ipv6 nd dns-server..................................................................................................................781 ipv6 nd prefix............................................................................................
clear ip bgp as-number...................................................................................................814 clear ip bgp ipv6-address............................................................................................... 815 clear ip bgp peer-group..................................................................................................816 clear ip bgp ipv6 dampening..........................................................................................
neighbor weight............................................................................................................... 847 network.............................................................................................................................. 847 network backdoor........................................................................................................... 848 redistribute.......................................................................................................
neighbor default-originate............................................................................................. 877 neighbor distribute-list....................................................................................................878 neighbor filter-list.............................................................................................................879 neighbor maximum-prefix.............................................................................................
clns host................................................................................................................................... 912 debug isis..................................................................................................................................913 debug isis adj-packets........................................................................................................... 913 debug isis local-updates.................................................................
maximum-paths.....................................................................................................................942 metric-style............................................................................................................................. 943 multi-topology....................................................................................................................... 944 net...............................................................................................
clear mac-address-table dynamic................................................................................981 mac-address-table aging-time.....................................................................................982 mac-address-table static............................................................................................... 983 mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp.......................................................... 983 mac learning-limit.................................
advertise med location-identification........................................................................1014 advertise med power-via-mdi..................................................................................... 1015 advertise med softphone-voice.................................................................................. 1015 advertise med streaming-video...................................................................................1016 advertise med video-conferencing..............
name.......................................................................................................................................1044 protocol spanning-tree mstp............................................................................................ 1045 revision................................................................................................................................... 1046 show config.......................................................................................
show qos dcb-map............................................................................................................. 1082 show running-config fcoe-map.......................................................................................1083 42 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3)........................................................ 1085 OSPFv2 Commands............................................................................................................ 1088 area default-cost......
redistribute..............................................................................................................................1115 redistribute bgp..................................................................................................................... 1116 redistribute isis....................................................................................................................... 1117 router-id...............................................................................
ipv6 ospf dead-interval....................................................................................................... 1164 ipv6 ospf encryption............................................................................................................ 1164 ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject.......................................................................... 1166 ipv6 ospf hello-interval......................................................................................................
ip pim sparse-mode.............................................................................................................1199 ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer.............................................................................. 1200 ip pim spt-threshold............................................................................................................1200 no ip pim snooping dr-flood.............................................................................................
46 Private VLAN (PVLAN)......................................................................................................1233 ip local-proxy-arp................................................................................................................ 1234 private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan.............................................................................1235 private-vlan mode................................................................................................................
match ip access-group................................................................................................. 1270 match ip vlan................................................................................................................... 1270 match ip vrf...................................................................................................................... 1271 description...........................................................................................................
49 Routing Information Protocol (RIP)............................................................................. 1305 auto-summary......................................................................................................................1306 clear ip rip.............................................................................................................................. 1306 debug ip rip.....................................................................................................
show rmon statistics............................................................................................................1336 51 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).......................................................................... 1338 bridge-priority.......................................................................................................................1338 debug spanning-tree rstp..................................................................................................
exec-banner.................................................................................................................... 1368 access-class.................................................................................................................... 1369 enable password.............................................................................................................1369 enable restricted...................................................................................................
ip ssh password-authentication................................................................................. 1400 ip ssh rhostsfile................................................................................................................1401 ip ssh rekey ..................................................................................................................... 1402 ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config)..............................................................................
debug protocol-tunnel....................................................................................................... 1431 protocol-tunnel....................................................................................................................1432 protocol-tunnel destination-mac.................................................................................... 1433 protocol-tunnel enable......................................................................................................
logging on..............................................................................................................................1467 logging source-interface....................................................................................................1467 logging synchronous.......................................................................................................... 1468 logging trap...................................................................................................
disable.................................................................................................................................... 1498 forward-delay....................................................................................................................... 1499 hello-time.............................................................................................................................. 1499 max-age................................................................................
boot selection....................................................................................................................... 1533 boot show net config retries............................................................................................. 1533 boot write net config retries.............................................................................................. 1534 boot zero............................................................................................................
show interface dei-mark.................................................................................................... 1559 vlan-stack access................................................................................................................. 1560 vlan-stack compatible........................................................................................................ 1560 vlan-stack dot1p-mapping............................................................................................
preempt.................................................................................................................................. 1591 priority..................................................................................................................................... 1591 show config...........................................................................................................................1592 show vrrp..........................................................................
hardware watchdog............................................................................................................. 1631 online stack-unit.................................................................................................................. 1632 offline stack-unit.................................................................................................................. 1632 show diag................................................................................................
1 About this Guide This book provides information about the Dell Networking OS command line interface (CLI) on the Dell PowerEdge FN I/O Module. This book also includes information about the protocols and features found in the Dell Networking OS and on the Dell Networking systems supported by the Dell Networking OS.
Audience This book is intended for system administrators who are responsible for configuring or maintaining networks. This guide assumes that you are knowledgeable in Layer 2 and Layer 3 networking technologies. Conventions This book uses the following conventions to describe command syntax. Keyword Keywords are in Courier font and must be entered in the CLI as listed. parameter Parameters are in italics and require a number or word to be entered in the CLI.
2 Before You Start By following the instructions in the Dell PowerEdge FN I/O Module Getting Started Guide that is shipped with the product, you install the FN I/O Module in a Dell PowerEdge FX2 server chassis. The Aggregator installs with zero-touch configuration. After you power it on, an Aggregator boots up with default settings and auto-configures with software features enabled. This chapter describes the default settings and software features that are automatically configured at startup.
• Full Switch mode — stack-unit unit iom-mode full-switch. The full switch mode provides Layer 2 / Layer 3 functionalities on the Dell FX2 chassis. All the commands and configurations supported on the MXL is available in full-switch mode. For more information, see the FN IOM Configuration Guide.
• Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP): Enabled on all ports. • Link tracking: Enables server-facing links to be brought up only if the uplink port-channel (LAG 128) is up. DCB Support DCB enhancements for data center networks are supported to eliminate packet loss and provision links with required bandwidth. The Aggregator provides zero-touch configuration for DCB.
Link Aggregation In Standalone, Stacking, and VLT modes, all uplink ports (except port 9 in VLT mode) are configured in a single LAG (LAG 128). There can be multiple uplink LAGs in programmable-mux mode. Server-facing ports are auto-configured as part of link aggregation groups if the corresponding server is configured for LACP-based NIC teaming. Static LAGs are supported only in PMUX and Full-Switch modes. NOTE: The default LACP timeout is Long-Timeout.
Server-Facing LAGs The tagged VLAN membership of a server-facing LAG is automatically configured based on the server-facing ports that are members of the LAG. The untagged VLAN of a server-facing LAG is configured based on the untagged VLAN to which the lowest numbered server-facing port in the LAG belongs. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends that you configure the same VLAN membership on all LAG member ports.
In case of a Dell Networking OS upgrade, you can check to see that an Aggregator is running the latest Dell Networking OS version by entering the show version command. To download a Dell Networking OS version, go to http://support.dell.com. Refer to the appropriate chapter for detailed information on how to configure specific software settings.
3 CLI Basics This chapter describes the command line interface (CLI) structure and command modes. The Dell operating system commands are in a text-based interface that allows you to use the launch commands, change command modes, and configure interfaces and protocols.
Multiple Configuration Users When a user enters CONFIGURATION mode and another user is already in CONFIGURATION mode, the Dell operating system generates an alert warning message similar to the following: Dell#conf % Warning: The following users are currently configuring the system: User "" on line User "admin" on User "admin" on User "Irene" on Dell#conf console0 line vty0 ( 123.12.1.123 ) line vty1 ( 123.12.1.123 ) line vty3 ( 123.12.1.
Prompt CLI Command Mode Dell(conf-if-ma-0/0)# Dell(conf-if-range)# Dell(conf-line-console)# LINE Dell(conf-line-vty)# Dell(conf-mon-sess)# MONITOR SESSION Obtaining Help As soon as you are in a command mode there are several ways to access help. To obtain a list of keywords at any command mode: Type a ? at the prompt or after a keyword. There must always be a space before the ?. To obtain a list of keywords with a brief functional description: Type help at the prompt.
Key Combination Action CNTL-A Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line. CNTL-B Moves the cursor back one character. CNTL-D Deletes the character at the cursor. CNTL-E Moves the cursor to the end of the line. CNTL-F Moves the cursor forward one character. CNTL-I Completes a keyword. CNTL-K Deletes all the characters from the cursor to the end of the command line. CNTL-L Re-enters the previous command.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Filtering show Commands To find specific information, display certain information only or begin the command output at the first instance of a regular expression or phrase, you can filter the display output of a show command. When you execute a show command, and then enter a pipe ( | ), one of the following parameters, and a regular expression, the resulting output either excludes or includes those parameters.
Dell# command | grep regular-expression | except regular-expression | grep otherregular-expression | find regular-expression | no-more | save Command Modes To navigate and launch various CLI modes, use specific commands. Navigation to these modes is described in the following sections. EXEC Mode When you initially log in to the switch, by default, you are logged in to EXEC mode. This mode allows you to view settings and enter EXEC Privilege mode, which is used to configure the device.
To enter INTERFACE mode: 1 Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2 Enter the interface command and then enter an interface type and interface number that is available on the switch. The prompt changes to include the designated interface and slot/port number.
To enter PROTOCOL LLDP mode: 1 Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2 Enter the protocol lldp command. The prompt changes to include Dell(config-lldp). You can return to CONFIGURATION mode by using the exit command. Track Login Activity Dell Networking OS enables you to track the login activity of users and view the successful and unsuccessful login events.
Example of Configuring Login Activity Tracking The following example enables login activity tracking. The system stores the login activity details for the last 30 days. Dell(config)#login statistics enable The following example enables login activity tracking and configures the system to store the login activity details for 12 days. Dell(config)#login statistics enable Dell(config)#login statistics time-period 12 Display Login Statistics To view the login statistics, use the show login statistics command.
-----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: Mon Feb 16 04:40:00 2015 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.14.1.97 ) Unsuccessful login attempt(s) since the last successful login: 0 Unsuccessful login attempt(s) in last 11 day(s): 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------ Limit Concurrent Login Sessions Dell Networking OS enables you to limit the number of concurrent login sessions of users on VTY, Aux, and console lines.
Enabling the System to Clear Existing Sessions To enable the system to clear existing login sessions, follow this procedure: • Use the following command. CONFIGURATION mode login concurrent-session clear-line enable Example of Enabling the System to Clear Existing Sessions The following example enables you to clear your existing login sessions.
4 File Management This chapter contains commands needed to manage the configuration files and includes other file management commands. boot system gateway Specify the IP address of the default next-hop gateway for the management subnet. Syntax Parameters boot system gateway ip-address ip-address Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format. Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
primary Enter the keyword primary to set the primary image path for the system. secondary Enter the keyword secondary to set the secondary image path for the system. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O aggregator. Usage Information The system first attempts to load the image from the primary path.
copy Copy one file to another location. The Dell Networking OS supports IPv4 addressing for FTP, TFTP, and SCP (in the hostip field). Syntax Parameters copy source-file-url destination-file-url file-url Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the following location keywords and information: • To copy a file from the internal FLASH, enter flash:// then the filename. • To copy the running configuration, enter the keywords running-config.
When you use the copy running-config startup-config command to copy the running configuration (the startup configuration file amended by any configuration changes made because the system was started) to the startup configuration file, Dell Networking OS creates a backup file on the internal flash of the startup configuration.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is useful for quickly making a change configuration on one chassis available on external flash to move it to another chassis. delete Delete a file from the flash. After deletion, files cannot be restored.
Parameters filename | directory name: Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following: • For a file or directory on the internal Flash, enter flash:// then the filename or directory name. • For a file or directory on an external USB drive, enter usbflash:// then the filename or directory name. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information You must include the colon (:) when entering this command. CAUTION: This command deletes all files, including the startup configuration file. So, after executing this command, consider saving the running config as the startup config (use the write memory command or copy run start command).
Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Example copy http://admin:admin123@10.16.206.77/sample_file flash:// sample_file Related Commands copy ftp:flash Copy files from FTP server to switch logging coredump stack-unit Enable the coredump.
Parameters {ipv4-address } Enter the server IPv4 address (A.B.C.D). name Enter a username to access the target server. type Enter the password type: password • Enter 0 to enter an unencrypted password. • Enter 7 to enter a password that has already been encrypted using a Type 7 hashing algorithm. Enter a password to access the target server. Defaults Crash kernel files are uploaded to flash by default. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Example Dell#pwd flash: Dell# Related Commands cd – changes the directory. rename Rename a file in the local file system. Syntax Parameters rename url url url Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the following keywords and a filename: • For a file on the internal Flash, enter flash:// then the filename. • For a file on an external USB drive, enter usbflash:// then the filename. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
clear-all Enter the keywords clear-all to reset the NvRAM and the system startup configuration. nvram Enter the keyword nvram to reset the NvRAM only. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
*Proceed with caution ! * ************************************************** Proceed with factory settings? Confirm [yes/no]:yes -- Restore status -Unit Nvram Config -----------------------0 Success 1 Success 2 Success 3 Not present 4 Not present 5 Not present Power-cycling the unit(s).
Example Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell#show boot system stack-unit all Current system image information in the system: ============================================= Type Boot Type A B --------------------------------------------Stack-unit 0 is not present. Stack-unit 1 DOWNLOAD BOOT 9-1-0-218 9-1-0-202 Stack-unit 2 is not present. Stack-unit 3 is not present. Stack-unit 4 is not present. Stack-unit 5 is not present.
--More-Dell# Related Commands format flash — erases all the existing files and reformats the filesystem in the internal flash memory. show file-systems — displays information about the file systems on the system. show file-systems Displays information about the file systems on the system. Syntax show file-systems Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Command Fields Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Field Description • Prefixes Related Commands w = write access Displays the name of the storage location. format flash – erases all the existing files and reformats the filesystem in the internal flash memory. show file – displays the contents of a text file in the local filesystem. show os-version Displays the release and software image version information of the image file specified.
RELEASE IMAGE INFORMATION : -------------------------------------------------------------Platform Version Size ReleaseTime IOM-Series: XL 8-3-17-38 31603078 Jul 19 2012 06:02:28 TARGET IMAGE INFORMATION : -------------------------------------------------------------Type Version Target checksum runtime 8-3-17-38 Control Processor passed CPLD IMAGE INFORMATION : -------------------------------------------------------------Card CPLD Name Version Stack-unit 1 IOM SYSTEM CPLD 6 Dell# show running-config Display
configured (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword configured to display line card interfaces with non-default configurations only. status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword status to display the checksum for the running configuration and the start-up configuration. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show startup-config ! Version E8-3-16-29 ! Last configuration change at Thu Apr 26 19:19:02 2012 by default ! Startup-config last updated at Thu Apr 26 19:19:04 2012 by default ! boot system stack-unit 0 primary system: A: boot system stack-unit 0 secondary tftp://10.11.200.241/ dt-m1000e-5-c2 boot system gateway 10.11.209.
Build Time: Thu Jul 19 05:59:59 PDT 2012 Build Path: /sites/sjc/work/swsystems01-2/ravisubramani/ ravis-8317/SW/SRC/ Cp_src/Tacacs FTOS uptime is 4 day(s), 4 hour(s), 3 minute(s) System image file is "dv-m1000e-2-b2" System Type: I/O-Aggregator Control Processor: MIPS RMI XLP with 2147483648 bytes of memory. 256M bytes of boot flash memory. 1 34-port GE/TE (XL) 56 Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s) Command Fields Lines Beginning With Description Dell Force10 Network...
Parameters all Enter the keyword all to change both the bootflash and bootselecter images. bootflash-image Enter the keywords bootflash-image to change the bootflash image. bootselectorimage Enter the keywords bootselector-image to change the bootselector image. 0–5 Enter the keyword 0–5 to upgrade only the mentioned stackunit. all Enter the keyword all to upgrade all the member stack-units. booted Enter the keyword booted to upgradefrom the current image in the M I/O Aggregator.
image bootflash-image bootselector-image Dell# Upgrade boot flash image Upgrade boot selector image upgrade system Upgrade the bootflash image or system image. Syntax Parameters upgrade system {flash: | ftp: | scp: | tftp: | usbflash: | stackunit {0-5 | all} {A: | B:} 0–5 Enter the keyword 0–5 to upgrade only the mentioned stackunit. all Enter the keyword all to upgrade all the member units of the stack.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information You must reload Dell Networking OS after executing this command. Use the command upgrade system stack-unit to copy Dell Networking OS from the management unit to one or more stack members.
Command History Version Description 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. Usage Information You can enter this command in the following ways: Example • verify md5 flash://img-file • verify md5 flash://img-file • verify sha256 flash://img-file • verify sha256 flash://img-file Without Entering the Hash Value for Verification using SHA256 Dell# verify sha256 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin SHA256 hash for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.
5 Control and Monitoring This chapter describes control and monitoring for the I/O Aggregator. asf-mode Enable alternate store and forward (ASF) mode and forward packets as soon as a threshold is reached. Syntax asf-mode stack-unit {unit-id | all} queue size To return to standard Store and Forward mode, use the no asf-mode stack unit command. Parameters unit-id Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset. The range is from 0 to 5 or all.
To remove the asset tag, use the no stack-unit unit-id Asset-tag ID command. Parameters stack-unit unit-id Enter the keywords stack-unit then the unit-id to assign a tag to the specific member. The range is from 0 to 5. Asset-tag ID Enter a unique asset-tag ID to assign to the stack member. This option accepts a maximum of 10 characters, including all special characters except double quotes. To include a space in the asset-tag, enter a space within double quotes. Defaults No asset-tag is assigned.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Optionally, use the banner exec command to create a text string that displays when you accesses EXEC mode. The exec-banner command toggles that display. Example Dell(conf)#banner exec ? LINE c banner-text(max length 255) c, where 'c' is a delimiting character Dell(conf)#banner exec % Enter TEXT message. End with the character '%'.
acknowledgemen t Enter the acknowledgement keyword to require a positive acknowledgement from the user while logging in to the system. c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. The delineator is a percent character (%). line Enter a text string for your text banner message ending the message with your delineator. The delineator is a percent character (%).
banner motd Set a message of the day (MOTD) banner. Syntax Parameters banner motd c line c c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. The delineator is a percent character (%). line Enter a text string for your message of the day banner message ending the message with your delineator. The delineator is a percent character (%). Defaults No banner is configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command clears alarms that are no longer active. If an alarm situation is still active, it is seen in the system output. clear command history Clear the command history log. Syntax clear command history Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. configure Enter CONFIGURATION mode from EXEC Privilege mode. Syntax Parameters configure [terminal] terminal Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword terminal to specify that you are configuring from the terminal. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the IOM. 9.4(0.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command enables (and disables) the collection of CPU traffic statistics from the time this command is executed (not from system boot). However, excessive traffic a CPU receives automatically triggers (turn on) the collection of CPU traffic statics. To view the traffic statistics, use the show cpu-traffic-stats command. If the CPU receives excessive traffic, traffic is rate controlled.
debug ftpserver View transactions during an FTP session when a user is logged into the FTP server. Syntax debug ftpserver Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. disable Return to EXEC mode.
do Allows the execution of most EXEC-level commands from all CONFIGURATION levels without returning to the EXEC level. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History do command command Enter an EXEC-level command. none • CONFIGURATION • INTERFACE All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
enable Enter EXEC Privilege mode or any other privilege level configured. After entering this command, you may need to enter a password. Syntax Parameters enable [level] level Defaults 15 Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes All Modes Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter a number for a privilege level of the Dell Networking OS. The range is from 0 to 15. The default is 15. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Optionally, use the banner exec command to create a text string that is displayed when you access EXEC mode. This command toggles that display. Related Commands banner exec — configures a banner to display when entering EXEC mode. line — enables and configures console and virtual terminal lines to the system.
To disable the secure mode, use no enable secure command. Parameters None Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL. end Return to EXEC Privilege mode from other command modes (for example, CONFIGURATION mode). Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Related Commands end • CONFIGURATION • LINE • INTERFACE • MONITOR SESSION • PROTOCOL LLDP All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.
Parameters minutes Enter the number of minutes of inactivity on the system before disconnecting the current session. The range is from 0 to 35791. The default is 10 minutes for the console line and 30 minutes for the VTY line. seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of seconds. The range is from 0 to 2147483. The default is 0 seconds. Defaults 10 minutes for console line; 30 minutes for VTY lines; 0 seconds Command Modes LINE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Related Commands end — returns to EXEC Privilege mode. feature unique-name Set a unique host name for the system. Syntax feature unique-name Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Command History • Standalone • VLT • Stacking • PMUX • STOMP Full Switch Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator, the FN IOM and MXL.
Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Example morpheus% ftp 10.31.1.111 Connected to 10.31.1.111. 220 FTOS (1.0) FTP server ready Name (10.31.1.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information After you enable FTP server functions with the ftp-server enable command, Dell Networking recommends specifying a top-level directory path. Without a top-level directory path specified, the Dell Networking OS directs users to the flash directory when logging in to the FTP server.
hostname Set the host name of the system. Syntax Parameters hostname name name Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long. Defaults Dell Networking Operating System (OS) Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The host name is used in the prompt.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The password is listed in the configuration file; you can view the password by entering the show running-config ftp command in EXEC mode. Use the ip ftp password command when you use the ftp: parameter in the copy command. Related Commands copy — copy files. ftp-server username — sets the user name for the FTP sessions.
Related Commands copy — copies files from and to the switch. ip telnet server enable Enable the Telnet server on the switch. Syntax ip telnet server enable To disable the Telnet server, use the no ip telnet server enable command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. telnet — telnets to another device. ip ftp username Assign a user name for outgoing FTP connection requests. Syntax Parameters ip ftp username username username Enter a text string as the user name up to 40 characters long. Defaults No user name is configured.
vty number Enter the keyword vty followed by a number from 0 to 9 to configure a virtual terminal line for Telnet sessions. The system supports 10 Telnet sessions. end-number (OPTIONAL) Enter a number from 1 to 9 as the last virtual terminal line to configure. You can configure multiple lines at one time. Defaults Not configured Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You must have either the System Administrator or Security Administrator privileges to configure login concurrent-session limit or to enable clear-line.
Login: admin Password: Maximum concurrent sessions for the user reached. Current sessions for user admin: Line Location 2 vty 0 10.14.1.97 3 vty 1 10.14.1.97 4 vty 2 10.14.1.97 5 vty 3 10.14.1.97 Clear existing session? [line number/Enter to cancel]: Related Commands login statistics — Enable and configure user login statistics on console and virtual terminal lines. show login statistics — Displays login statistics of users who have used the console or virtual terminal lines to log in to the system.
If you enable user login statistics, the system displays the last successful login details of the current user and the details of any failed login attempts by others. If you use the login statistics time-period days command to set a custom time period, the system only reports the login statistics during that interval. NOTE: Login statistics is not applicable for login sessions that do not use user names for authentication.
motd-banner Enable a message of the day (MOTD) banner to appear when you log in to the system. Syntax motd-banner Defaults Enabled on all lines. Command Modes LINE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show login statistics Displays login statistics of users who have used the console or virtual terminal lines to log in to the system.
displays the number of failed login attempts by a specific user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced the successful-attempts keyword. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.145 ) Unsuccessful login attempt(s) since the last successful login: 0 Unsuccessful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 3 Successful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 4 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------User: admin1 Last login time: 12:49:19 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessfulattempts user login-id command. Dell# show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts user admin There were 3 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 12 day(s). The following is sample output of the show login statistics successfulattempts command. Dell#show login statistics successful-attempts There were 4 successful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 30 day(s).
trace-flags Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example Enter the keyword trace-flags to display IFM information for internal trace flags. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History host Enter the host name or the destination IP address of the device to which you are testing connectivity. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information If there is a change in the configuration, the Dell Networking OS prompts you to save the new configuration. Or you can save your running configuration with the copy running-config command. Related Commands reset stack-unit — resets any designated stack member except the management unit. service timestamps Add time stamps to debug and log messages. This command adds either the uptime or the current time and date.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information If you do not specify parameters and enter service timestamps, it appears as service timestamps debug uptime in the running-configuration. To view the current options set for the service timestamps command, use the show running-config command. show alarms Display the active major and minor alarms on the system.
show command-history Display a buffered log of all commands all users enter along with a time stamp. Syntax show command-history Defaults None Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information One trace log message is generated for each command. No password information is saved to this file.
console [4/20 10:55:8]: CMD-(CLI):[show lldp neighbors]by default from console [4/20 15:17:6]: CMD-(CLI):[show cam-acl]by default from console [4/20 16:34:59]: CMD-(CLI):[show running-config interface tengigabitethernet 0/ 55]by default from console [4/20 16:38:14]: CMD-(CLI):[show vlan]by default from console [5/4 9:11:52]: CMD-(TEL0):[show version]by admin from vty0 (10.11.68.14) [5/4 9:12:9]: CMD-(TEL0):[show hosts]by admin from vty0 (10.11.68.
Example Dell#show configuration lock Configure exclusively locked by the following line: Line : vty 0 Line number : 2 User : admin Type : AUTO State : LOCKED Ip address : 10.11.9.97 Dell# show cpu-traffic-stats Display the CPU traffic statistics. Syntax Parameters show cpu-traffic-stats [port number | all] port number (OPTIONAL) Enter the port number to display traffic statistics on that port only. The range is from 1 to 1568.
Unicast:100, Multicast:0, Broadcast:0 Dell# Related Commands debug cpu-traffic-stats — enables CPU traffic statistics for debugging. show debugging View a list of all enabled debugging processes. Syntax show debugging Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
stack-unit unit-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords stack-unit then the unit-id to display information on a specific stack member. The range is from 0 to 5. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view detailed diagnostics information. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of the diagnostics information. testcase Enter the keyword testcase to view current diagnostics testcases available in the system.
Example (all) Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information If there are no fiber ports in the unit, just the header under show inventory media displays. If there are fiber ports but no optics inserted, the output displays "Media not present or accessible". Example Dell#show inventory System Type : PE-FN-410S-IOA System Mode : 1.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The output for show memory command displays the memory usage of LP part (sysdlp) of the system. The sysdlp is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on the CPU.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
show processes memory — displays CPU usage information based on running processes. show processes ipc flow-control Displays the single window protocol queue (SWPQ) statistics. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Usage Information show processes ipc flow-control [cp] cp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword cp to view the control processor’s SWPQ statistics. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Field Description Retr /Available Retra Number of retries left Total/ Max Retra Number of retries allowed Important Points: Example • The SWP provides flow control-based reliable communication between the sending and receiving software tasks. • A sending task enqueues messages into the SWP queue3 for a receiving task and waits for an acknowledgement. • If no response is received within a defined period of time, the SWP timeout mechanism resubmits the message at the head of the FIFO queue.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History stack unit 0–5 Enter the keywords stack unit then a stack unit ID of the member unit for which to display memory usage on the forwarding processor. all Enter the keyword all for detailed memory usage on all stack members. summary Enter the keyword summary for a brief summary of memory availability and usage on all stack members. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
The output of the show memory command and this command differ based on which the Dell Networking OS processes are counted. Example • In the show memory output, the memory size is equal to the size of the application processes. • In the output of this command, the memory size is equal to the size of the application processes plus the size of the system processes.
show revision Displays the revision numbers of all stack-units. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example (Command) show revision • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell#show revision -- Stack unit 1 -IOM SYSTEM CPLD : 1 Dell# show server-interfaces Displays server port information.
TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet TenGigabitEthernet --More-Dell# Example (detail Command) 1/3 NO up down 1/4 NO up down 1/5 YES up up 1/6 NO up down 1/7 NO up down 1/8 NO up down 1/9 NO up down 1/10 NO up down 1/11 NO up down 1/12 NO up down 1/13 YES up up 1/14 NO up down 1/15 NO up down 1/16 YES
DHCP Client-ID :tenG131001ec9f10099 --More-- show system Displays the current status of all stack members or a specific stack member. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show system [brief | stack-unit unit-id] brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywordbrief to view an abbreviated list of system information. stack unit unit–id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywordsstack unit then the stack member ID for information on the stack member. The range is from 0 to 5.
Num Ports : 56 Up Time : 4 day, 7 hr, 9 min FTOS Version : 8-3-17-38 Jumbo Capable : yes POE Capable : no Boot Flash : A: 4.0.1.0bt [booted] B: 4.0.1.0bt1 Boot Selector : 4.0.0.
show tech-support Displays a collection of data from other show commands, necessary for Dell Networking technical support to perform troubleshooting on Aggregators. Syntax Parameters show tech-support [stack-unit unit-id | page] stack-unit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit to view CPU memory usage for the stack member designated by unit-id. The range is 0 to 5. page (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword page to view 24 lines of text at a time. Press the SPACE BAR to view the next 24 lines.
• show cam • show clock • show environment • show file • show interfaces • show inventory • show processes cpu • show processes memory • show running-conf • show version Example (save) Dell#show tech-support ? page Page through output stack-unit Unit Number | Pipe through a command Dell#show tech-support stack-unit 1 ? page Page through output | Pipe through a command Dell#show tech-support stack-unit 1 | ? except S how only text that does not match a pattern find Search for t
Copyright (c) 1999-2012 by Dell Inc. All Rights Reserved. Build Time: Thu Jul 19 05:59:59 PDT 2012 Build Path: /sites/sjc/work/swsystems01-2/ravisubramani/ ravis-8317/SW/SRC/Cp_src/ Tacacs FTOS uptime is 4 day(s), 7 hour(s), 14 minute(s) System image file is "dv-m1000e-2-b2" System Type: I/O-Aggregator Control Processor: MIPS RMI XLP with 2147483648 bytes of memory. 256M bytes of boot flash memory. 1 34-port GE/TE (XL) 56 Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.
detail Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • Enter the keyword detail to display uplink port information with description. EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Input Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts --More-- show util-threshold cpu Displays the set CPU utilization threshold values. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show util-threshold cpu • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
Usage Information This command displays all memory utilization thresholds of the management, standby, and stack-units. ssh-peer-stack-unit Open an SSH connection to the peer stack-unit. Syntax Parameters ssh-peer-stack-unit [-| username] -| username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -| followed by your username. Default: The username associated with the terminal. Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Not configured. • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Not configured. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
terminal length Configure the number of lines displayed on the terminal screen. Syntax terminal length screen-length To return to the default values, use the no terminal length command. Parameters screen-length Enter a number of lines. Entering zero will cause the terminal to display without pausing. The range is from 0 to 512. Default: 24 lines Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History 24 lines • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. terminal xml Enable XML mode in Telnet and SSH client sessions. Syntax terminal xml To exit the XML mode, use the no terminal monitor command. Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Disabled • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Timeout = 5 seconds; Probe count = 3; 30 hops max; 40 byte packet size; UDP port = 33434 • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. virtual-ip Configure a virtual IP address for the active management interface. You can configure virtual addresses both for IPv4 independently.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History memory Enter the keyword memory to copy the current running configuration to the startup configuration file. This command is similar to the copy running-config startup-config command. terminal Enter the keyword terminal to copy the current running configuration to the terminal. This command is similar to the show running-configcommand. • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
6 802.1X An authentication server must authenticate a client connected to an 802.1X switch port. Until the authentication, only extensible authentication protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic is allowed through the port to which a client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through the port. The Dell Networking operating software supports remote authentication dial-in service (RADIUS) and active directory environments using 802.1X Port Authentication.
• dot1x host-mode • dot1x mac-auth-bypass • dot1x max-eap-req • dot1x max-supplicants • dot1x port-control • dot1x quiet-period • dot1x reauthentication • dot1x reauth-max • dot1x server-timeout • dot1x supplicant-timeout • dot1x tx-period • show dot1x cos-mapping interface • show dot1x interface debug dot1x Display 802.1X debugging information. Syntax Parameters debug dot1x [all | auth-pae-fsm | backend-fsm | eapol-pdu] [interface interface] all Enable all 802.1X debug messages.
dot1x authentication (Configuration) Enable dot1x globally. Enable dot1x both globally and at the interface level. Syntax dot1x authentication To disable dot1x on a globally, use the no dot1x authentication command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
dot1x auth-fail-vlan Configure an authentication failure VLAN for users and devices that fail 802.1X authentication. Syntax dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [max-attempts number] To delete the authentication failure VLAN, use the no dot1x auth-fail-vlan vlan-id [max-attempts number] command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier. The range is from 1 to 4094. max-attempts number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords max-attempts followed number of attempts desired before authentication fails.
dot1x auth-server Configure the authentication server to RADIUS. Syntax dot1x auth-server radius Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x auth-type mab-only To authenticate a device with MAC authentication bypass (MAB), only use the host MAC address.
To disable MAB-only authentication on a port, enter the no dot1x auth-type mabonly command. Related Commands dot1x mac-auth-bypass — Enables MAC authentication bypass. dot1x guest-vlan Configure a guest VLAN for limited access users or for devices that are not 802.1X capable. Syntax dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id To disable the guest VLAN, use the no dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN Identifier. The range is from 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured.
• dot1x reauthentication — Enables periodic re-authentication of the client. • dot1x reauth-max — Configure the maximum number of times to re-authenticate a port before it becomes unauthorized. dot1x host-mode Enable single-host or multi-host authentication. Syntax Parameters dot1x host-mode {single-host | multi-host | multi-auth} single-host Enable single-host authentication. multi-host Enable multi-host authentication. multi-auth Enable multi-supplicant authentication.
Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x max-eap-req Configure the maximum number of times an extensive authentication protocol (EAP) request is transmitted before the session times out. Syntax dot1x max-eap-req number To return to the default, use the no dot1x max-eap-req command.
Parameters number Enter the number of supplicants that can be authenticated on a single port in Multi-Auth mode. The range is from 1 to 128. The default is 128. Defaults 128 hosts can be authenticated on a single authenticator port. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
dot1x quiet-period Set the number of seconds that the authenticator remains quiet after a failed authentication with a client. Syntax dot1x quiet-period seconds To disable quiet time, use the no dot1x quiet-time command. Parameters seconds Defaults 60 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the number of seconds. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 60. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x reauth-max Configure the maximum number of times a port can reauthenticate before the port becomes unauthorized. Syntax dot1x reauth-max number To return to the default, use the no dot1x reauth-max command. Parameters number Defaults 2 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the permitted number of reauthentications. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you configure the dot1x server-timeout value, take into account the communication medium used to communicate with an authentication server and the number of RADIUS servers configured.
dot1x tx-period Configure the intervals at which EAPOL PDUs the Authenticator PAE transmits. Syntax dot1x tx-period seconds To return to the default, use the no dot1x tx-period command. Parameters seconds Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the interval time, in seconds, that EAPOL PDUs are transmitted. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 30. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To display CoS mapping information only for the specified supplicant, enter a supplicant’s MAC address using the mac-address option. You can display the CoS mapping information applied to traffic from authenticated supplicants on 802.1X-enabled ports that are in Single-Hot, Multi-Host, and MultiSupplicant authentication modes.
show dot1x interface Display the 802.1X configuration of an interface. Syntax Parameters show dot1x interface interface [mac-address mac-address] interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • mac-address Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History For a Ten-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. (Optional) MAC address of a supplicant.
ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Auth PAE State: Backend State: Dell# 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 2 SINGLE_HOST Authenticated Idle Dell#show dot1x interface tengigabitethernet 0/1 mac-address 00:00:00:00:00:10 Supplicant Mac: 0 0 0 0 0 10 Lookup for Mac: 802.
7 Access Control Lists (ACL) Access control lists (ACLs) are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS).
• deny udp • ip access-list extended • permit (for Extended IP ACLs) • permit icmp • permit tcp • permit udp • seq • Common MAC Access List Commands • clear counters mac access-group • mac access-group • show mac access-lists • show mac accounting access-list • Standard MAC ACL Commands • deny • deny • mac access-list extended • permit • seq • Extended MAC ACL Commands • mac access-list standard • permit • seq • IP Prefix List Commands • clear ip prefix-list •
• set metric • set metric-type • set tag • show config • show route-map • deny (for Standard IP ACLs) • deny • seq • deny tcp • deny udp • deny arp (for Extended MAC ACLs) • deny icmp • deny ether-type (for Extended MAC ACLs) • deny • deny • permit (for Standard IP ACLs) • permit • permit ether-type (for Extended MAC ACLs) • permit icmp • permit udp • permit (for Extended IP ACLs) • permit • seq • permit tcp • seq arp • seq ether-type • seq • seq • pe
Commands Common to all ACL Types The following commands are available within each ACL mode and do not have mode-specific options. Some commands in this chapter may use similar names, but require different options to support the different ACL types (for example, the deny command). description Configure a short text string describing the ACL. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History description text text Enter a text string up to 80 characters long. Not enabled.
description Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Enter a description of up to 80 characters. Not configured. • CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-STANDARD • CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-EXTENDED • CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD • CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The remark command is available in each ACL mode.
Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History ipv4 | mac Enter the keyword ipv4 or mac to identify the access list type to resequence. access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list. StartingSeqNum Enter the starting sequence number to resequence. The range is from 0 to 4294967290. Step-toIncrement Enter the step to increment the sequence number. The range is from 1 to 4294967290. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you have exhausted all the sequence numbers, this feature permits re-assigning a new sequence number to entries of an existing prefix list. Related Commands seq — Assigns a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IP access list while creating the filter.
Common IP ACL Commands The following commands are available within both IP ACL modes (Standard and Extended) and do not have mode-specific options. When an ACL is created without a rule and then is applied to an interface, ACL behavior reflects an implicit permit. The switch supports both Ingress and Egress IP ACLs. NOTE: Also refer to the Commands Common to all ACL Types section. access-class Apply a standard ACL to a terminal line.
up two different types of access classes with each class processing either IPv4 or IPv6 rules separately. However, if you already have configured generic IP ACL on a terminal line, then you cannot further apply IPv4 or IPv6 specific filtering on top of this configuration. Because, both IPv4 and IPv6 access classes are already configured on this terminal line. Before applying either IPv4 or IPv6 filtering, you must first undo the generic configuration using the no access-class access-list-name command.
implicit-permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword implicit-permit to change the default action of the ACL from implicit-deny to implicitpermit (that is, if the traffic does not match the filters in the ACL, the traffic is permitted instead of dropped). vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the ID numbers of the VLANs. Defaults Not enabled.. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
in Identify whether ACL is applied on the ingress or egress side. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show ip access-lists test in Standard Ingress IP access list test seq 5 permit 1.1.1.0/24 count (0 packets) seq 10 deny 2.1.1.
Usage Information show ip accounting access-lists Description “Extended IP...” Displays the name of the IP ACL. “seq 5...” Displays the filter. If the keywords count or byte were configured in the filter, the number of packets or bytes the filter processes is displayed at the end of the line. “order 4” Displays the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The Dell operating system supports one ingress and one egress IP ACL per interface. The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specifications on entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. bytes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bytes to count bytes processed by the filter. dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority).
Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values.
• The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via the QoS policy framework. • The order option takes precedence over seq sequence-number. • If sequence-number is not configured, the rules with the same order value are ordered according to their configuration order. • If sequence-number is configured, the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for rules with the same order. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
The switch supports both Ingress and Egress IP ACLs. NOTE: Also refer to theCommands Common to all ACL Types and Common IP ACL Commands sections. deny (for Extended IP ACLs) Configure a filter that drops IP packets meeting the filter criteria.
which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands.
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
bit operator port port Enter a flag or combination of bits: • ack: acknowledgement field • fin: finish (no more data from the user) • psh: push function • rst: reset the connection • syn: synchronize sequence numbers • urg: urgent field (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) Enter the application layer port num
threshold-inmsgs count Defaults (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flowbased monitoring is not enabled.
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. threshold-inmsgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword then a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs are terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
Example An ACL rule with a TCP port range of 4000–8000 uses eight entries in the CAM.
Usage Information The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation. Example Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended TESTListEXTEND Dell(config-ext-nacl)# Related Commands ip access-list standard — configures a standard IP access list. resequence access-list — Displays the current configuration. permit (for Extended IP ACLs) To pass IP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
dscp Enter the keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is 0 to 63. message-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type. The range is 0 to 255 for ICMP type and 0 to 255 for ICMP code. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes.
When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. bit Enter a flag or combination of bits: • ack: acknowledgement field • fin: finish (no more data from the user) • psh: push function • rst: reset the connection • syn: synchronize sequence numbers • urg: urgent field dscp Enter the keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63.
the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (for example, gt, lt, or range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on bit mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
Related Commands ip access-list extended — creates an extended ACL. permit — assigns a permit filter for IP packets. permit udp — assigns a permit filter for UDP packets. permit udp To pass UDP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is 0 to 65535. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
ports is configured in the CAM based on bit mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
permit tcp — assigns a permit filter for TCP packets. seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter.
• port port range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter.) (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535. The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: • 23 = Telnet • 20 and 21 = FTP • 25 = SMTP • 169 = SNMP destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which the ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, the flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-EXTENDED Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for the flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.3(0.
when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands deny — Configures a filter to drop packets. permit — Configures a filter to forward packets.
mac access-group Apply a MAC ACL to traffic entering or exiting an interface. Enter into the Interface mode and apply the MAC ACL in the following manner. Syntax mac access-group access-list-name {in [vlan vlan-range] | out} To delete a MAC access-group, use the no mac access-group mac-list-name command. Parameters access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC access list, up to 140 characters. vlan vlan-range (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan and then enter a range of VLANs.
4 Related Commands If the MAC ACL is applied on a VLAN ACL group, then none of the VLANs in that group should have an access list applied on it. mac access-list standard — configures a standard MAC ACL. mac access-list extended — configures an extended MAC ACL. show mac access-lists Display all of the Layer 2 ACLs configured in the system, whether or not they are applied to an interface, and the count of matches/mismatches against each ACL entry displayed.
show mac accounting access-list Display MAC access list configurations and counters (if configured). Syntax Parameters show mac accounting access-list access-list-name interface interface in | out access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters.
Standard MAC ACL Commands When you create an access control list without any rule and then apply it to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects implicit permit. These commands configure standard MAC ACLs. The switch supports both Ingress and Egress MAC ACLs. NOTE: For more information, also refer to the Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common MAC Access List Commands sections. deny To drop packets that match the filter criteria, configure a filter.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of the following Ethertypes: • ev2 - is the Ethernet II frame format • llc - is the IEEE 802.3 frame format • snap - is the IEEE 802.3 SNAP frame format count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
Parameters any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match). count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specifications on entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation.
mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match). count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, Pv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match. If no mask is specified, a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 is applied (in other words, the filter allows only MAC addresses that match). count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The Dell operating system supports one ingress and one egress MAC ACL per interface. The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specification about entries allowed per ACL, refer to your switch documentation. The switch supports both ingress and egress ACLs.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. mac-destinationaddress Enter the destination MAC address and mask in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-destinationaddress-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched.
mac-destination-address mac-destination-address-mask} [ethertype operator] [count [byte]] Parameters sequencenumber Enter a number as the filter sequence number. The range is from zero (0) to 65535. deny Enter the keyword deny to drop any traffic matching this filter. permit Enter the keyword permit to forward any traffic matching this filter. any Enter the keyword any to filter all packets.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. deny — configures a filter to drop packets. permit — configures a filter to forward packets. IP Prefix List Commands When you create an access-list without any rule and then apply it to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects implicit permit. To configure or enable IP prefix lists, use these commands.
deny To drop packets meeting the criteria specified, configure a filter. Syntax Parameters deny ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] ip-prefix Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/ 8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0. ge min-prefixlength (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge and then enter the minimum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
Parameters prefix-name Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a string up to 16 characters long as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters long. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Prefix lists redistribute OSPF and RIP routes meeting specific criteria. Related Commands show ip route list — displays IP routes in an IP prefix list.
If you do not use the ge or le options, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered. Related Commands deny — configures a filter to drop packets. seq — configures a drop or permit filter with a specified sequence number. seq To a deny or permit filter in a prefix list while configuring the filter, assign a sequence number.
Usage Information If you do not use the ge or le options, only packets with an exact match to the prefix are filtered. Related Commands deny — configures a filter to drop packets. permit — configures a filter to pass packets. show config Display the current PREFIX-LIST configurations. Syntax show config Command Modes PREFIX-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ip prefix-list detail Ip Prefix-list with the last deletion/insertion: PL_OSPF_to_RIP ip prefix-list PL_OSPF_to_RIP: count: 3, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 25 seq 5 permit 1.1.1.0/24 (hit count: 0) seq 10 deny 2.1.0.0/16 ge 23 (hit count: 0) seq 25 permit 192.0.0.0 bitmask 192.0.0.
Route Map Commands When you create an access-list without any rule and then applied to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects implicit permit. To configure route maps and their redistribution criteria, use the following commands. continue To a route-map entry with a higher sequence number, configure a route-map.
• If the next route map entry contains a continue clause, the route map executes the continue clause if a successful match occurs. • If the next route map entry does not contain a continue clause, the route map evaluates normally. If a match does not occur, the route map does not continue and falls through to the next sequence number, if one exists.
match interface To match routes whose next hop is on the interface specified, configure a filter. Syntax match interface interface To remove a match, use the no match interface interface command. Parameters interface Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero (0) to 16383.
match ip address To match routes based on IP addresses specified in an access list, configure a filter. Syntax Parameters match ip address prefix-list-name prefix-list-name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. match interface — redistributes routes that match the next-hop interface. match ip address — redistributes routes that match an IP address. match ip route-source — redistributes routes that match routes advertised by other routers.
Related Commands match interface — redistributes routes that match the next-hop interface. match ip address — redistributes routes that match an IP address. match ip next-hop — redistributes routes that match the next-hop IP address. match metric — redistributes routes that match a specific metric. match route-type — redistributes routes that match a route type. match tag — redistributes routes that match a specific tag. match metric To match on a specified value, configure a filter.
match route-type To match routes based on the how the route is defined, configure a filter. Syntax Parameters match route-type {external [type-1 | type-2] | internal | local} external [type-1| type-2] Enter the keyword external then either type-1 or type-2 to match only on OSPF Type 1 routes or OSPF Type 2 routes. internal Enter the keyword internal to match only on routes generated within OSPF areas. local Enter the keyword local to match only on routes generated within the switch.
Parameters tag-value Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter a value as the tag on which to match. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. match interface — redistributes routes that match the next-hop interface. match ip address — redistributes routes that match an IP address.
sequence number if there are multiple instances of the route map. The range is from 1 to 65535. Defaults Not configured. If you do not define a keyword (permit or deny) for the route map, the permit action is the default. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
set metric-type — specify the metric type assigned to redistributed routes. set tag — specify the tag assigned to redistributed routes. set metric To assign a new metric to redistributed routes, configure a filter. Syntax set metric [+ | -] metric-value To delete a setting, use the no set metric command. Parameters + (OPTIONAL) Enter + to add a metric-value to the redistributed routes. - (OPTIONAL) Enter - to subtract a metric-value from the redistributed routes.
Parameters internal Enter the keyword internal to assign the Interior Gateway Protocol metric of the next hop as the route’s BGP MULTI_EXIT_DES (MED) value. external Enter the keyword external to assign the IS-IS external metric. type-1 Enter the keyword type-1 to assign the OSPF Type 1 metric. type-2 Enter the keyword type-2 to assign the OSPF Type 2 metric. Defaults Not configured.
Related Commands set automatic-tag — computes the tag value of the route. set metric — specifies the metric value assigned to redistributed routes. set metric-type — specifies the route type assigned to redistributed routes. show config Display the current route map configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show route-map route-map firpo, permit, sequence 10 Match clauses: Set clauses: tag 34 Dell# Related Commands route-map — configures a route map. deny (for Standard IP ACLs) To drop packets with a certain IP address, configure a filter.
have a higher priority) If you did not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100.
capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic.
Defaults byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100.
subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and s MAC ACLs.
mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values.
• The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via the QoS policy framework. • The order option takes precedence over seq sequence-number. • If sequence-number is not configured, the rules with the same order value are ordered according to their configuration order. • If sequence-number is configured, the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for rules with the same order. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no deny tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets are sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous.
• Defaults 169 = SNMP destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes.
You can configure either count (packets) or count (bytes). However, for an ACL with multiple rules, you can configure some ACLs with count (packets) and others as count (bytes) at any given time. Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (for example, gt, lt, or range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on bit mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.
Total Ports: 1024 Related Commands deny — assigns a filter to deny IP traffic. deny udp — assigns a filter to deny UDP traffic. deny udp To drop user datagram protocol (UDP) packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
You can configure either count (packets) or count (bytes). However, for an ACL with multiple rules, you can configure some ACLs with count (packets) and others as count (bytes) at any given time. Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (for example, gt, lt or range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on bit mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range.
deny arp (for Extended MAC ACLs) Configure an egress filter that drops ARP packets on egress ACL supported line cards. (For more information, refer to your line card documentation).
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
Version Description 6.5.1.0 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
deny icmp To drop all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter. Syntax deny icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [dscp] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] [threshold-in-msgs] [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command, if you know the filter’s sequence number.
is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flowbased monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-EXTENDED Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
deny ether-type (for Extended MAC ACLs) Configure an egress filter that drops specified types of Ethernet packets on egress ACL supported line cards. (For more information, refer to your line card documentation).
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywordlog to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-inmsgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter thethreshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated. with the seq, permit, or deny commands.
only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction.
Defaults host ip-address Enter the keyword host and then enter the IP address to specify a host IP address only. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
You can configure either count (packets) or count (bytes). However, for an ACL with multiple rules, you can configure some ACLs with count (packets) and others as count (bytes) at any given time. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
• Parameters Use the no permit {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} command. source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was sent. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flowbased monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. 9.3(0.
permit To forward packets from a specific source MAC address, configure a filter. Syntax permit {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] | log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs[count] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no permit {any | mac-source-address mac-source-addressmask} command.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
permit ether-type (for Extended MAC ACLs) Configure a filter that allows traffic with specified types of Ethernet packets. This command is supported only on 12-port GE line cards with SFP optics. For specifications, refer to your line card documentation.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
Version Description 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. 7.4.1.0 Added the monitor option. 6.5.10 Expanded to include the optional QoS order priority for the ACL entry. Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only.
them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). permit icmp Configure a filter to allow all or specific ICMP messages.
have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100.
egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port.
port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is 0 to 65535. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
ports is configured in the CAM based on bit mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
permit tcp — assigns a permit filter for TCP packets. permit (for Extended IP ACLs) To pass IP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax permit {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [count [bytes]] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands ip access-list extended — creates an extended ACL. permit tcp — assigns a permit filter for TCP packets. permit udp — assigns a permit filter for UDP packets.
is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface Defaults Not configured.
them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands deny — configures a MAC ACL filter to drop packets. seq —configure a MAC ACL filter with a specified sequence number. seq To a deny or permit filter in a MAC access list while creating the filter, assign a sequence number.
interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands deny — configures a filter to drop packets. permit — configures a filter to forward packets. permit tcp To pass TCP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
operator port port (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flowbased monitoring is not enabled.
capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic.
To remove this filter, use the no seq sequence-number command. Parameters sequencenumber Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290. deny Enter the keyword deny to drop all traffic meeting the filter criteria.. permit Enter the keyword permit to forward all traffic meeting the filter criteria. destination-macaddress macaddress-mask Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
• If sequence-number is not configured, the rules with the same order value are ordered according to their configuration order. • If sequence-number is configured, the sequence-number is used as a tie breaker for rules with the same order. When you use the log option, the CP processor logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details.
id {source-mac-address mac-address-mask | any} [count [byte] [order] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, use the no seq sequence-number command. Parameters sequencenumber Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290. deny Enter the keyword deny to drop all traffic meeting the filter criteria.. permit Enter the keyword permit to forward all traffic meeting the filter criteria.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies: • The seq sequence-number command is applicable only in an ACL group. • The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via the QoS policy framework. • The order option takes precedence over seq sequence-number. • If sequence-number is not configured, the rules with the same order value are ordered according to their configuration order.
seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter. Syntax Parameters seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [threshold-in-msgs [count] sequencenumber Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290. The range is from 0 to 65534. deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition.
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flowbased monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-STANDARD Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 9.3(0.
mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands deny — configures a filter to drop packets. permit — configures a filter to forward packets. seq — assigns a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IP access list while creating the filter.
host ipv6-address Enter the keyword host and then enter the IPv6 address to specify a host IP address or hostname. operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operands: port port • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter.) (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand.
interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which the ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction.
dscp Enter the keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter) port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is 0 to 65535.
Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, refer to the “Quality of Service” chapter of the Dell Operating System Configuration Guide. You can configure either count (packets) or count (bytes). However, for an ACL with multiple rules, you can configure some ACLs with count (packets) and others as count (bytes) at any given time. Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM.
Example An ACL rule with a TCP port lt 1023 uses only one entry in the CAM. Dell# Data Mask From To 1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 #Covered 1023 1024 Total Ports: 1024 Related Commands ip access-list extended — creates an extended ACL. permit — assigns a permit filter for IP packets. permit tcp — assigns a permit filter for TCP packets. permit tcp To pass TCP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
• syn: synchronize sequence numbers • urg: urgent field dscp Enter the keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: port port • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter) Enter the application layer port number.
is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The threshold range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode.
permit icmp Configure a filter to allow all or specific ICMP messages. Syntax permit icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [dscp] [message-type] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments][threshold-in-msgs [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). permit To configure a filter that matches the filter criteria, select an IPv6 protocol number, ICMP, IPv6, TCP, or UDP.
log OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-inmsgs (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated.
• Parameters Use the no deny udp {source address mask | any | host ipv6address} {destination address | any | host ipv6-address} command source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets are sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
Defaults interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The threshold range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
Related Commands deny – assigns a filter to deny IP traffic. deny tcp – assigns a deny filter for TCP traffic. deny tcp (for IPv6 ACLs) Configure a filter that drops TCP packets that match the filter criteria.
Defaults • 23 = Telnet • 20 and 21= FTP • 25 = SMTP • 169 = SNMP destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. bit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bit to count the bits that filter the processes. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count the packets that filter the processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count the bytes that filter the processes. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
Defaults source Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ipv6–address Enter the keyword host then the IPv6 address to specify a host IP address.
Version Description 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dscp to match to the IP DSCP values. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS order of priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the order keyword, the ACLs have the lowest order by default as 255.
commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
8 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This section describes the access control list (ACL) virtual local area network (VLAN) group, and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements. member vlan Add VLAN members to an ACL VLAN group. Syntax Parameters member vlan {VLAN-range} VLAN-range Enter the member VLANs using comma-separated VLAN IDs, a range of VLAN IDs, a single VLAN ID, or a combination.
ACL separately on the VLAN interface, each ACL has a mapping with the VLAN and increased CAM space utilization occurs. Attaching an ACL individually to VLAN interfaces is similar to the behavior of ACL-VLAN mapping storage in CAM prior to the implementation of the ACL VLAN group functionality. ip access-group Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group.
Parameters group-name (Optional) Display only the ACL VLAN group that is specified, up to 140 characters. detail Display information in a line-by-line format to display the names in their entirety. Without the detail option, the output displays in a table style and information may be truncated. Default No default behavior or values Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.
The following sample output shows the line-by-line style display when using the show acl-vlan-group detail option. NOTE: No group or access list names are truncated Dell#show acl-vlan-group detail Group Name : Test Egress IP Acl : Ingress IP Acl : test Ingress IPV6 Acl : Vlan Members : 1-100 show cam-acl-vlan Display the number of flow processor (FP) blocks that is allocated for the different VLAN services.
Example Field Description VlanOpenFlow Number of FP blocks for VLAN open flow operations. VlanIscsi Number of FP blocks for VLAN internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) counters. VlanHp Number of FP blocks for VLAN high performance processes. VlanFcoe Number of FP blocks for VLAN Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) operations. VlanAclOpt Number of FP blocks for ACL VLAN optimzation feature.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform. Usage Information The VLAN ContentAware Processor (VCAP) application is a pre-ingress CAP that modifies the VLAN settings before packets are forwarded. To support the ACL CAM optimization functionality, the CAM carving feature is enhanced. A total of four VACP groups are present, of which two are for fixed groups and the other two are for dynamic groups.
• L3AclCam • L2AclCam • V6AclCam The following describes the output fields of this show command: Example: Field Description LineCard Number of the line card that contains information on ACL VLAN groups Portpipe The hardware path that packets follow through a system for ACL optimization CAM-Region Type of area in the CAM block that is used for ACL VLAN groups Total CAM space Total amount of space in the CAM block Used CAM Amount of CAM space that is currently in use Available CAM Amount
Default None Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History Examples Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. The following sample output shows the line-by-line style display when using the show running-config acl-vlan-group option.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information You can have up to eight different ACL VLAN groups at any given time. When you configure an ACL VLAN group, you enter the ACL VLAN Group Configuration mode. To avoid the problem of excessive consumption of CAM area, you can configure ACL VLAN groups that combines all the VLANs that are applied with the same ACL in a single group.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information The output for this command displays in a line-by-line format. This allows the ACLVLAN-Group names (or the Access List Group Names) to display in their entirety. Examples The following sample output shows the line-by-line style display when using the show acl-vlan-group detail option.
9 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is a detection protocol that provides fast forwarding path failure detection. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation is based on the standards specified in the IETF Draft draft-ietf-bfd-base-03 and supports BFD on all Layer 3 physical interfaces including virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces and port-channels.
interval milliseconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval to specify nondefault BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 200. min_rx milliseconds Enter the keyword min_rx to specify the minimum rate at which the local system would like to receive control packets from the remote system. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 200.
do not inherit the global BFD enable/disable values configured with the bfd neighbor command or configured for the peer group to which a neighbor belongs. The neighbors inherit only the global timer values (configured with the bfd neighbor command). Related Commands show bfd neighbors — displays BFD neighbor information on all interfaces or a specified interface. bfd neighbor — explicitly enables a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bfd enable (Interface) Enable BFD on an interface. Syntax bfd enable Defaults BFD is enabled on all interfaces when you enable BFD from CONFIGURATION mode. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• Active — The active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. • Passive — The passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system. The default is Active. Defaults Refer to Parameters. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
bfd protocol-liveness Enable the BFD protocol liveness feature. Syntax bfd protocol-liveness Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Protocol Liveness is a feature that notifies the BFD Manager when a client protocol (for example, OSPF and ISIS) is disabled.
multiplier value Enter the keywords multiplier to specify the number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. The range is from 3 to 50. The default is 3. role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: • Active — The active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. • Passive — The passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system.
remote system. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 200. multiplier value Enter the keyword multiplier to specify the number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. The range is from 3 to 50. The default is 3. role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: • Active — The active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. • Passive — The passive system does not initiate a session.
from the remote system. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 200. multiplier value Enter the keywords multiplier to specify the number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. The range is from 3 to 50. The default is 3. role [active | passive] Enter the role that the local system assumes: • Active — The active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. • Passive — The passive system does not initiate a session.
peer-group-name Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the name of the peer group that you want to explicitly enable for BFD sessions. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
peer-group-name Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the name of the peer group that you want to explicitly disable for BFD sessions. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
detail Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet then the slot/port information. • For a port-channel interface, enter the keyword portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For VLAN interfaces, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. For ExaScale VLAN interfaces, the range is 1 to 2730 (VLAN IDs can be from 0 to 4093).
Client Registered: CLI Uptime: 00:02:04 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 376 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 314 Number of state changes: 2 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 6 Dell# Related Commands bfd neighbor — establishes a BFD session with a neighbor. bfd all-neighbors — establishes BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by the IS-IS protocol or OSPF protocol out of all interfaces.
10 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) For detailed information about configuring BGP, refer to the BGP chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
• bgp non-deterministic-med • bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop • bgp regex-eval-optz-disable • bgp router-id • bgp soft-reconfig-backup • capture bgp-pdu neighbor • capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size • clear ip bgp • clear ip bgp dampening • clear ip bgp flap-statistics • clear ip bgp peer-group • debug ip bgp • debug ip bgp dampening • debug ip bgp events • debug ip bgp keepalives • debug ip bgp notifications • debug ip bgp soft-reconfiguration • debug ip bgp updates • default-m
• neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound • neighbor timers • neighbor update-source • neighbor weight • network • network backdoor • redistribute • redistribute ospf • router bgp • show capture bgp-pdu neighbor • show config • show ip bgp • show ip bgp cluster-list • show ip bgp community • show ip bgp community-list • show ip bgp dampened-paths • show ip bgp detail • show ip bgp extcommunity-list • show ip bgp filter-list • show ip bgp flap-statistics • show ip bgp i
• debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration • ipv6 prefix-list • show ipv6 prefix-list • IPv6 MBGP Commands • show ipv6 mbgproutes BGPv4 Commands Border gateway protocol (BGP) is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing (CIDR) and the aggregation of routes and AS paths.
aggregate-address To minimize the number of entries in the routing table, summarize a range of prefixes. Syntax Parameters aggregate-address ip-address mask [advertise-map map-name] [asset] [attribute-map map-name] [summary-only] [suppress-map mapname] ip-address mask Enter the IP address and mask of the route to be the aggregate address. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) and mask in /prefix format (/x).
Usage Information At least one of the routes included in the aggregate address must be in the BGP routing table for the configured aggregate to become active. If routes within the aggregate are constantly changing, do not add the as-set parameter to the aggregate as the aggregate flaps to keep track of the changes in the AS_PATH. In route maps used in the suppress-map parameter, routes meeting the deny clause are not suppress; in other words, they are allowed.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor add-path — specifies that this neighbor/peer group can send/receive multiple path advertisements. bgp always-compare-med Allows you to enable comparison of the MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attributes in the paths from different external ASs. Syntax bgp always-compare-med To disable comparison of MED, enter no bgp always-compare-med.
Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Before enabling this feature, enable the enable bgp four-octet-assupportcommand. If you disable the four-octect-support command after using dot or dot+ format, the AS numbers revert to asplain text. When you apply an asnotation, it is reflected in the running-configuration.
To return to the default, enter the no bgp bestpath as-path ignore command. Defaults Disabled (that is, the software considers the AS_PATH when choosing a route as best). Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path.
bgp bestpath med confed Enable MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attribute comparison on paths learned from BGP confederations. Syntax bgp bestpath med confed To disable MED comparison on BGP confederation paths, enter the no bgp bestpath med confed command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information The MED is a 4-byte unsigned integer value and the default behavior is to assume a missing MED as 4294967295. This command causes a missing MED to be treated as 0. During path selection, paths with a lower MED are preferred over paths with a higher MED. bgp bestpath router-id ignore Do not compare router-id information for external paths during best path selection. Syntax bgp bestpath router-id ignore To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath router-id ignore command.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Route reflection to clients is not necessary if all client routers are fully meshed. Related Commands bgp cluster-id — assigns an ID to a BGP cluster with two or more route reflectors. neighbor route-reflector-client — configures a route reflector and clients. bgp cluster-id Assign a cluster ID to a BGP cluster with more than one route reflector.
neighbor route-reflector-client — configures a route reflector and clients. show ip bgp cluster-list — views paths with a cluster ID. bgp confederation identifier Configure an identifier for a BGP confederation. Syntax bgp confederation identifier as-number To delete a BGP confederation identifier, use the no bgp confederation identifier as-number command. Parameters as-number Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the AS number.
bgp confederation peers Specify the autonomous systems (ASs) that belong to the BGP confederation. Syntax bgp confederation peers as-number [...as-number] To return to the default, use the no bgp confederation peers command. Parameters as-number Enter the AS number. The range is from 0 to 65535 (2 byte), from 1 to 4294967295 (4 byte), or from 0.1 to 65535.65535 (dotted format). ...as-number (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 16 confederation numbers.
bgp dampening Enable BGP route dampening and configure the dampening parameters. Syntax bgp dampening [half-life reuse suppress max-suppress-time] [routemap map-name] To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life reuse suppress max-suppress-time] [route-map map-name] command. Parameters half-life (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is decreased.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you enter the bgp dampening command, the default values for half-life, reuse, suppress, and max-suppress-time are applied. The parameters are positiondependent; therefore, if you configure one parameter, configure the parameters in the order they appear in the CLI. Related Commands show ip bgp dampened-paths — views the BGP paths.
bgp enforce-first-as Disable (or enable) enforce-first-as check for updates received from EBGP peers. Syntax bgp enforce-first-as To turn off the default, use the no bgp enforce-first-as command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The bgp fast-external-failover command appears in the show config command output. bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-byte support for the BGP process. Syntax bgp four-octet-as-support To disable fast external failover, use the no bgp four-octet-as-support command.
bgp graceful-restart To support graceful restart as a receiver only, enable graceful restart on a BGP neighbor, a BGP node, or designate a local router. Syntax bgp graceful-restart [restart-time seconds] [stale-path-time seconds] [role receiver-only] To return to the default, use the no bgp graceful-restart command. Parameters restart-time seconds Enter the keyword restart-time then the maximum number of seconds to restart and bring-up all the peers. The range is from 1 to 3600 seconds.
To return to the default, use the no bgp non-deterministic-med command. Defaults Disabled (that is, paths/routes for the same destination but from different ASs do not have their MEDs compared). Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information In Non-Deterministic mode, paths are compared in the order in which they arrive.
is verified for the route’s protocol source and is checked if the route is learned from BGP or not. The clear ip bgp command is required for this command to take effect and to keep the BGP database consistent. Execute the clear ip bgp command right after executing this command. Related Commands clear ip bgp — clears the ip bgp. bgp regex-eval-optz-disable Disables the Regex Performance engine that optimizes complex regular expression with BGP.
51 10.10.10.0/00 Routing Protocol is "bgp 1" Cluster Id is set to 10.10.10.0 Router Id is set to 10.10.10.0 Fast-external-fallover enabled Regular expression evaluation optimization enabled Capable of ROUTE_REFRESH For Address Family IPv4 Unicast BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0 Distance: external 20 internal 200 local 200 Dell(conf-router_bgp)# Related Commands show ip protocols — views information on all routing protocols enabled and active.
bgp soft-reconfig-backup To avoid the peer from resending messages, use this command only when route-refresh is not negotiated. Syntax bgp soft-reconfig-backup To return to the default setting, use the no bgp soft-reconfig-backup command. Defaults Off Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size — specifies a size for the capture buffer. show capture bgp-pdu neighbor — displays BGP packet capture information. capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size Set the size of the BGP packet capture buffer. This buffer size pertains to both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.
clear ip bgp Reset BGP sessions. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp * | as-number | ip-address [flap-statistics | soft [in | out]] * Enter an asterisk ( * ) to reset all BGP sessions. as-number Enter the AS number to reset all neighbors belonging to that AS. The range is from 0 to 65535 (2 byte), from 1 to 4294967295 (4 byte), or from 0.1 to 65535.65535 (dotted format).
clear ip bgp dampening Clear information on route dampening and return the suppressed route to the Active state. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp dampening [ip-address mask] ip-address mask Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format and the prefix mask in slash format (/x) to clear dampening information only that BGP neighbor. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
NOTE: Enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the ? regular expression. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History • [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns. • ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element. • { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count. • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug ip bgp Display all information on BGP, including BGP events, keepalives, notifications, and updates. Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] [in | out] To disable all BGP debugging, use the no debug ip bgp command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
show debugging — views enabled debugging operations. debug ip bgp dampening View information on routes being dampened. Syntax debug ip bgp dampening [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp dampening command. Parameters in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only inbound dampened routes. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only outbound dampened routes.
peer-group peergroup-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only events on inbound BGP messages. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only events on outbound BGP messages. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. debug ip bgp notifications Allows you to view information about BGP notifications received from neighbors.
debug ip bgp soft-reconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debug. Syntax debug ip bgp {ip-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration To disable, use the no debug ip bgp {ip-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration command. Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the peer group..
prefix-list prefixlist-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword prefix-list then the name of an established prefix list. If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to allow all routes). ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the peer group. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Usage Information The default-metric command in BGP sets the value of the BGP MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attribute for redistributed routes only. Related Commands bgp always-compare-med — enables comparison of all BGP MED attributes. redistribute — redistributes routes from other routing protocols into BGP. description Enter a description of the BGP routing protocol Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.
ibgp Enter the keyword ibgp to enable multipath support for Internal BGP routes. number Enter a number as the maximum number of parallel paths. The range is from 2 to 64. Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you enable this command, use the clear ip bgp * command to recompute the best path.
Usage Information By default, when you create a neighbor/peer group configuration in the Router BGP context, this enables IPv4/Unicast AFI/SAFI. When you use activate in the new context, the neighbor/peer group enables for AFI/SAFI. neighbor add-path This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to send/receive multiple path advertisements.
To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-groupname} advertisement-interval command. Parameters Defaults ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers in the peer group. seconds Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, between BGP advertisements. The range is from 0 to 600 seconds.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor allowas-in Set the number of times an AS number can occur in the AS path. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in number To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-groupname} allowas-in command. Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-groupname} default-originate command. Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the default route of all routers in that peer group. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map then the name of a configured route map. Defaults Not configured.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor distribute-list Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefixlist-name {in | out} To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} command.
neighbor ebgp-multihop Attempt and accept BGP connections to external peers on networks that are not directly connected. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} ebgp-multihop [ttl] To disallow and disconnect connections, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} ebgp-multihop command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable failover, BGP keeps track of IP or IPv6 ability to reach the peer remote address and the peer local address.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This feature advertises to BGP neighbors through a capability advertisement. In Receiver Only mode, BGP saves the advertised routes of peers that support this capability when they restart. neighbor local-as To accept external routes from neighbors with a local AS number in the AS number path, configure Internal BGP (IBGP) routers.
neighbor maximum-prefix Control the number of network prefixes received. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold] [warning-only] To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} maximum-prefix maximum command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
neighbor password Enable message digest 5 (MD5) authentication on the TCP connection between two neighbors. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} password [encryption-type] password To delete a password, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} password command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the router to be included in the peer group. peer-group-name Enter the name of a configured peer group.
If you configure a password on one neighbor, but you have not configured a password for the neighboring router, the following message appears on the console while the routers attempt to establish a BGP session between them: %RPM0-P:RP1 %KERN-6-INT: No BGP MD5 from [peer's IP address] :179 to [local router's IP address]:65524 Also, if you configure different passwords on the two routers, the following message appears on the console: %RPM0-P:RP1 %KERN-6-INT: BGP MD5 password mismatch from [peer's IP address]
• neighbor shutdown A neighbor may keep its configuration after it was added to a peer group if the neighbor’s configuration is more specific than the peer group’s, and the neighbor’s configuration does not affect outgoing updates. A peer group must exist before you add a peer to it. If the peer group is disabled (shutdown) the peers within the group are also disabled (shutdown). Related Commands clear ip bgp — resets BGP sessions. neighbor peer-group (creating group) — creates a peer group.
neighbor peer-group passive Enable passive peering on a BGP peer group, that is, the peer group does not send an OPEN message, but responds to one. Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive [limit sessions] To delete a passive peer-group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peergroup passive command. Parameters peer-group-name Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group.
To delete a remote AS entry, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-groupname} remote-as number command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor to enter the remote AS in its routing table. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to enter the remote AS into routing tables of all routers within the peer group. number Enter a number of the AS. The range is from 0 to 65535 (2 byte) or from 1 to 4294967295 (4 byte). Defaults Not configured.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS numbers. Defaults Disabled (that is, private AS number are not removed). Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Applies to EBGP neighbors only. Configure your system to accept 4-byte formats before entering a 4 byte AS Number.
out Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword out to filter outbound routes. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you apply a route map to outbound routes, only routes that match at least one section of the route map are permitted.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information A route reflector reflects routes to the neighbors assigned to the cluster. Neighbors in the cluster do not need not to be fully meshed. By default, when you use no route reflector, the internal BGP (IBGP) speakers in the network must be fully meshed.
Usage Information Peers that are enabled within a peer group are disabled when their peer group is disabled. The neighbor shutdown command terminates all BGP sessions on the BGP neighbor or BGP peer group. Use this command with caution as it terminates the specified BGP sessions. When a neighbor or peer group is shut down, use the show ip bgp summary command to confirm its status. Related Commands show ip bgp summary — displays the current BGP configuration.
NOTE: This command is supported in BGP Router Configuration mode for IPv4 Unicast address only. Related Commands show ip bgp neighbors — displays routes received by a neighbor. neighbor timers Set keepalive and hold time timers for a BGP neighbor or a peer group. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} timers keepalive holdtime To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} timers command.
• whichever is the lower value; one-third of the new holdtime value, or the configured keepalive value, is the new keepalive value. neighbor update-source Enable the software to use Loopback interfaces for TCP connections for BGP sessions. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} update-source interface To use the closest interface, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-groupname} update-source interface command.
Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the peer router in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable all routers within the peer group. weight Enter a number as the weight. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 0. Defaults 0 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map then the name of an established route map. Only the following ROUTE-MAP mode commands are supported: • match ip address • set metric • set tag If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Although the system does not generate a route due to the backdoor config, there is an option for injecting/sourcing a local route in the presence of network backdoor config on a learned route.
If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information With the Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.0 and later, you can use the redistribute command to advertise the IGP cost as the MED on redistributed routes.
match internal (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match internal to redistribute OSPF internal routes only. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route map. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information With the Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information At least one interface must be in Layer 3 mode for the router bgp command to be accepted. If no interfaces are enabled for Layer 3, an error message appears: % Error: No router id configured Example Dell(conf)#router bgp 3 Dell(conf-router_bgp)# show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Display BGP packet capture information for an IPv4 address on the system.
ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00290104 000100b4 14141401 0c020a01 04000100 01020080 00000000 PDU[2] : len 19, captured 00:34:51 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 PDU[3] : len 19, captured 00:34:50 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 [. . .] Dell# Related Commands capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size — specifies a size for the capture buffer. show config View the current ROUTER BGP configuration.
show ip bgp View the current BGP IPv4 routing table for the system. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] [network [network-mask] [longerprefixes]] ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP network to view information only on that network.
Example Field Description Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network. Dell>show ip bgp BGP table version is 847562, local router ID is 63.114.8.131 Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network *> 0.0.0.0/0 * 3.0.0.0/8 80 i *> *> 3.3.0.0/16 Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path 63.114.8.
cluster-id Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the cluster id in dotted decimal format. The range is 1 — 4294967295. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp cluster-list command shown in the following example.
* I * I * I 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 0 0 0 100 100 100 0 ? 0 ? 0 ? show ip bgp community View information on all routes with Community attributes or view specific BGP community groups. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] community [community-number] [local-as] [no-export] [no-advertise] ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command. The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found.
*>i 6.10.0.0/15 *>i 6.14.0.0/15 *>i 6.133.0.0/21 *>i 6.151.0.0/1 --More-- 205.171.0.16 205.171.0.16 205.171.0.16 205.171.0.16 100 100 100 100 0 0 0 0 209 209 209 209 7170 7170 7170 7170 1455 1455 1455 1455 i i i i show ip bgp community-list View routes that a specific community list affects.
Example Field Description Weight Displays the route’s weight. Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network. Dell#show ip bgp community-list pass BGP table version is 0, local router ID is 10.101.15.
Example Dell>show ip bgp dampened-paths BGP table version is 210708, local router ID is 63.114.8.2 Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network From Reuse Path Dell> show ip bgp detail Display BGP internal information for the IPv4 Unicast address family.
AFChkNetTmrP 0x41ee705c : AFRtDamp 0 : AlwysCmpMed 0 : LocrHld 10 : LocrRem 10 : softReconfig 0x41a1a58c DefMet 0 : AutoSumm 1 : NhopsP 0x41a0d100 : Starts 0 : Stops 0 : Opens 0 Closes 0 : Fails 0 : Fatals 0 : ConnExps 0 : HldExps 0 : KeepExps 0 RxOpens 0 : RxKeeps 0 : RxUpds 0 : RxNotifs 0 : TxUpds 0 : TxNotifs 0 BadEvts 0 : SynFails 0 : RxeCodeP 0x41a1b6b8 : RxHdrCodeP 0x41a1b6d4 : RxOpCodeP 0x41a1b6e4 RxUpdCodeP 0x41a1b704 : TxEcodeP 0x41a1b734 : TxHdrcodeP 0x41a1b750 : TxOpCodeP 0x41a1b760 TxUpdCodeP 0x
AfDampReuse 0 : AfDampSupp 0 : AfDampMaxHld 0 : AfDampCeiling 0 : AfDampRmapP show ip bgp extcommunity-list View information on all routes with Extended Community attributes. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] extcommunity-list [list name] ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. list name Enter the extended community list name you wish to view. The range is 140 characters.
as-path-name Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter an AS-PATH access list name. The range is 140 characters. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp filter-list hello command shown in the following example.
* I * I * I * I * I *>I * I * I * I * I * I * I Dell# 6.1.20.1 6.1.6.0/24 192.100.11.2 192.100.8.2 192.100.9.2 192.100.10.2 6.1.5.1 6.1.6.1 6.1.20.1 6.1.20.0/24 192.100.11.2 192.100.8.2 192.100.9.2 192.100.10.2 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 20000 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? show ip bgp flap-statistics View flap statistics on BGP routes.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If you use the caret at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified. • $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show ip bgp inconsistent-as View routes with inconsistent originating autonomous system (AS) numbers; that is, prefixes that are announced from the same neighbor AS but with a different AS-Path. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] inconsistent-as • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
* *> 4.0.0.0/8 * * * * 6.0.0.0/20 * *> * * 9.2.0.0/16 * --More-- 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.60 63.114.8.34 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.60 63.114.8.34 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.33 63.114.8.60 63.114.8.34 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 18508 209 209 209 701 209 209 209 ? 209 209 209 7018 ? 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 3549 i 3549 i 3549 i 701 i 701 i show ip bgp neighbors Allows you to view the information BGP neighbors exchange.
denied-routes [network [network-mask] Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords denied-routes then either the network address (in dotted decimal format) or the network mask (in slash prefix format) to view all information on routes denied via neighbor inbound filters. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example ( ) The Lines Beginning with: Description Sent messages The line displays the number of BGP messages sent, the number of notifications (error messages), and the number of messages waiting in a queue for processing. Received updates This line displays the number of BGP updates received and sent. Soft reconfiguration This line indicates that soft reconfiguration inbound is configured. Minimum time Displays the minimum time, in seconds, between advertisements.
Example Dell#show ip bgp neighbors BGP neighbor is 100.10.10.2, remote AS 200, external link BGP version 4, remote router ID 192.168.2.
Example (Received-Routes) BGP table version is 13, local router ID is 120.10.10.1 Status codes: s suppressed, S stale, d damped, h history, * valid, > best Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed n - network, D - denied, S - stale Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network D 70.70.21.0/24 D 70.70.22.0/24 D 70.70.23.0/24 D 70.70.24.0/24 *> 70.70.25.0/24 *> 70.70.26.0/24 *> 70.70.27.0/24 *> 70.70.28.0/24 *> 70.70.29.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp next-hop command shown in the following example. Example Field Description Next-hop Displays the next-hop IP address. Via Displays the IP address and interface used to reach the next hop. RefCount Displays the number of BGP routes using this next hop.
NOTE: Enter an escape sequence (CTRL+v) prior to entering the ? regular expression. Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns. • ( ) = (parenthesis) groups a series of pattern elements to a single element. • { } = (braces) minimum and the maximum match count. • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string.
0x1efe7c1c 0x1efe7bdc 0x1efe7b5c 0x1efe7adc 0x1efe7e9c 0x1efe7b9c Dell# 395 451 491 883 983 1003 6 6 78 2 10000 6 0 120 0 {82 83} ? {72 73} ? ? i 33 ? i show ip bgp paths as-path View all unique AS-PATHs in the BGP database. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp paths as-path • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
0x1ea3c0d4 0x1ea3c224 0x1ea3c294 0x1ea3c02c Dell# 764 1019 1019 1021 1 1 1 4 {82 83} 43 23 show ip bgp paths community View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp paths community • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
286:3040 5606:40 12955:5606 0x1c9f8e24 50 6 209:209 209:4069 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300 0x1c9f88e4 53 4 209:209 209:3193 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300 0x1f58a944 57 6 209:209 209:2073 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300 0x1ce6be44 80 2 209:209 209:999 209:40832 0x1c6e2374 80 2 209:777 209:41528 0x1f58ad6c 82 46 209:209 209:41528 0x1c6e2064 83 2 209:777 209:40832 0x1f588ecc 85 570 209:209 209:40832 0x1f57cc0c 98 2 209:209 209:21226 286:3031 13646:1044 13646:1124 13646:1154 13646:1164 13646:1184 13646:1194 13646:12
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp peer-group command shown in the following example. Example ( ) Line beginning with: Description Peer-group Displays the peer group’s name. Administratively shut Displays the peer group’s status if the peer group is not enabled. If you enable the peer group, this line is not displayed. BGP version Displays the BGP version supported.
12.1.1.3* 12.1.1.4* 12.1.1.5* 12.1.1.6* 12.2.1.2* 12.2.1.3* 12.2.1.4* 12.2.1.5* 12.2.1.6* 12.3.1.2* 12.3.1.3* 12.3.1.4* 12.3.1.5* 12.3.1.6* 12.4.1.2* 12.4.1.3* 12.4.1.4* 12.4.1.5* 12.4.1.6* Related Commands neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) — assigns a peer to a peer-group. neighbor peer-group (creating group) — creates a peer group. show ip bgp regexp Display the subset of the BGP routing table matching the regular expressions specified.
• Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp regexp command shown in the following example. Example (S4810) Field Description Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route.
16559 i *>I 4.21.82.0/24 16559 i *>I 4.21.252.0/23 8063 19198 i *>I 4.23.180.0/24 30576 i *>I 4.36.200.0/21 11854 14135 i *>I 4.67.64.0/22 19281 i *>I 4.78.32.0/21 i *>I 6.1.0.0/16 *>I 6.2.0.0/22 *>I 6.3.0.0/18 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 174 4200 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 6389 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 3561 6128 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 14742 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 11608 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 3491 29748 1.1.1.2 1.1.1.2 1.1.1.
Field Description BGP path attribute entries Displays the number of BGP path attributes and the amount of memory used to process them. BGP AS-PATH entries Displays the number of BGP AS_PATH attributes processed and the amount of memory used to process them. BGP community entries Displays the number of BGP COMMUNITY attributes processed and the amount of memory used to process them. The show ip bgp community command provides more details on the COMMUNITY attributes.
Field Description If the neighbor is not in Established stage, the current stage is displayed (Idle, Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm). When the peer is transitioning between states and clearing the routes received, the phrase (Purging) may appear in this column. If the neighbor is disabled, the phrase (Admin shut) appears in this column. Example (S4810) Dell#show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 120.10.10.
timers bgp Adjust the BGP Keep Alive and Hold Time timers. Syntax timers bgp keepalive holdtime To return to the default, use the no timers bgp command. Parameters keepalive Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent to the neighbor routers. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 60 seconds. holdtime Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between the last keepalive message and declaring the router dead. The range is from 3 to 65535.
To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp ipv4 multicast dampening command. Parameters dampening Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap dampening information. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. distance bgp Define an administrative distance for routes.
Usage Information CAUTION: Dell Networking OS recommends that you do not change the administrative distance of internal routes. Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table inconsistencies. The higher the administrative distance assigned to a route means that your confidence in that route is low. Routes assigned an administrative distance of 255 are not installed in the routing table. Routes from confederations are treated as internal BGP routes.
Network Dell> From Reuse Path BGP Extended Communities (RFC 4360) BGP Extended Communities, as defined in RFC 4360, is an optional transitive BGP attribute. BGP Extended Communities provides two major advantages over Standard Communities: • The range is extended from 4-octet (AA:NN) to 8-octet (Type:Value) to provide enough number communities.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If the set community rt and soo are in the same route-map entry, the behavior defines as: Related Commands • If the rt option comes before soo, with or without the additive option, soo overrides the communities rt sets. • If the rt option comes after soo, without the additive option, rt overrides the communities soo sets.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If the set community rt and soo are in the same route-map entry, the behavior defines as: Related Commands • If the rt option comes before soo, with or without the additive option, soo overrides the communities rt sets. • If the rt option comes after soo, without the additive option, rt overrides the communities soo sets.
Example Field Description Community Displays the extended community attributes in this BGP path. Dell#show ip bgp paths extcommunity Total 1 Extended Communities Address 0x41d57024 Hash Refcount Extended Community 12272 1 RT:7:200 SoO:5:300 SoO:0.0.0.3:1285 Dell# show ip bgp extcommunity-list View information on all routes with Extended Community attributes.
IPv6 BGP Commands IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) is supported on the switch. Border gateway protocol (BGP) is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and the aggregation of routes and AS paths. Basically, two routers (called neighbors or peers) exchange information including full routing tables and periodically send messages to update those routing tables.
clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft Clear and reapply policies for IPv6 unicast routes without resetting the TCP connection; that is, perform BGP soft reconfiguration. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp {* | as-number | ipv4-neighbor-addr | ipv6-neighboraddr | peer-group name} ipv6 unicast soft [in | out] * Clear and reapply an asterisk ( * ) for all BGP sessions. as-number Clear and reapply policies for all neighbors belonging to the AS.
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast softreconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debugging for IPv6 unicast routes. Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration command. Parameters ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor on which you want to enable soft-reconfiguration debugging.
NOTE: There is a 140-character limit for prefix list names. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ipv6 prefix-list — View the selected IPv6 prefix-list. show ipv6 prefix-list Displays the specified IPv6 prefix list.
IPv6 MBGP Commands Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the Internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems (AS). MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858. show ipv6 mbgproutes Display the selected IPv6 MBGP route or a summary of all MBGP routes in the table.
11 Configuration Cloning Configuration Cloning enables you to clone the configuration from one aggregator to the other. It identifies a source aggregator where running configuration is check-pointed, extracted and downloaded to the target aggregator for further use. The target aggregator checks the compatibility of the cloning file regarding the mode, port types and optional modules.
file-name filename Enter the keywords file-name to specify the user-defined cloning configuration file name in flash. By default, the file name is cloning-config. output xml Enter the keywords output xml to enable the command output status to be displayed in the XML format. Defaults cloning-config Command Modes EXEC Command History Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM and M I/O Aggregator. clone-config create Create the cloning configuration.
12 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) Content addressable memory (CAM) commands are supported on the Dell Networking operating software on the platform. WARNING: If you are using these features for the first time, contact Dell Networking Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for guidance.
cam-acl (Configuration) Select the default CAM allocation settings or reconfigure a new CAM allocation for Layer 2, IPv4, and IPv6 ACLs, Layer 2 and Layer 3 (IPv4) QoS, Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT), IP and MAC source address validation for DHCP, Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) ACLs, and Policy-based Routing (PBR).
ecfmacl number Enter the keyword ecfmacacl and then the number of FP blocks for ECFM ACL. The range is from 0 to 5. nlbclusteracl number Enter the keyword nlbclusteracl and then the number of FP blocks for nlbcluster ACL. The range is from 0 to 2. By default the value is 0 and it supports eight NLB arp entries reserved for internal functionality. NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Added the keyword nlbcluster ACL. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for PBR. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system for the new settings to take effect. The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks.
Usage Information When you enable this command, if a Policy Map containing classification rules (ACL and/or dscp/ ip-precedence rules) is applied to more than one physical interface on the same port pipe, only a single copy of the policy is written (only one FP entry is used). NOTE: An ACL itself may still require more that a single FP entry, regardless of the number of interfaces.
L2Acl : Ipv4Acl : Ipv6Acl : Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : L2PT : IpMacAcl : VmanQos : VmanDualQos : EcfmAcl : FcoeAcl : iscsiOptAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl: 6 4 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- stack-unit 1 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 show ca
Usage Information The display reflects the settings implemented with the cam-acl-egress command.
13 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) The Dell Networking OS supports the following CoPP commands. control-plane-cpuqos To manage control-plane traffic, enter control-plane mode and configure the switch. Syntax control-plane-cpuqos Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information Create a policy-map by associating a queue number with the qos-policy. Create QoS policies prior to enabling this command. For CoPP, do not use the keywords cpu-qos when creating qos-policy-input. Related Commands qos-policy-input — creates a QoS input policy map. policy-map-input — creates an input policy map. service-policy rate-limit-protocols Apply a policy for the system to rate limit control protocols on a per-protocol basis.
policy-map-input — creates an input policy map. show cpu-queue rate cp Display the rates for each queue. Syntax show cpu-queue rate cp Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command applies the service-policy based on the type of protocol defined in the ACL rules.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
ICMPV6 NS ICMPV6 RS ICMPV6 VRRPV6 OSPFV3 Dell# any any any any any any any any any any _ _ _ _ _ Q5 Q5 Q6 Q10 Q9 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ show mac protocol-queue-mapping Display the queue mapping for the MAC protocols. Syntax show mac protocol-queue-mapping Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
14 u-Boot All commands in this chapter are in u-Boot mode. These commands are supported on the Dell Networking Aggregator only. To access this mode, hit any key when the following line appears on the console during a system boot: Hit any key to stop autoboot: You enter u-Boot immediately, as indicated by the BOOT_USER# prompt. NOTE: Only the most frequently used commands available in uBoot mode are described in this chapter. In uBoot mode, you cannot use the Tab key for command completion.
boot change Change the operating system boot parameters. Syntax boot change [primary | secondary | default] Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. boot show net config retries Show the number of retries for network boot configuration failure.
Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. BOOT_USER # boot write net config retries 2 Updated number of Network Boot Config retries to 2. BOOT_USER # boot zero Clears the primary, secondary, or default boot parameters.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. enable Change the access privilege level. Syntax enable [user| admin] Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. help Displays the help menu. Syntax help Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.
show number of retries for network boot config failure boot write net config retries write number of retries for network boot config failure boot zero [primary|secondary|default] zero operating system boot parameters default-gateway default-gateway - set the default gateway ip address enable [user|admin] change access privilege level help display help menu -(36%)-Use to continue, q to stop: BOOT_USER # ignore enable password Ignore the enabled password.
interface management ethernet ip address Set the management port IP address and mask. Syntax interface management ethernet ip address Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. no default gateway Clear the default gateway IP address.
no interface management ethernet ip address Clear the management port IP address and mask. Syntax no interface management ethernet ip address Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. reload Reload the switch. Syntax reload Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. BOOT_USER # show boot blc ? Total 1 possible command found. Possible command list: show boot blc show the boot loop counter value BOOT_USER # show boot blc Boot Loop Counter : 10 BOOT_USER # show boot selection Displays the ROM bootstrap bootflash partition.
show bootflash Show the summary of boot flash information. Syntax show bootflash Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. BOOT_USER # show bootflash GENERAL BOOTFLASH INFO ====================== Bootflash Partition A: Dell Force10 Networks System Boot Official IOM_LP_IMG_BOOT_LOADER, BSP Release 4.0.1.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. BOOT_USER # show bootvar PRIMARY OPERATING SYSTEM BOOT PARAMETERS: ======================================== boot device : tftp file name : premnath Management Etherenet IP address : 10.16.130.134/16 Server IP address : 10.16.127.35 Default Gateway IP address : 15.0.0.
Example BOOT_USER # show default-gateway Gateway IP address: 15.0.0.1 BOOT_USER # show interface management ethernet Show the management port IP address and mask. Syntax show interface management ethernet Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Management ethernet Port Configuration: 100M Management ethernet Port Configuration: full duplex BOOT_USER # syntax help Show the syntax information. Syntax help Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
15 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single, robust, converged network to support multiple traffic types, including local area network (LAN), server, and storage traffic. DCB features are auto-configured in standalone mode. The Dell Networking OS commands for DCB features include 802.1Qbb priority-based flow control (PFC), 802.
• dcb enable pfc-queues • dcb enable auto-detect on-next-reload • dcb-map stack-unit all stack-ports all • dcbx-port role • dcbx version • debug dcbx • description • fc-map • fcoe-map • fcoe priority-bits • iscsi priority-bits • keepalive • interface vlan (NPIV proxy gateway) • pfc mode on • pfc no-drop queues • priority • priority-group bandwidth pfc • priority-pgid • qos-policy-output ets • qos-policy-buffer • priority-list • scheduler • show dcb • show inter
advertise dcbx-appln-tlv On a DCBX port with a manual role, configure the application priority TLVs advertised on the interface to DCBX peers. Syntax advertise dcbx-appln-tlv {fcoe | iscsi} To remove the application priority TLVs, use the no advertise dcbx-appln-tlv {fcoe | iscsi} command. Parameters {fcoe | iscsi} Enter the application priority TLVs, where: • fcoe: enables the advertisement of FCoE in application priority TLVs.
To remove the advertised ETS TLVs, use the no advertise dcbx-tlv command. Parameters {ets-conf | etsreco | pfc} Enter the PFC and ETS TLVs advertised, where: • ets-conf: enables the advertisement of ETS configuration TLVs. • ets-reco: enables the advertisement of ETS recommend TLVs. • pfc: enables the advertisement of PFC TLVs. Defaults All PFC and ETS TLVs are advertised. Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.
To remove the bandwidth percentage, use the no bandwidth-percentage command. Parameters percentage Enter the percentage assignment of weight to the class/queue. The range is from 1 to 100% (granularity 1%). Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-out) Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information DCB is not supported if you enable link-level flow control on one or more interfaces. dcb-policy buffer-threshold (Global Configuration) Assign the dcb buffer threshold policy on the stack ports. To apply the dcb buffer threshold policy on the stack-units, use the configuration mode.
priority and the pause or resume thresholds for the buffer. This method of configuration enables you to manage and administer the behavior of lossless queues. Example for Configuration Mode Dell(conf)# dcb-policy buffer-threshold stack-unit all stack-ports all test Example for Interface Mode Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#dcb-policy buffer-threshold test dcb-policy buffer-threshold (Interface Configuration) Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile on interfaces.
clear dcbx counters Clear all DCBx TLV counters on an interface. Syntax clear dcbx counters tengigabitethernet slot/port Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. clear ets counters Clear ETS TLV counters.
clear pfc counters Clear the PFC TLV counters and PFC statistics on an interface or stack unit. Syntax Parameters Defaults clear pfc counters [port-type slot/port [statistics]]| [stack-unit {unit-number | all} stack-ports all] port-type Enter the keywords port-type then the slot/port information. stack-unit unit number Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack-unit number to clear. The range is from 0 to 5.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN 2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information You can configure up to a maximum of four lossless (PFC) queues.
Command History Example (Disable) Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.3 Added auto-detect parameter on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
stack-unit 0 port-set 0 DCB Status: Enabled, PFC Queue Count: 4 stack-unit Total Buffer PFC Total Buffer PFC Shared Buffer PFC Available Buffer PP (KB) (KB) (KB) (KB) -----------------------------------------------------------------0 0 3822 1912 832 450 Dell(conf)# Example (Enable DCB with AutoDetect) Dell#show dcb stack-unit 0 port-set 0 DCB Status : Disabled PFC Queue Count : 2 Total Buffer[lossy + lossless] (in KB) : 3822 PFC Total Buffer (in KB) : 1912 PFC Shared Buffer (in KB) : 832 PFC Available Buf
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO Modules with I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The dcb-map stack-unit all stack-ports all command overwrites any previous DCB maps applied to stack ports. dcbx-port role Configure the DCBX port role the interface uses to exchange DCB information.
Version Description 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information DCBX requires that you enable LLDP to advertise DCBX TLVs to peers. Configure DCBX operation at the INTERFACE level on a switch or globally on the switch. To verify the DCBX configuration on a port, use the show interface dcbx detail command. dcbx version Configure the DCBX version used on the interface. Syntax dcbx version {auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.
Configure DCBX operation at the INTERFACE level on a switch or globally on the switch. To verify the DCBX configuration on a port, use the show interface dcbx detail command. debug dcbx Enable DCBX debugging. Syntax debug dcbx {all | auto-detect-timer | config-exchng | fail | mgmt | resource | sem | tlv} To disable DCBX debugging, use the no debug dcbx command.
description Enter a text description of the DCB policy (PFC input or ETS output). Syntax description text To remove the text description, use the no description command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History text Enter the description of the output policy. The maximum is 32 characters. none • DCB INPUT POLICY • DCB OUTPUT POLICY Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN 2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. Usage Information The FC-MAP value you enter must match the FC-MAP value used by an FC switch or FCoE forwarder (FCF) in the fabric. An FCF switch accepts only FCoE traffic that uses the correct FC-MAP value. The FC-MAP value is used to generate the fabric-provided MAC address (FP-MAC).
Command Modes • Keepalive: enable • Vlan priority: 3 CONFIGURATION INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information An FCoE map is a template used to map FCoE and FC parameters in a converged fabric.
To remove the configured FCoE priority, use the no fcoe priority-bits command. Parameters priority-bitmap Enter the priority-bitmap range. The range is from 1 to FF. Defaults 0x8 Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I/O Aggregator.
Version Description 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is available at the global level only. keepalive Send keepalive packets periodically to keep an interface alive when it is not transmitting data. Syntax keepalive [seconds] To stop sending keepalive packets, use the no keepalive command. Parameters seconds (OPTIONAL) For interfaces with PPP encapsulation enabled, enter the number of seconds between keepalive packets.
Parameters vlan-id Enter a number as the VLAN Identifier. The range is 1 to 4094. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information By applying a DCB input policy with PFC enabled, you enable PFC operation on ingress port traffic.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The maximum number of lossless queues globally supported on the switch is two. The following lists the dot1p priority-queue assignments. dot1p Value in the Incoming Frame Description heading 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 priority Configure the priority for the PFC threshold to be allocated to the buffer space parameters.
threshold-value Buffer offset limit at which the port resumes the peer in KB. Enter a number in the range of 1 to 7787. The default is 10 KB. shared-thresholdweight Buffer shared threshold weight size Weightage of the priorities on the shared buffer size in the system. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 9. The default shared threshold weight is 10. Default The default size of the ingress buffer is 45 KB.
Parameters priority-group group-num Enter the keyword priority-group followed by the number of an 802.1p priority group. Use the priority-pgid command to create the priority groups in a DCB map. bandwidth percentage Enter the keyword bandwidth followed by a bandwidth percentage allocated to the priority group. The range of valid values is 1 to 100. The sum of all allocated bandwidth percentages in priority groups in a DCB map must be 100%.
To remove a priority-group configuration in a DCB map, enter the no prioritygroup bandwidth pfc command. By default, equal bandwidth is assigned to each dot1p priority in a priority group. Use the bandwidth parameter to configure the bandwidth percentage assigned to a priority group. The sum of the bandwidth allocated to all priority groups in a DCB map must be 100% of the bandwidth on the link. You must allocate at least 1% of the total port bandwidth to each priority group.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information PFC and ETS settings are not pre-configured on Ethernet ports. You must use the dcbmap command to configure different groups of 802.1p priorities with PFC and ETS settings. Using the priority-pgid command, you assign each 802.1p priority to one priority group.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
pause Pause frames to be sent at the specified buffer limit levels and pause packet settings no-drop The packets for this queue must not be dropped value Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7 to denote the priority to be allocated to the dynamic buffer control mechanism buffer-size Ingress buffer size size Size of the ingress buffer in KB. Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7787. The default is 45 KB.
priorities configured within the DCB input policy is applied, then the configuration for those priorities are pre-designed. However, if the peer-provided priorities are applied, although a DCB input policy is present, the peer-provided priorities become effective for buffer configuration. This method of configuration provides an easy and flexible technique to accommodate both administratively-configured and peer-configured priorities.
NOTE: Please note that Dell Networking does not recommended to use this command as it has been deprecated in the current 9.4(0.0) release. A warning message appears when you try to run this command indicating that you have to use the dcb-map commands in the future. scheduler Configure the method used to schedule priority traffic in port queues. Syntax scheduler value To remove the configured priority schedule, use the no scheduler command. Parameters value Enter schedule priority value.
Related Commands • bandwidth-percentage — bandwidth percentage allocated to priority traffic in port queues. show dcb Displays the data center bridging status, the number of PFC-enabled ports, and the number of PFC-enabled queues. Syntax Parameters show dcb [stack-unit unit-number] unit number Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the DCB unit number. The range is from 0 to 5. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. • You can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1/1 - 4. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Example Field Description Local DCBX Status: DCBX Operational Version DCBX version advertised in Control TLVs. Local DCBX Status: DCBX Max Version Supported Highest DCBX version supported in Control TLVs. Local DCBX Status: Sequence Number Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs. Local DCBX Status: Acknowledgment Number Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs. Local DCBX Status: Protocol State Current operational state of the DCBX protocol: ACK or INSYNC.
E-ETS Configuration TLV enabled e-ETS Configuration TLV disabled R-ETS Recommendation TLV enabled r-ETS Recommendation TLV disabled P-PFC Configuration TLV enabled p-PFC Configuration TLV disabled F-Application priority for FCOE enabled f-Application Priority for FCOE disabled I-Application priority for iSCSI enabled i-Application Priority for iSCSI disabled ----------------------------------------------------------Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/49 Remote Mac Address 00:00:00:00:00:11 Port Role is Auto-Upst
NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. • You can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1/1 - 4. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Example (Summary) Field Description Operational status (local port) Port state for current operational ETS configuration: • Init: Local ETS configuration parameters were exchanged with the peer. • Recommend: Remote ETS configuration parameters were received from the peer. • Internally propagated: ETS configuration parameters were received from the configuration source. ETS DCBX Oper status Operational status of the ETS configuration on the local port: match or mismatch.
4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters: -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 0% ETS 2 0% ETS 3 0% ETS 4 0% ETS 5 0% ETS 6 0% ETS 7 0% ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled Example (Detail) Dell(conf)# show interfaces te
Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bandwidth 100% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down Reason: Port Shutdown State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco TLV Tx Status is enabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkt
Supported Modes Command History All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM and added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To clear the PFC TLV counters, use the clear pfc counters interface porttype slot/port command.
Example (Summary) Field Description State Machine Type Type of state machine used for DCBX exchanges of the PFC parameters: Feature — for legacy DCBX versions; Symmetric — for an IEEE version. TLV Tx Status Status of the PFC TLV advertisements: enabled or disabled. PFC Link Delay Link delay (in quanta) used to pause specified priority traffic. Application Priority TLV: FCOE TLV Tx Status Status of FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs from the local DCBX port: enabled or disabled.
Oper status is Recommended PFC DCBX Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Feature TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quantams Application Priority TLV Parameters : -------------------------------------FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 Dell# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/4 pfc detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/4 Admin mode is o
Supported Modes Command History Example (Summary) All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM and added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O aggregator. This command is supported in Programmable-Mux (PMUX) mode only. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Dell#show qos priority-groups priority-group ipc priority-list 4 set-pgid 2 show qos dcb-map Display the DCB parameters configured in a specified DCB map. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show qos dcb-map map-name map-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Displays the PFC and ETS parameters configured in the specified map. All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.
Example Field Description PFC PFC setting for the priority group: On (enabled) or Off. Priorities 802.1p priorities configured in the priority group.
Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 - Stack unit 1 stack port all Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters: -------------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 - dcb pfc-shared-buffer-size Configure the maximum amount of shared buffer si
Configure the shared buffer size less than the total PFC buffer size. If the buffer size and DCB buffer threshold settings are applied on one or more ports, a validation is performed to determine whether following condition is satisfied: If the shared buffer size is more than the total PFC buffer size value, the configuration is not saved and a system logging message is generated as follows: Shared-pfc-buffer-size <= (Total-pfc-buffer-size — Σpfc priority <> buffer-size on each port, priority).
The lossless queue limit per port is validated based on the dcb pfc-queues command. PFC queue configuration identifies the maximum number of queues a port can support. Although the queue limit per port is a baseline when dynamic buffering is enabled, the limit per port for queues depends on the availability of the buffer. d.
priority value buffer-size size pause-threshold threshold-value resume-offset threshold-value shared-threshold-weight size Dell(conf-dcb-buffer-thr)#priority 0 buffer-size 52 pausethreshold 16 resume-offset 10 shared-threshold-weight 7 dcb enable pfc-queues Configure the number of PFC queues. Syntax Parameters dcb enable pfc-queues value value Enter the number of PFC queues. The range is from 1 to 4. The number of ports supported based on lossless queues configured will depend on the buffer.
• To disable PFC on interface, use “no dcb pfc enable” command. Defaults Enable Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3 (0.1) Introduced on S6000, S4810, and S4820T. Usage Information PFC and ETS are enabled by default on the interfaces when DCB is globally enabled (refer to dcb enable).
number Enter a weight for the queue on the shared buffer as a number in the range of 1 to 11. Default The default threshold weight on the shared buffer for each queue is 9. Therefore, each queue can consume up to 66.67 percent of available shared buffer by default. Command Modes INTERFACE mode Supported Modes Full–Switch Usage Information You can configure all the data queues. You can configure queues 0-7.
show stack-unit stack-ports pfc details Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on stacked ports, including PFC Operational mode on each unit with the configured priorities, link delay, and number of pause packets sent and received. Syntax Parameters show stack-unit {all | stack-unit} stack-ports {all | port-number} pfc details stack-unit Enter the stack unit. port-number Enter the port number.
16 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators. An Aggregator can operate as a DHCP client. As a DHCP client, the Aggregator requests an IP address from a DHCP server.
Commands to Configure the System to be a DHCP Server To configure the system to be a DHCP server, use the following commands. clear ip dhcp Reset the DHCP counters. Syntax Parameters clear ip dhcp [binding {address} | conflict | server statistics] binding Enter the keyword binding to delete all entries in the binding table. address Enter the IP address to clear the binding entry for a single IP address.
packet Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword packet to display packet transmission/ reception. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug ipv6 dhcp To enable debug logs for DHCPv6 relay agent transactions. Syntax debug ipv6 dhcp To disable the debug logs for DHCPv6 relay agent transactions, use the debug ipv6 dhcp command.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. disable Disable the DHCP server. Syntax disable DHCP Server is disabled by default. To enable the system to be a DHCP server, use the no disable command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes DHCP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
domain-name Assign a domain to clients based on the address pool. Syntax Parameters domain-name name name Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Give a name to the group of addresses in a pool. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. excluded-address Prevent the server from leasing an address or range of addresses in the pool.
hardware-address For manual configurations, specify the client hardware address. Syntax Parameters hardware-address address address Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the hardware address of the client. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. host For manual (rather than automatic) configurations, assign a host to a single-address pool.
Parameters days Enter the number of days of the lease. The range is from 0 to 31. hours Enter the number of hours of the lease. The range is from 0 to 23. minutes Enter the number of minutes of the lease. The range is from 0 to 59. infinite Specify that the lease never expires. Defaults 24 hours Command Modes DHCP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters type Defaults Hybrid Command Modes DHCP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the NETBIOS node type: • Broadcast: Enter the keyword b-node. • Hybrid: Enter the keyword h-node. • Mixed: Enter the keyword m-node. • Peer-to-peer: Enter the keyword p-node. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. network Specify the range of addresses in an address pool.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp configuration Display the DHCP configuration. Syntax Parameters show ip dhcp configuration [global | pool name] pool name Display the configuration for a DHCP pool. global Display the DHCP configuration for the entire system.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp server Display the DHCP server statistics. Syntax show ip dhcp server statistics Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information In the I/O Aggregator, the DHCP client is enabled only on the default VLAN and management interface 0/0. Use the ip address command to assign a static IP address that overwrites the dynamically assigned IP address. Other Commands Supported by the DHCP Client The following commands are supported by the DHCP client.
debug ip dhcp client events Enable the display of log messages for the following events on DHCP client interfaces: • IP address acquisition • IP address release • Renewal of IP address and lease time • Release of an IP address Syntax Parameters debug ip dhcp client events [interface type slot/port] interface type slot/port Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Default None Command History Display log messages for DHCP packets sent and received on the specified interface.
• Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Default None Command History For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. release dhcp interface Release the dynamically-acquired IP address on an Ethernet interface while retaining the DHCP client configuration on the interface.
the EXEC privilege level or the ip address dhcp command at the interface configuration level. renew dhcp interface Re-acquire a dynamic IP address on an Ethernet interface enabled as a DHCP client. Syntax Parameters renew dhcp interface type slot/port} interface type slot/port Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Default None.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Default None. Command History • For the management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword managementethernet followed by slot/port information. The slot and port range is 0. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Commands to Configure Secure DHCP DHCP, as defined by RFC 2131, provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks. arp inspection Enable dynamic arp inspection (DAI) on a VLAN. Syntax arp inspection Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Related Commands arp inspection — enables dynamic ARP inspection on a VLAN. clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the DHCP binding table. Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping binding Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp snooping — displays the contents of the DHCP binding table.
Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When enabled, no learning takes place until you enable snooping on a VLAN. After disabling DHCP snooping, the binding table is deleted, and Option 82, IP Source Guard, and Dynamic ARP Inspection are disabled. Introduced in the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.
Parameters minutes Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History The range is from 5 to 21600. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 dhcp snooping database write-delay To set time interval for storing the snooping binding entries in a file.
vlan-id vlan-id Enter the keywords vlan-id then the VLAN to which the host belongs. The range is from 2 to 4094. ip ip-address Enter the keyword ip then the IP address that the server is leasing. interface type Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface to which the host is connected: • Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Related Commands For a Ten-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping trust Defaults Untrusted Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted for DHCP snooping.
Parameters ipmac Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enable IP+MAC Source Address Validation. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Allocate at least one FP block to ipmacacl before you can enable IP+MAC Source Address Validation. 1 Use the cam-acl l2acl command from CONFIGURATION mode. 2 Save the running-config to the startup-config.
ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan Enable ipv6 DHCP Snooping on VLAN or range of VLANs. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-id To disable the ipv6 dhcp snooping on VLAN basis or range of VLAN, use the no ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan command. Parameters vlan-id Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the name of a VLAN id or list of the VLANs to enable DHCP Snooping. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.
show ip dhcp snooping Display the contents of the DHCP binding table or display the interfaces configured with IP Source Guard. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Related Commands show ip dhcp snooping [binding | source-address-validation] binding Display the interfaces configured with IP Source Guard. source-addressvalidation Display the interfaces configured with IP Source Guard. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.
DHCP packets information Snooping packets Snooping packets processed on L2 vlans : 0 : 0 DHCP Binding File Details Invalid File Invalid Binding Entry Binding Entry lease expired : 0 : 0 : 0 Dell# ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address Validate a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload.
17 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Equal cost multi-path (ECMP) is supported on the Dell Networking OS. ecmp-group Provides a mechanism to monitor traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle. A system log is generated when the standard deviation of traffic distribution on a member link exceeds a defined threshold. Syntax ecmp-group {ecmp-group-id interface interface | link-bundlemonitor} To remove the selected interface, use the ecmp-group no interface command.
hash-algorithm Changes the hash algorithm used to distribute traffic flows across a Port Channel.
• xor4: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR4 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor4 • xor8: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR8 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor8 • xor16: Use CR16 — 16 bit XOR lag hash algorithm value Enter the keyword lag then the LAG hash algorithm value. The range is from 0 to 47. nh-ecmp hash algorithm value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword nh-ecmp then the ECMP hash algorithm value.
hg {crc16 | crc16cc | crc32MSB | crc32LSB | xor1 | xor2 | xor4 | xor8 | xor16} lag {crc16 | crc16cc | crc32MSB | crc32LSB | xor1 | xor2 | xor4 | xor8 | xor16} Enter the keyword hg then one of the following options available in the stack-unit and linecard provisioned devices: • crc16: Use CRC16_BISYNC — 16 bit CRC16-bisync polynomial (default) • crc16cc: Use CRC16_CCITT — 16 bit CRC16 using CRC16-CCITT polynomial • crc32MSB: Use CRC32_UPPER — MSB 16 bits of computed CRC32 • crc32LSB: Use CRC32_LOWER
linecard number (OPTIONAL) : Enter the keyword linecard then the linecard slot number. port-set number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port-set then the port-set slot number. Defaults 0 for hash-algorithm value on TeraScale and ExaScale IPSA and IPDA mask value is FF for a line card. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. Added flow-based-hashing support for hashing on ECMP. 9.2(0.
• hash-algorithm linecard 2 ip-sa-mask 00 ip-da-mask aa The different hash algorithms are based on the number of Port Channel members and packet values. The default hash algorithm (number 0) yields the most balanced results in various test scenarios, but if the default algorithm does not provide a satisfactory distribution of traffic, use the hash-algorithm command to designate another algorithm.
Usage Information The hash value calculated with the hash-algorithm command is unique to the entire chassis. The default ECMP hash configuration is crc-lower. This command takes the lower 32 bits of the hash key to compute the egress port and is the “fall-back” configuration if you have not configured anything else. The different hash algorithms are based on the number of ECMP group members and packet values.
NOTE: While the seed is stored separately on each port-pipe, the same seed is used across all CAMs. You cannot separate LAG and ECMP but you can use different algorithms across the chassis with the same seed. If LAG member ports span multiple port-pipes and line cards, set the seed to the same value on each port-pipe to achieve deterministic behavior. If the hash algorithm configuration is removed, the hash seed does not go to the original factory default setting.
link-bundle-distribution triggerthreshold Provides a mechanism to set the threshold to trigger when traffic distribution begins being monitored on an ECMP link bundle. Syntax Parameters link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold [percent] percent Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Indicate the threshold value when traffic distribution starts being monitored on an ECMP link bundle. The range is from 1 to 90%. The default is 60%. Version Description 9.9(0.
show config Display the ECMP configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION-ECMP-GROUP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
18 FC FLEXIO FPORT The switch is a blade switch which is plugged into the Dell M1000 Blade server chassis.The blade module contains two slots for pluggable flexible module. With single FC Flex IO module, 4 ports are supported, whereas 8 ports are supported with both FC Flex IO modules. Each port can operate in 2G, 4G or 8G Fiber Channel speed. The topology-wise, FC Flex IOM is directly connected to a FC Storage.
• feature fc • fc zone • fc alias • fc zoneset • fcoe-map • fabric • active-zoneset • show fc ns • show fc switch • show fc zoneset • show fc zone • show fc alias • show fcoe-map feature fc Enable feature fc with FPort functionality. Syntax Parameters feature fc fport domain-id range Range Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the range from 1 to 239. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.
To delete a zone, use the no fc zone zonename member command. Parameters zonename Enter the zone name. member Enter the WWPN, port ID, or domain/port. Command Modes ALIAS CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL and IOA. 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000.
Related Commands show fc zoneset — displays the configured and active zoneset. show fcoe-map — displays the fabric parameters. fcoe-map Create an FCoE map which contains the parameters used to configure the links between server CNAs and a SAN fabric. Apply the FCoE map on a server-facing Ethernet port. Syntax Parameters fcoe-map map-name map-name Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Maximum: 32 alphanumeric characters.
NOTE: In FCF F mode, you can create only 1 FCoE map. It doesn’t get created automatically. If you try to create more than 1 map, an error message is displayed. Related Commands show fcoe-map — displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps. fabric Apply an FCoE map on a fabric-facing Fibre Channel (FC) port. Syntax Parameters fabric map-name map-name Maximum: 32 alphanumeric characters.
To remove an FCoE map from an FC interface, enter the no fabric map-name command in Interface configuration mode. Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show fcoe-map — displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps. active-zoneset Activate the zoneset. Syntax active-zoneset zoneset_name To change to the default zone behavior, use the no active-zoneset zoneset_name command.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example switch Enter the keyword switch to display all the devices in the name server database of the switch. brief Enter the keyword brief to display in brief devices in the name server database. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000.
Symbolic Port Name Symbolic Node Name Port Type Registered with NameServer Registered for SCN Switch Name Domain Id Switch Port Port Id Port Name Node Name Class of Service IP Address Symbolic Port Name Symbolic Node Name Port Type Registered with NameServer Registered for SCN Switch Name Domain Id Switch Port Port Id Port Name Node Name Class of Service IP Address Symbolic Port Name SERVER2 | | Symbolic Node Name Port Type Registered with NameServer Registered for SCN Dell# Dell#show fc ns fabric brief Tot
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.0(1.3) Introduced on the S5000. Usage Information The following table describes the show fc switch output shown in the following example. Example Switch Mode Fibre Channel mode of operation of an FN IOM switch. Switch WWN Factory-assigned worldwide node (WWN) name of the MXL. The MXL WWN name is not user-configurable.
Example Dell#show fc zoneset ZoneSetName ZoneName ZoneMember =========================================================== fcoe_srv_fc_tgt brcd_sanb brcd_cna1_wwpn1 sanb_p2tgt1_wwpn Active Zoneset: fcoe_srv_fc_tgt ZoneName ZoneMember ======================================================= brcd_sanb 10:00:8c:7c:ff:21:5f:8d 20:02:00:11:0d:03:00:00 Dell# Dell#show fc zoneset active Active Zoneset: fcoe_srv_fc_tgt ZoneName ZoneMember ======================================================= brcd_sanb 10:00:8c:7c:f
Supported Modes Command History Example Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000. Dell#show fc zone ZoneName ZoneMember ======================================================= brcd_sanb brcd_cna1_wwpn1 sanb_p2tgt1_wwpn Dell# Related Commands fc zone — creates a zone. show fc alias Display the configured alias.
Related Commands fc alias — creates a zone alias name. show fcoe-map Display the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps. Syntax show fcoe-map Parameters None Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1.1.0 Introduced on the S5000.
Oper-State DOWN ======================================================= Members Fc 0/9 Fc 0/10 ======================================================= ======================================================= Dell# Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric.
19 FIPS Cryptography To configure federal information processing standards (FIPS) cryptography, use the following commands on the switch. Topics: • fips mode enable • show fips status • show ip ssh • ssh fips mode enable Enable the FIPS cryptography mode on the platform. Syntax fips mode enable To disable the FIPS cryptography mode, use the no fips mode enable command. Default Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
show fips status Displays the status of the FIPS mode. Syntax show fips status Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Password Authentication : enabled. Hostbased Authentication: disabled. RSA Authentication : disabled. Vty Encryption HMAC Remote IP 1 3des-cbc hmac-md5 10.1.20.48 2 3des-cbc hmac-md5 10.1.20.48 With FIPS Mode enabled: Dell#show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v2. Password Authentication : enabled. Hostbased Authentication : disabled. RSA Authentication : disabled. Vty Encryption HMAC Remote IP 0 aes128-cbc hmac-sha1 10.11.8.13 1 aes128-cbc hmac-sha1 10.1.20.
-l username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword —l then the user name used in this SSH session. The default is the user name of the user associated with the terminal. -m HMAC algorithm Enter one of the following HMAC algorithms to use. (For v2 clients only.): Without the FIPS mode enabled: • hmac-sha1: Force ssh to use the hmac-sha1 HMAC algorithm. • hmac-shal-96: Force ssh to use the hmac-sha1–96 HMAC algorithm. • hmac-md5: Force ssh to use the hmac-md5 HMAC algorithm.
-p SSH server port option (default 22) -v SSH protocol version Dell#ssh 10.11.8.12 -c ? 3des-cbc Force ssh to use 3des-cbc encryption cipher Dell#ssh 10.11.8.12 -m ? hmac-sha1 Force ssh to use hmac-sha1 HMAC algorithm hmac-sha1-96 Force ssh to use hmac-sha1-96 HMAC algorithm hmac-md5 Force ssh to use hmac-md5 HMAC algorithm hmac-md5-96 Force ssh to use hmac-md5-96 HMAC algorithm With FIPS mode enabled: Dell#ssh 10.11.8.
20 FIP Snooping In a converged Ethernet network, an Aggregator can operate as an intermediate Ethernet bridge to snoop on Fibre Channel over Ethernet Initialization Protocol (FIP) packets during the login process on Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) forwarders (FCFs). Acting as a transit FIP snooping bridge, the switch uses dynamicallycreated ACLs to permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end-device and an FCF. This chapter describes the FIP snooping commands.
fcf-mac-address Enter the FCF MAC address to be cleared of FIP snooping information. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
feature fip-snooping Enable FCoE transit and FIP snooping on a switch. Syntax feature fip-snooping To disable the FCoE transit feature, use the no feature fip-snooping command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping-enabled VLAN is four. The maximum number of FIP snooping sessions supported per ENode server is 16. fip-snooping fc-map Configure the FC-MAP value FIP snooping uses on all VLANs.
Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping-enabled VLAN is four.
Field Description Number of Vlan Requests Number of FIP-snooped VLAN request frames received on the interface. Number of VLAN Notifications Number of FIP-snooped VLAN notification frames received on the interface Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits Number of FIP-snooped multicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface. Number of Unicast Discovery Number of FIP-snooped unicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface.
Example Field Description Number of FDISC Rejects Number of FIP FDISC reject frames received on the interface Number of FLOGO Accepts Number of FIP FLOGO accept frames received on the interface Number of FLOGO Rejects Number of FIP FLOGO reject frames received on the interface Number of CVLs Number of FIP clear virtual link frames received on the interface Number of FCF Discovery Number of FCF discovery timeouts that occurred on the interface Number of VN Port Session Number of VN port session
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Example (port channel) of of of of of of of of of of of of of VN Port Keep Alive Multicast Discovery Advertisement Unicast Discovery Advertisement FLOGI Accepts FLOGI Rejects FDISC Accepts FDISC Rejects FLOGO Accepts FLOGO Rejects CVL FCF Discovery Timeouts VN Port Session Timeouts Session failures due to Hardware Config :3136 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 Dell# show fip-snooping statistics interface port-c
info Enable for Information specific debugs. ipc Enable for IPC specific debugs. rx Enable for packet receive specific debugs. packet-type Specify the packet type. Options are: all • discovery • virtual-link-instantiation • virtual-link-maintenance • vlan-discovery all Enable for all the packet types. discovery Enable for FIP discovery solicits (enodes) and adverts (fcf). virtual-linkinstantiation Enable for flogi, fdisc and flogo packets.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Example show fip-snooping enode Displays information on the ENodes in FIP-snooped sessions, including the ENode interface and MAC address, FCF MAC address, VLAN ID, and FC-ID.
--------------52:1b:e3:cd 100 ----------------------d4:ae: Te 0/11 54:7f:ee:37:34:40 62:00:11 show fip-snooping fcf Displays information on the FCFs in FIP-snooped sessions, including the FCF interface and MAC address, FCF interface, VLAN ID, FC-MAP value, FKA advertisement period, and number of ENodes connected.
54:7f:ee:37:34:40 4000 1 Po 128 100 0e:fc:00 show fip-snooping sessions Displays information on FIP-snooped sessions on all VLANs or a specified VLAN, including the ENode interface and MAC address, the FCF interface and MAC address, VLAN ID, FCoE MAC address and FCoE session ID number (FC-ID), worldwide node name (WWNN) and the worldwide port name (WWPN).
00:0e:1e:0c:54:a6 Te 0/14 00:05:73:f2:4f:ae Po128 100 0e:fc:00:9a: 00:27 9a:00:27 20:01:00:0e:1e:0c:54:a6 00:0e:1e:06:01:5e Te 0/16 00:05:73:f2:4f:af Po128 100 0e:fc:00:9a: 01:18 9a:01:18 20:01:00:0e:1e:06:01:5 Port WWNN 20:00:00:0e:1e:0c:54:a6 20:00:00:0e:1e:0c:54:a6 show fip-snooping statistics Displays statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all interfaces, including VLANs, physical ports, and port channels..
Field Description Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits Number of FIP-snooped multicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface. Number of Unicast Discovery Number of FIP-snooped unicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Number of FIP-snooped FLOGI request frames received on the interface.
Example Field Description Number of CVLs Number of FIP clear virtual link frames received on the interface Number of FCF Discovery Number of FCF discovery timeouts that occurred on the interface Number of VN Port Session Number of VN port session timeouts that occurred on the interface Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config Number of session failures due to hardware configuration that occurred on the interface Dell# show fip-snooping statistics interface vlan 100 Number of Vlan Request
Number Number Number Number Example (port channel) of of of of CVL FCF Discovery Timeouts VN Port Session Timeouts Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 :0 :0 :0 Dell# show fip-snooping statistics interface port-channel 22 Number of Vlan Requests :0 Number of Vlan Notifications :2 Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits :0 Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits :0 Number of FLOGI :0 Number of FDISC :0 Number of FLOGO :0 Number of Enode Keep Alive :0 Number of VN Port Keep Alive :0 Number of Multicast
Enodes Sessions : 2 : 17 show fip-snooping vlan Display information on the FIP snooping operational VLANs. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show fip-snooping vlan • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
21 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP is a proprietary protocol for that offers fast convergence in a Layer 2 network without having to run the spanning tree protocol (STP). The resilient ring protocol is an efficient protocol that transmits a high-speed token across a ring to verify the link status. All the intelligence is contained in the master node with practically no intelligence required of the transit mode. Important Points to Remember • FRRP is media- and speed-independent.
clear frrp Clear the FRRP statistics counters. Syntax Parameters clear frrp [ring-id] ring-id Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (Optional) Enter the ring identification number. The range is from 1 to 255. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN MXL. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
debug frrp Clear the FRRP statistics counters. Syntax debug frrp {event | packet | detail} [ring-id] [count number] To disable debugging, use the no debug frrp {event | packet | detail} {ring-id} [countnumber] command. Parameters event Enter the keyword event to display debug information related to ring protocol transitions. packet Enter the keyword packet to display brief debug information related to control packets.
Parameters Word Enter a description of the ring. Maximum: 255 characters. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. disable Disable the resilient ring protocol. Syntax disable To enable the Resilient Ring Protocol, use the no disable command.
secondary interface control-vlan vlanid • Fast Ethernet interface: enter the keyword FastEthernet then the slot/port information. • Port Channel interface: enter the keyword portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Parameters vlan-range Enter the member VLANs using VLAN IDs (separated by commas), a range of VLAN IDs (separated by a hyphen), a single VLAN ID, or a combination. For example: VLAN IDs (commaseparated): 3, 4, 6. Range (hyphen-separated): 5-10. Combination: 3, 4, 5-10, 8. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
protocol frrp Enter the Resilient Ring Protocol and designate a ring identification. Syntax protocol frrp {ring-id} To exit the ring protocol, use the no protocol frrp {ring-id} command. Parameters ring-id Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the ring identification number. The range is from 1 to 255. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Executing this command without the optional ring-id command clears the statistics counters on all the available rings. The system requires a command line confirmation before the command executes.
To remove the timer, use the no timer {hello-interval [milliseconds]}| {dead-interval milliseconds} command. Parameters hello-interval milliseconds Enter the keyword hello-interval then the time, in milliseconds, to set the hello interval of the control packets. The milliseconds must be entered in increments of 50 millisecond; for example, 50, 100, 150, and so on. If an invalid value is entered, an error message is generated. The range is from 50 to 2000 ms. Default: 500 ms.
22 GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports the basic GVRP commands. The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) mechanism allows the configuration of a GARP participant to propagate through a network quickly. A GARP participant registers or de-registers its attributes with other participants by making or withdrawing declarations of attributes. At the same time, based on received declarations or withdrawals, GARP handles attributes of other participants.
• VLANs created dynamically with GVRP exist only as long as a GVRP-enabled device is sending updates. If the devices no longer send updates, or GVRP is disabled, or the system is rebooted, all dynamic VLANs are removed. • GVRP manages the active topology, not non-topological data such as VLAN protocols. If a local bridge must classify and analyze packets by VLAN protocols, manually configure protocol-based VLANs, and simply rely on GVRP for VLAN updates.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show gvrp statistics — displays the GVRP statistics. debug gvrp Enable debugging on GVRP. Syntax debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} To disable debugging, use the no debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} command. Parameters config Enter the keyword config to enable debugging on the GVRP configuration.
disable Globally disable GVRP. Syntax disable To re-enable GVRP, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. gvrp enable — enables GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs. protocol gvrp — access GVRP protocol. garp timers Set the intervals (in milliseconds) for sending GARP messages.
leave-all Enter the keywords leave-all then the number of milliseconds to configure the leave-all time. The range is from 100 to 2147483647 milliseconds. The default is 1000 milliseconds. NOTE: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100. Defaults As above. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Usage Information Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. disable — globally disables GVRP. gvrp registration Configure the GVRP register type. Syntax gvrp registration {fixed | normal | forbidden} To return to the default, use the gvrp register normal command. Parameters fixed Enter the keyword fixed then the VLAN range in a commaseparated VLAN ID set.
To advertise or learn about VLANs through GVRP, use the forbidden command when you do not want the interface. Related Commands show gvrp — displays the GVRP configuration including the registration. protocol gvrp Access GVRP protocol — (config-gvrp)#. Syntax protocol gvrp Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show garp timers Display the GARP timer settings for sending GARP messages. Syntax show garp timers Defaults none Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If no ports are GVRP participants, the message output changes from GVRP Participants running on to GVRP Participants running on no ports.
• summary Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Enter the keyword summary to display just a summary of the GVRP statistics. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands show gvrp — displays the GVRP configuration. show vlan Display the global VLAN configuration. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show vlan • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
23 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) The Dell Networking OS supports IGMP snooping version 2 and 3 on all Dell Networking systems.
• Flooding of unregistered multicast traffic is enabled by default. • Queries are not accepted from the server side ports and are only accepted from the uplink LAG. • Reports and Leaves are flooded by default to the uplink LAG irrespective of whether it is an mrouter port or not. IGMP Snooping Commands Dell Networking OS supports IGMP Snooping version 2 and 3 on all Dell Networking systems.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. debug ip igmp Enable debugging of IGMP packets. Syntax debug ip igmp [group address | interface] To disable IGMP debugging, enter the no ip igmp command. To disable all debugging, enter the undebug all command. Defaults Parameters Disabled group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP multicast group address in dotted decimal format.
To remove the feature, use the no ip igmp access-group access-list command. Parameters access-list Enter the name of the extended ACL (16 characters maximum). Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The access list accepted is an extended ACL.
ip igmp querier-timeout Change the interval that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that should be the querier. Syntax ip igmp querier-timeout seconds To return to the default value, use the no ip igmp querier-timeout command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds the router must wait to become the new querier. The range is from 60 to 300. The default is 125 seconds.
Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. ip igmp query-max-resp-time Set the maximum query response time advertised in general queries. Syntax ip igmp query-max-resp-time seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip igmp query-max-resp-time command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds for the maximum response time. The range is from 1 to 25.
To disable IGMP snooping, use the no ip igmp snooping enable command. Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Disabled. • CONFIGURATION • INTERFACE VLAN Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information To enable IGMP snooping, enter this command.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information Queriers normally send some queries when a leave message is received prior to deleting a group from the membership database. There may be situations when you require a fast deletion of a group. When you enable IGMP fast leave processing, the switch removes an interface from the multicast group as soon as it detects an IGMP version 2 leave message on the interface.
Parameters milliseconds Enter the interval in milliseconds. The range is from 100 to 65535. The default is 1000 milliseconds. Defaults 1000 milliseconds Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Usage Information Dell Networking OS provides the capability of statically configuring the interface to which a multicast router is attached. To configure a static connection to the multicast router, enter the ip igmp snooping mrouter interface command in the VLAN context. The interface to the router must be a part of the VLAN where you are entering the command. ip igmp snooping querier Enable IGMP querier processing for the VLAN interface.
Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. show ip igmp groups View the IGMP groups.
Expires Last Reporter 225.0.0.0 Vlan 100 IGMPv2 00:02:04 3.0.0.51 Member Ports: Po 2 225.0.0.2 Vlan 100 IGMPv2 00:02:04 3.0.0.51 Member Ports: Po 2 225.0.0.3 Vlan 100 IGMPv2 00:02:04 3.0.0.51 Member Ports: Po 2 225.0.0.4 Vlan 100 IGMPv2 00:02:04 3.0.0.51 Member Ports: Po 2 00:00:05 00:00:05 00:00:05 00:00:05 Field Description Group Address Lists the multicast address for the IGMP group. Interface Lists the interface type, slot and port number. Mode Displays the IGMP version used.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Example Dell#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 2 Interface Router Ports Vlan 2 Po 128 Dell# Related Commands show ip igmp groups — Use this IGMP command to view groups.
24 Interfaces This chapter defines the interface commands on the Aggregator switch. Basic Interface Commands The following commands are for Physical, Loopback, and Null interfaces. clear counters Clear the counters used in the show interfaces commands for VLANs, and physical interfaces, or selected ones. Syntax clear counters interface Defaults Without a specific interface specified, the command clears all interface counters.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM and added support to clear the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell#clear counters Clear counters on all interfaces [confirm] clear dampening Clear the dampening counters on all the interfaces or just the specified interface.
cx4-cable-length Configure the length of the cable to be connected to the selected CX4 port. Syntax Parameters [no] cx4-cable-length {long | medium | short} long | medium | short Defaults medium Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword that matches the cable length to be used at the selected port: • short = For 1-meter and 3-meter cable lengths. • medium = For 5-meter cable length. • long = For 10-meter and 15-meter cable lengths.
cx4-cable-length long shutdown Dell(conf-if-0/5)#exit Dell(config)# Related Commands show config – displays the configuration of the selected interface. dampening Configure dampening on an interface. Syntax dampening [[[[half-life] [reuse-threshold]] [suppress-threshold]] [max-suppress-time]] To disable dampening, use the no dampening [[[[half-life] [reusethreshold]] [suppress-threshold]] [max-suppress-time]] command.
Layer 2 and Layer 3 protocols. The penalty is exponentially decayed based on the halflife timer. After the penalty decays below the reuse threshold, the interface enables. The configured parameters are as follows: • suppress-threshold should be greater than reuse-threshold • max-suppress-time should be at least 4 times half-life NOTE: You cannot apply dampening on an interface that is monitoring traffic for other interfaces.
• Related commands Use the show interfaces description command to display descriptions configured for each interface. show interfaces description — Displays the description field of interfaces. duplex (1000/10000 Interfaces) Configure duplex mode on any physical interfaces where the speed is set to 1000/10000. Syntax duplex {half | full} To return to the default setting, use the no duplex command. Parameters half Enter the keyword half to set the physical interface to transmit only in one direction.
flowcontrol Controls how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause frames on 10G and 40Gig stack units. Syntax Parameters Defaults flowcontrol rx {off | on} tx {off | on} threshold rx on Enter the keywords rx on to process the received flow control frames on this port. This is the default value for the receive side. rx off Enter the keywords rx off to ignore the received flow control frames on this port.
The discard threshold defines when the interface starts dropping the packet on the interface. This may be necessary when a connected device does not honor the flow control frame sent by the switch. The discard threshold should be larger than the buffer threshold so that the buffer holds at least hold at least three packets. Important Points to Remember • Do not enable tx pause when buffer carving is enabled. For information and assistance, consult Dell Networking TAC.
on on Related Commands off on LocNegRx off off off off LocNegTx RemNegRx RemNegTx off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off on off off off on off off off off off off on on on off off on on off off on on off on on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on show running-config — displays the flow configuration parameters (non-default values only). interface Configure a physical interface on the switch.
Usage Information You cannot delete a physical interface. By default, physical interfaces are disabled (shutdown) and are in Layer 3 mode. To place an interface in mode, ensure that the interface’s configuration does not contain an IP address and enter the Port Channel Commands command. By default, the interface is shut down when the portmode hybrid and switchport are enabled.
Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface. interface null — configures a Null interface. interface port-channel — configures a port channel. interface vlan — configures a VLAN. interface ManagementEthernet Configure the Management port on the system. Syntax Parameters interface ManagementEthernet slot/port slot/port Defaults Not configured.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You cannot delete the Null interface. The only configuration command possible in a Null interface is ip unreachables. Example Dell(conf)#interface null 0 Dell(conf-if-nu-0)# Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface.
0/1 - 5 is valid; interface range tengigabitethernet 0/1-5 is not valid. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
Use the show running-config command to display the VLAN and port-channel interfaces. VLAN or port-channel interfaces that are not displayed in the show running-config command cannot be used with the bulk configuration feature of the interface range command. You cannot create virtual interfaces (VLAN, Portchannel) using the interface range command. NOTE: If a range has VLAN, physical, and port-channel interfaces, only commands related to physical interfaces can be bulk configured.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example (Single Range) • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example (Single Range) Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. This example shows the macro named test that was defined earlier. Dell(config)#interface range macro test Dell(config-if-range-te-0/0-3,te-5/0-8)# Related Commands interface range — configures a range of command (bulk configuration). interface range macro (define) — defines a macro for an interface range (bulk configuration).
Examples Dell(conf)#int vlan 1 Dell(conf-if-vl-1)# Dell(conf)#int vlan 3 Dell(conf-if-vl-3)# Related commands show vlan — Displays the current VLAN configuration on the switch. vlan tagged — Adds a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as a tagged interface. vlan untagged — Adds a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as an untagged interface. intf-type cr4 autoneg Set the interface type as CR4 with auto-negotiation enabled.
To stop sending keepalive packets, use the no keepalive command. Parameters seconds Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes All Modes Command History (OPTIONAL) For interfaces with PPP encapsulation enabled, enter the number of seconds between keepalive packets. The range is from 0 to 23767. The default is 10 seconds. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.
source-ip — Uses source IP address and source port fields to hash. mac {dest-mac | source-dest-mac | source-mac} Enter the keywords to distribute MAC traffic based on the following criteria: dest-mac — Uses the destination MAC address, VLAN, Ethertype, source module ID and source port ID fields to hash. source-dest-mac — Uses the destination and source MAC address, VLAN, Ethertype, source module ID and source port ID fields to hash.
load-balance hg Choose the traffic flow parameters the hash calculation uses while distributing the traffic across internal higig links.
tunnel [ipv4-overipv4 | ipv4-overgre-ipv4 | macin-mac] • dest-port-id — Use dest-port-id field in hash calculation. • dest-module-id — Use dest-module-id field in hash calculation. • vlan — Use vlan field in hash calculation . • ethertype — Use Ethertype field in hash calculation. • source-dest-mac — Use SMAC and DMAC fields in hash calculation.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information In the Example, the delta column displays changes since the last screen refresh. The following are the monitor command menu options. Example (Single Interface) Key Description systest-3 Displays the host name assigned to the system.
Over 127B packets: Over 255B packets: Over 511B packets: Over 1023B packets: Error statistics: Input underruns: Input giants: Input throttles: Input CRC: Input IP checksum: Input overrun: Output underruns: Output throttles: m l T q - 350 1351 286 2781 0 0 0 0 pps pps pps pps 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 pps pps pps pps pps pps pps pps 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change mode Page up Increase refresh interval Quit c - Clear screen a - Page down t - Decrease refresh interval mtu Set the link maximum
When you enter the no mtu command, The Dell Networking OS reduces the IP MTU value to 1536 bytes. Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for port channels and VLANs are as follows. port channels: • All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value. • The port channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members.
Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The no negotiation auto command is only available if you first manually set the speed of a port to 10Mbits or 100Mbits.
Link Status Between Port 1 and Port 2 • Up at 1000 Mb/s • Up at 100 Mb/s • Up at 100 Mb/s • Down • Down * You cannot disable auto-negotiation when the speed is set to 1000 or auto. Related Commands speed (for 1000/10000 interfaces) — sets the link speed to 10, 100, 1000 or autonegotiate the speed. portmode hybrid To accept both tagged and untagged frames, set a physical port or port-channel. A port configured this way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays.
• Hybrid — port accepts both tagged and untagged frames The following describes the interface vlan command shown in the following example. This example shows unconfiguration of the hybrid port using the no portmode hybrid command. NOTE: Remove all other configurations on the port before you can remove the hybrid configuration from the port.
Related Commands show interfaces switchport — displays the configuration of switchport (Layer 2) interfaces on the switch. vlan-stack trunk— specifies an interface as a trunk port to the Stackable VLAN network. rate-interval Configure the traffic sampling interval on the selected interface. Syntax Parameters rate-interval seconds seconds Enter the number of seconds for which to collect traffic data. The range is from 5 to 299 seconds. NOTE: For 0 to 5 seconds, polling occurs every 5 seconds.
Command Modes INTERFACE CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL switch. Usage Information By default, the switch processes the RFI errors transmitted by remote peers and brings down the interface when an RFI error is detected. Example Dell(conf-if-te-1/3)#remote-fault-signaling rx ? on Enable off Disable show config Display the interface configuration.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Example show interfaces Displays information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface.
Dell Networking recommends using higher rate-intervals such as 15 to 299 seconds to minimize the errors seen. NOTE: In the CLI output, the power value will be rounded to a 3-digit value. For receive/transmit power that is less than 0.000, an snmp query will return the corresponding dbm value even though the CLI displays as 0.000. NOTE: After the counters are cleared, the line-rate continues to increase until it reaches the maximum line rate.
Line Description • Output Statistics: • symbol errors = number packets containing bad data. That is, the port MAC detected a physical coding error in the packet.
Example Dell#show interface managementethernet ? (ManagementEther 0/0 Management Ethernet interface number Dell#show interface managementethernet 0/0 net) ManagementEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is up Hardware is DellForce10Eth, address is 00:1e:c9:f1:00:05 Current address is 00:1e:c9:f1:00:05 Pluggable media not present Interface index is 235159752 Internet address is 10.11.209.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Example (ManagementEther net) show interfaces dampening Display interface dampening information.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM and added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. • Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege You can specify multiple ports as slot/portrange. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1/1 - 4. All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.
show interfaces stack-unit Display information on all interfaces on a specific Aggregator stack member. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show interfaces stack-unit unit-number unit-number • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the stack member number (0 to 5). All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Time since last interface status change: 5d5h23m !-------------output truncated ----------------! Related Commands show diag — Displays data plane and management plane input/output statistics. show interfaces status Displays a summary of interface information or specify a stack unit and interface to display status information for that specific interface only.
Te 2/6 Te 2/7 Te 2/8 Te 2/9 Te 2/10 Te 2/11 Te 2/12 Dell# Down Down Down Up Down Up Down Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto 10000 Mbit Full Auto Auto 10000 Mbit Full Auto Auto ---1001 -1001 -- show interfaces switchport Display only virtual and physical interfaces in Layer 2 mode. This command displays the Layer 2 mode interfaces’ IEEE 802.1Q tag status and VLAN membership.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following describes the show interfaces switchport command for the following example. Example Items Description Name Displays the interface’s type, slot, and port number. 802.1QTagged Displays whether if the VLAN tagged (“True”), untagged (“False”), or hybrid (“Hybrid”), which supports both untagged and tagged VLANs by port 13/0.
Parameters tengigabitethernet For a 10G interface, enter the keyword tengigabitethernet then the slot/port information. NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. However, for Open Networking (ON) platforms the notation for specifying port range in the command is different from how you specify in non-ON platforms.
Line Description RX Power High Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Temp Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Voltage Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Bias Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. TX Power Low Alarm threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Line Description warning flag is set to true. If it falls below the low alarm/warning thresholds, the TX bias low alarm/warning flag is set to true. Tx Power Present Tx power of the SFP. If this crosses Tx power alarm/ warning thresholds, the Tx power high alarm/warning flag is set to true. If it falls below the low alarm/warning thresholds, the Tx power low alarm/ warning flag is set to true. Rx Power Present receiving (Rx) power of the SFP. This value is either average Rx power or OMA.
Example Line Description Tx Power Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value displayed above. Rx Power Low Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value displayed above. Temperature High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Temperature value displayed above. Voltage High Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Voltage value displayed above.
SFP 0 Vendor SN= P5N1ACE SFP 0 Datecode SFP 0 CheckCodeExt = 040528 = 0x5b SFP 1 Diagnostic Information =================================== SFP 1 Rx Power measurement type = Average =================================== SFP 1 Temp High Alarm threshold = 95.000C SFP 1 Voltage High Alarm threshold = 3.900V SFP 1 Bias High Alarm threshold = 17.000mA SFP 1 TX Power High Alarm threshold = 0.631mW SFP 1 RX Power High Alarm threshold = 1.259mW SFP 1 Temp Low Alarm threshold = -25.
show interfaces — displays information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface. show inventory — displays the switch type, components (including media), the Dell Networking OS version including hardware identification numbers, and configured protocols. show range Display all interfaces configured using the interface range command. Syntax show range Command Modes INTERFACE RANGE (config-if-range) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The shutdown command marks a physical interface as unavailable for traffic. To discover if an interface is disabled, use the show ip interface command. Disabled interfaces are listed as down. Disabling a VLAN or a port channel causes different behavior.
auto Defaults auto Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword auto to set the interface to auto-negotiate its speed. Auto-negotiation is enabled. For more information, refer to negotiation auto. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Added support for fanned–out 1 Gigabit SFP port. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is found on the 1000/10000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces.
NOTE: The switch commands accept Unit ID numbers from 0 to 5, though the switch supports stacking up to three units only with the Dell Networking OS version 8.3.7.1. number Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the port number of the 40G port to be split. Enter one of the following port numbers for the switch: 48, 52, 56, or 60. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.
Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6000, S6000–ON, S5000, S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, M I/O Aggregator, FN I/O Module, MXL, C9010, S3100 series, and Z9100-ON. Usage Information The wavelength can be configured only on a tunable 10–Gigabit SFP+ optic. The wavelength range is from 1528.3 nm to 1568.77nm. If you configure the wavelength on a non-tunable optic, there is no change to the existing wavelength.
Parameters interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE PORTCHANNEL Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
designated speed; disable and re-enable the Port Channel or change the order of the channel members configuration to change the designated speed. For more information about Port Channels, refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. Related Commands interface port-channel — creates a Port Channel interface. group Group two LAGs in a supergroup (“fate-sharing group” or “failover group”).
interface port-channel Create a Port Channel interface, which is a link aggregation group (LAG) containing physical interfaces on the Aggregator. Syntax interface port-channel channel-number To delete a Port Channel, use the no interface port-channel channel-number command. Parameters channel-number For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. Defaults Not configured.
Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface. interface vlan — configures a VLAN. minimum-links Configure the minimum number of links in a LAG (Port Channel) that must be in “oper up” status for the LAG to be also in “oper up” status. Syntax Parameters minimum-links number number Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status. The range is from 1 to 16. The default is 1.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This feature groups two LAGs to work in tandem as a supergroup. For example, if one LAG goes down, the other LAG is taken down automatically, providing an alternate path to reroute traffic, avoiding oversubscription on the other LAG.
show interfaces port-channel Display information on configured Port Channel groups. Syntax Parameters show interfaces port-channel [channel-number] [brief| description] channel-number For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number. The range is from 1 to 128. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display only the port channel number, the state of the port channel, and the number of interfaces in the port channel.
Example (EtherScale) Field Description Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface. If an IP address is assigned, that address is displayed. MTU 1554... Displays link and IP MTU. LineSpeed Displays the interface’s line speed. For a port channel interface, it is the line speed of the interfaces in the port channel. Members in this... Displays the interfaces belonging to this port channel. ARP type:...
0 packets, 0 bytes 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions User Information 127-byte pkts 0 over 1023-byte pkts The following describes the show interfaces p
Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) Commands TDR is useful for troubleshooting an interface that is not establishing a link; either it is flapping or not coming up at all. TDR detects open or short conditions of copper cables on 100/1000/10G Base-T modules. • tdr-cable-test • show tdr Important Points to Remember • The interface and port must be enabled (configured—see the interface command) before running TDR. An error message is generated if you have not enabled the interface.
Related Commands show tdr — Displays the results of the TDR test. show tdr Displays the TDR test results. Syntax Parameters show tdr interface interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/ port information for the 100/1000/10 GbaseT Ethernet interface. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
Enhanced Validation of Interface Ranges You can avoid specifying spaces between the range of interfaces, separated by commas, that you configure by using the interface range command. For example, if you enter a list of interface ranges, such as interface range fo 2/0-1,te 10/0,fa 0/0, this configuration is considered valid. The commaseparated list is not required to be separated by spaces in between the ranges.
Example Dell#debug ip udp-helper UDP helper debugging is on 01:20:22: Pkt rcvd on Te 4/1 with IP DA (0xffffffff) will be sent on Te 4/2 Te 4/3 Vlan 3 01:44:54: Pkt rcvd on Te 5/1 is handed over for DHCP processing. Related Commands ip udp-broadcast-address — configures a UDP IP address for broadcast. ip udp-helper udp-port — enables the UDP broadcast feature on an interface. show ip udp-helper — displays the configured UDP helper(s) on all interfaces.
ip udp-helper udp-port Enable the UDP broadcast feature on an interface either for all UDP ports or a specified list of UDP ports. Syntax ip udp-helper udp-port [udp-port-list] To disable the UDP broadcast on a port, use the no ip udp-helper udp-port [udp-port-list] command. Parameters udp-port-list (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 16 comma-separated UDP port numbers. NOTE: If you do not use this option, all UDP ports are considered by default.
show ip udp-helper Display the configured UDP helpers on all interfaces. Syntax show ip udp-helper Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• show interfaces configured • show interfaces description • show interfaces stack-unit • show interfaces port-channel • show interfaces status • show interfaces switchport • show vlan • shutdown • speed (for 1000/10000 interfaces) Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands The following commands configure and monitor virtual local area networks (VLANs). VLANs are a virtual interface and use many of the same commands as physical interfaces. You can configure an IP address only on the default VLAN.
Usasge Information Command History The auto vlan command adds the port as untagged to default vlan and tagged to all other 4094 VLAN. Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. clear mac-address-table dynamic Clear the MAC address table of all MAC addresses learned dynamically.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Related commands Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. show vlan — Displays VLAN configuration. feature fc Enables the Fibre channel communication via the NPG functionality. Syntax feature fc Command Modes CONFIGURATION Default Enabled Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Command History Version Description 9.6(0.
• Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword portchannel followed by a number. The range is from 1 to 128. All Modes Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The delta column displays changes since the last screen refresh. The following are the monitor command menu options. Example (Single Interface) Key Description systest-3 Displays the host name assigned to the system.
Output packets: 64B packets: Over 64B packets: Over 127B packets: Over 255B packets: Over 511B packets: Over 1023B packets: Error statistics: Input underruns: Input giants: Input throttles: Input CRC: Input IP checksum: Input overrun: Output underruns: Output throttles: m l T q Example (All Interfaces) - 9401589 67 49166 350 1351 286 2781 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 pps pps pps pps pps pps pps 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 pps pps pps pps pps pps pps pps 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change mode Page up Incre
name Assign a name to the Default VLAN. Syntax namevlan-name To remove the name from the VLAN, use the no name command. Parameters vlan-name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter up to 32 characters as the name of the VLAN. Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This CLI applies only to the Default VLAN.
show config (from INTERFACE VLAN mode) Displays the current configuration of the Default VLAN. Syntax show config Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell(conf-if-vl-1)#show config ! interface Vlan 1 description a no ip address mtu 2500 shutdown Dell(conf-if-vl-1)# show config (from PROTOCOL LLDP mode) Displays the LLDP configuration.
show vlan Displays the current VLAN configurations on the switch. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show vlan [brief |id vlan-id | name vlan-name] brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the following information: • VLAN ID • VLAN name (left blank if none is configured.) • Spanning Tree Group ID • MAC address aging time • IP address id vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword id followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
Column Heading Description Status Displays the word Inactive for inactive VLANs and the word Active for active VLANs. Q Displays G for GVRP tagged, M for member of a VLAN-Stack VLAN, T for tagged interface, U (for untagged interface), x (uncapitalized x) for Dot1x untagged, or X (capitalized X) for Dot1x tagged.
speed (for 1000/10000 interfaces) Set the speed for 1000/10000 interfaces. Both sides of a link must be set to the same speed (1000/10000) or to auto or the link may not come up. Syntax speed {1000 | 10000 | auto} To return to the default setting, use the no speed {1000 | 10000 |auto} command. Parameters 1000 Enter the keyword 1000 to set the interface’s speed to 1000 Mb/s. 10000 Enter the keyword 10000 to set the interface’s speed to 10000 Mb/s. Auto-negotiation is enabled.
stack-unit port-group port mode ethernet Converts the interfaces 9 and 10 from Fibre Channel mode to Ethernet. Syntax stack-unit unit number port-group 0 portmode ethernet To convert the interfaces 9 and 10 from Ethernet to Fibre Channel mode, use the no stack-unit unit number port-group 0 portmode ethernet. Parameters stack-unit Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by a stack member number to select the stack unit. The range is 0 to 5. port-group Enter the keyword port-group followed by 0.
Usage Information If the interface belongs to several VLANs, you must remove it from all VLANs to change it to an untagged interface. Tagged interfaces can belong to multiple VLANs, while untagged interfaces can only belong to one VLAN at a time. When two or more ports configured for VLANs form a LAG, the resulting LAG is a tagged member of all the configured VLANs and an untagged member of the VLAN to which the port with the lowest port ID belongs.
Supported Modes Command History All Modes Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information Untagged interfaces can only belong to one VLAN. In the default VLAN, you cannot use the no untagged interfacecommand. To remove an untagged interface from all VLANs, including the default VLAN, enter INTERFACE mode and use the no vlan taggedcommand.
25 IPv4 Routing The aggregator supports both IPv4 and IPv6 routing and these are used only for the management purpose. This chapter describes the IPv4 related commands.
• ip max-frag-count • ip name-server • ip proxy-arp • ip route • ip source-route • ip tcp initial-time • show ip tcp initial-time • ip unreachables • management route • show arp • show arp retries • show hosts • show ip cam stack-unit • show ip fib stack-unit • show ip interface • show ip management-route • show ip multicast-cam stack-unit • show ip protocols • show ip route • show ip route list • show ip route summary • show ip traffic • show tcp statistics arp
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • The interface specified here must be one of the interfaces configured using the {output-range | output} interface option with the mac-address-table static command.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. arp retries Set the number of ARP retries in case the system does not receive an ARP reply in response to an ARP request. Syntax Parameters arp retries number number Defaults 5 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the number of retries. The range is from 5 to 20. The default is 5. Version Description 9.9(0.
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show interfaces — displays the ARP timeout value for all available interfaces. clear arp-cache Clear the dynamic ARP entries from a specific interface or optionally delete (no-refresh) ARP entries from the content addressable memory (CAM).
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear host Remove one or all dynamically learned host table entries. Syntax Parameters clear host name name Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the name of the host to delete. Enter * to delete all host table entries. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To clear Layer 3 CAM inconsistencies, use this command. CAUTION: Executing this command causes traffic disruption. Related Commands show ip fib stack-unit — shows FIB entries. clear ip route Clear one or all routes in the routing table. Syntax Parameters clear ip route {* | ip-address mask} * Enter an asterisk (*) to clear all learned IP routes.
Supported Modes Command History All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. debug arp View information on ARP transactions. Syntax debug arp [interface] [count value] To stop debugging ARP transactions, use the no debug arp command.
debug ip dhcp Enable debug information for DHCP relay transactions and display the information on the console. Syntax Parameters debug ip dhcp debug ip dhcp Defaults Debug disabled Command Mode EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example To disable debug, use the no debug ip dhcp command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
hops = 0, XID = 0xda4f9503, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 113.3.3.17 00:12:42 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREPLY: Forwarded BOOTREPLY for 00:60:CF: 20:7B:8C to 113.3.3.254 FTOS# debug ip icmp View information on the internal control message protocol (ICMP). Syntax debug ip icmp [interface] [count value] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip icmp command.
ICMP: src 40.40.40.40, dst 40.40.40.40, echo reply ICMP: echo request sent to dst 40.40.40.40: debug ip packet View a log of IP packets sent and received. Syntax debug ip packet [access-group name] [count value] [interface] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip packet [access-group name] [count value] [interface] command. Parameters access-group name Enter the keywords access-group then the access list name (maximum 16 characters) to limit the debug output based on the defined rules in the ACL.
Example Field Description d= Lists the destination address of the packet and the name of the interface (in parentheses) through which the packet is being sent out on the network. len Displays the packet’s length. sending, rcvd, fragment, sending broad/multicast proto, unroutable The last part of each line lists the status of the packet. TCP src= Displays the source and destination ports, the sequence number, the acknowledgement number, and the window size of the packets in that TCP packets.
The access-group option supports only the equal to (eq) operator in TCP ACL rules. Port operators not equal to (neq), greater than (gt), less than (lt), or range are not supported in access-group option (refer to the following example). ARP packets (arp) and Ether-type (ether-type) are also not supported in the access-group option. The entire rule is skipped to compose the filter.
Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You must be in INTERFACE mode before you add an IP address to an interface. Assign an IP address to an interface prior to entering ROUTER OSPF mode. ip directed-broadcast Enables the interface to receive directed broadcast packets.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To configure a list of possible domain names, configure the ip domain-list command up to six times. If you configure both the ip domain-name and ip domain-list commands, the software tries to resolve the name using the ip domain-name command.
Usage Information To fully enable DNS, also specify one or more domain name servers with the ip nameserver command. The Dell Networking OS does not support sending DNS queries over a VLAN. DNS queries are sent out all other interfaces, including the Management port. To view current bindings, use the show hosts command. Related Commands ip name-server — specifies a DNS server. show hosts — Views the current bindings. ip domain-name Configure one domain name for the switch.
Related Commands ip domain-list — configures additional names. ip helper-address Specify the address of a DHCP server so that DHCP broadcast messages can be forwarded when the DHCP server is not on the same subnet as the client. Syntax ip helper-address ip-address To remove a DHCP server address, use the no ip helper-address command. Parameters ip-address Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.
To re-enable the hop-count increment, use the no ip helper-address hopcount disable command. Defaults Enabled; the hops field in the DHCP message header is incremented by default. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip icmp source-interface Enable the ICMP error and unreachable messages to be sent with the source interface IP address, such as the loopback address, instead of the hops of the preceding devices along the network path to be used for easy debugging and diagnosis of network disconnections and reachability problems with IPv4 packets.
Usage Information You can enable the mechanism to configure the source or the originating interface from which the packet (the device that generates the ICMP error messages) is received by the switch to send the loopback address instead of its source IP address to be used in the ICMP unreachable messages and in the traceroute command output. The loopback address must be unique in a particular domain.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan. The range is from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform.
To place no limit on the number of fragments allowed, use the no ip max-fragcount command. Parameters count Enter a number for the number of fragments allowed for reassembly. The range is from 2 to 256. Defaults No limit is set on number of fragments allowed. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information The system does not support sending DNS queries over a VLAN. DNS queries are sent out on all other interfaces, including the Management port. ip proxy-arp Enable proxy ARP on an interface. Syntax ip proxy-arp To disable proxy ARP, use the no ip proxy-arp command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
ip-address Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the forwarding router. interface For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094. distance (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the distance metric assigned to the route. The range is from 1 to 255. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip tcp initial-time Define the wait duration in seconds for the TCP connection to be established. Syntax ip tcp initial-time <8-75> To restore the default behavior, which causes the wait period to be set as eight seconds, use the no ip tcp initial-time command.
EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. ip unreachables Enable the generation of internet control message protocol (ICMP) unreachable messages. Syntax ip unreachables To disable the generation of ICMP messages, use the no ip unreachables command. Defaults Disabled.
managementethe rnet Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the keyword managementethernet for the Management interface. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information When a static route (or a protocol route) overlaps with Management static route, the static route (or a protocol route) is preferred over the Management Static route.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following describes the show arp command shown in the following example. Example Row Heading Description Protocol Displays the protocol type. Address Displays the IP address of the ARP entry. Age(min) Displays the age (in minutes) of the ARP entry. Hardware Address Displays the MAC address associated with the ARP entry.
3 Dell# 0 3 CP show arp retries Display the configured number of ARP retries. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Related Commands show arp retries • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module arp retries — sets the number of ARP retries in case the system does not receive an ARP reply in response to an ARP request. show hosts View the host table and DNS configuration.
Field Description Default domain... Displays the domain name (if configured). Name/address lookup... States if DNS is enabled on the system. • If DNS is enabled, the Name/Address lookup is domain service. • If DNS is not enabled, the Name/Address lookup is static mapping Name servers are... Lists the name servers, if configured. Host Displays the host name assigned to the IP address.
show ip cam stack-unit Display CAM entries. Syntax Parameters show ip cam stack-unit {0–5} [port-set {pipe-number} | {ip-address mask [longer-prefixes]| detail | member-info | summary] 0–5 Enter the stack-unit ID from 0 to 5 pipe-number Enter the number of the Port-Pipe number. The range is from 0 to 0 ip-address mask [longer-prefixes] (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address and mask of a route to CAM entries for that route only. Enter the keywords longerprefixes to view routes with a common prefix.
Example Field Description EC Displays the number of equal cost multipaths (ECMP) available for the default route for non-Jumbo line cards. For Jumbo line cards, displays 0,1 when ECMP is more than eight. CG Displays 0. V Displays a 1 if the entry is valid and a 0 otherwise. C Displays the CPU bit. 1 indicates that a packet hitting this entry is forwarded to the CP or RP2, depending on Egress port. V Id Displays the VLAN ID. If the entry is 0, the entry is not part of a VLAN.
1.1.1.0 2.1.1.0 100.1.1. 100.1.1. 0.0.0.0 Dell# 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 0 00:01:e8:8a:d6:58 0 00:01:e8:8a:d6:58 00:00:00:00:00:00 3f01 3f01 0004 0009 3f01 CP CP Te 0/3 Te 0/8 CP 0 0 - Example (Member- Dell#show ip cam stack-unit 0 po 0 ecmp-group member-info detail Info) Group Index Member Count Mac-Addr Port VLan ID Gateway ----------- ------------------------------- -----------------0 2 00:01:e8:8a:d6:58 Te 0/3 0 1.1.1.
Example Field Description Destination Lists the destination IP address. Gateway Displays either the word “direct” and an interface for a directly connected route or the remote IP address used to forward the traffic. First-Hop Displays the first hop IP address. Mac-Addr Displays the MAC address. Port Displays the egress-port information. VId Displays the VLAN ID. If no VLAN is assigned, zero (0) is listed. EC Displays the number of ECMP paths.
configuration Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword configuration to display the physical interfaces with non-default configurations only. All Modes Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following describes the show ip interface command shown in the following example. Example Lines Description TenGigabitEthern et 0/0...
Example (Brief) Fields Description Interface Displays type of interface and the associated slot and port number. IP-Address Displays the IP address for the interface, if configured. Ok? Indicates if the hardware is functioning properly. Method Displays “Manual” if the configuration is read from the saved configuration. Status States whether the interface is enabled (up) or disabled (administratively down). Protocol States whether IP is enabled (up) or disabled (down) on the interface.
Supported Modes Command History Example All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell#show ip management-route Destination Gateway ----------------10.1.2.0/24 ManagementEthernet 0/0 172.16.1.0/24 10.1.2.4 Dell# State ----Connected Active show ip multicast-cam stack-unit Displays content-addressable memory (CAM) entries.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following describes the show ip fib stack-unit command shown in the following example. Field Description Destination Displays the destination route of the index. CG Displays 0. V Displays a 1 if the entry is valid and a 0 otherwise.
show ip protocols View information on all routing protocols enabled and active on the switch. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip protocols • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ip protocols Routing Protocol is "bgp 1" Cluster Id is set to 20.20.20.3 Router Id is set to 20.20.20.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History mask (OPTIONAL) Specify the network mask of the route. Use this parameter with the IP address parameter. longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords longer-prefixes to view all routes with a common prefix. list prefix-list (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword list and the name of a configured prefix list. process-id (OPTIONAL) Specify that only OSPF routes with a certain process ID must be displayed.
Field Description • i = IS-IS • L1 = IS-IS level-1 • L2 = IS-IS level-2 • IA = IS-IS inter-area • * = candidate default • > = non-active route • + = summary routes Destination Identifies the route’s destination IP address. Gateway Identifies whether the route is directly connected and on which interface the route is configured. Dist/Metric Identifies if the route has a specified distance or metric. Last Change Identifies when the route was last changed or configured.
Supported Modes Command History Example Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip route summary shown in the following example. Example Column Heading Description Route Source Identifies how the route is configured in the system. Active Routes Identifies the best route if a route is learned from two protocol sources. Non-active Routes Identifies the back-up routes when a route is learned by two different protocols.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip traffic summary shown in the following example. Keyword Definition unknown protocol... No receiver for these packets. Counts packets whose protocol type field is not recognized by the system. not a gateway... Packets can not be routed; the host/network is unreachable. security failures...
Example • IP Statistics: Bcast: Sent: Object = f10BcastPktSent, OIDs = 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.2 • IP Statistics: Mcast: Received: Object = f10McastPktRecv, OIDs = 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.3 • IP Statistics: Mcast: Sent: Object = f10McastPktSent, OIDs = 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.1.4 • ARP Statistics: Rcvd: Request: Object = f10ArpReqRecv, OIDs = 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.1 • ARP Statistics: Rcvd: Replies: Object = f10ArpReplyRecv, OIDs = 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.3.5.2.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following describes the show tcp statistics cp command shown in the following example. Field Description Rcvd: Displays the number and types of TCP packets received by the switch. 0 checksum error...
Example Field Description 25 control packets... Displays the number of control packets sent and the number retransmitted. 11603 data packets... Displays the number of data packets sent. 24 data packets retransmitted Displays the number of data packets resent. 355 ack.. Displays the number of acknowledgement packets sent and the number of packet delayed. 0 window probe... Displays the number of window probe and update packets sent. 7 Connections initiated...
26 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) Internet protocol security (IPSec) is an end-to-end security scheme for securing IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a session. Use IPSec between hosts, gateways, or hosts and gateways. IPSec uses a series of protocol functions to achieve information security: • Authentication Headers (AH) — Connectionless integrity and origin authentication for IP packets.
crypto ipsec transform-set Create a transform set, or combination of security algorithms and protocols, of cryptos. Syntax crypto ipsec transform-set name {ah-authentication {md5|sha1|null} | esp-authentication {md5|sha1|null} | esp-encryption {3des|cbc| des|null}} To delete a transform set, use the no crypto ipsec transform-set name {ahauthentication {md5|sha1|null} | esp-authentication {md5|sha1| null} | esp-encryption {3des|cbc|des|null}} command. Parameters name Enter the name for the transform set.
Supported Modes Command History Usage Information Example Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • Both sides of the link must specify the same transform set. • You can create up to 64 transform sets. Dell(conf)#int ten 0/4 Dell(conf-if-te-0/4)#ipv6 address 200:1::/64 eui64 Dell(conf)#int ten 0/6 Dell(conf-if-te-0/6)#ipv6 address 801:10::/64 eui64 crypto ipsec policy Create a crypto policy used by ipsec.
management crypto-policy Apply the crypto policy to management traffic. Syntax management crypto-policy name To remove the management traffic crypto policy, use the no management cryptopolicy name command. Parameters name Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the name for the crypto policy. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
dest-port-num Enter the destination port number. The range is from 0 to 65535. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIG-CRYPTO-POLICY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information UDP is not supported. Only TCP 23 telnet and 21 FTP are supported.
hex-key-string Enter the session key in hex format (a string of 8, 16, or 20 bytes). For DES algorithms, specify at least 16 bytes per key. For SHA algorithms, specify at least 20 bytes per key. encrypt Indicates the ESP encryption transform set key string. auth Indicates the ESP authentication transform set key string. Defaults none Command Modes CONF-CRYPTO-POLICY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
show crypto ipsec policy Display the crypto policy configuration. Syntax Parameters show crypto ipsec policy name name Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Enter the name for the crypto policy set. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
transform-set Specify the transform set the crypto policy uses. Syntax transform-set transform-set-name To delete a transform set from the crypto policy, use the no transform-set transform-set-name command. Parameters transform-setname Enter the name for the crypto policy transform set. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIG-CRYPTO-POLICY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
27 IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) IPv6 ACLs and IPv6 Route Map commands are supported on Dell Networking switch. NOTE: For IPv4 ACL commands, refer to the Access Control Lists (ACL) chapter. Important Points to Remember • Certain platforms require manual CAM usage space allotment. For more information, refer to the cam-acl (Configuration) command. • Egress IPv6 ACL and IPv6 ACL on the Loopback interface is not supported. • Reference to an empty ACL permits any traffic.
l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History • L2 ACL(l2acl): 5 • IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0 • L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1 • L2 QoS (l2qos): 1 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. Enter all of the profiles and a range. Enter the CAM profile name then the amount to be allotted. The total space allocated must equal 13. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information For the new settings to take effect, save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start), then reload the system. The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires three blocks and these blocks cannot be reallocated.
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition. ospfv3 Specify that this ACL is for OSPFv3 control plane traffic Defaults All access lists contain an implicit “deny any”; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for CoPP for OSPFv3 on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.2(0.
permit To configure a filter that matches the filter criteria, select an IPv6 protocol number, ICMP, IPv6, TCP, or UDP.
is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults Not configured.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ipv6-address Enter the keyword host then the IPv6 address of the host in the x:x:x:x::x format. The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. destination address Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
Version Description 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
Example show cam-acl (non default) Dell(conf)#cam-acl l2acl 2 ipv4acl 4 ipv6acl 4 ipv4qos 2 l2qos 1 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 ecfmacl 0 Dell#show cam-acl -- Chassis Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 4 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : F3940 -- stack-unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl
• Supported Modes Command History Example EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show cam-acl-egress -- Chassis Egress Cam ACL -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 1 Ipv4Acl : 1 Ipv6Acl : 2 -- stack-unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) L2Acl : 1 Ipv4Acl : 1 Ipv6Acl : 2 Related Commands cam-acl — configures CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs.
28 IPv6 Basics This chapter describes IPv6 basic commands.
unit-number Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the stack member number. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ipv6 route Clear (refresh) all or a specific route from the IPv6 routing table. Syntax Parameters clear ipv6 route {* | ipv6-address prefix-length} * Enter the * to clear (refresh) all routes from the IPv6 routing table.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 address autoconfig Configure IPv6 address auto-configuration for the management interface. Syntax ipv6 address autoconfig To disable the address autoconfig operation on the management interface, use the no ipv6 address autoconfig command.
ipv6 address Configure an IPv6 address to an interface. Syntax ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefix-length} To remove the IPv6 address, use the no ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefixlength} command. Parameters ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
ipv6 address eui64 Configure IPv6 EUI64 address configuration on the interface. Syntax ipv6 address {ipv6-address prefix-length} eui64 To disable IPv6 EUI64 address autoconfiguration, use the no ipv6 address {ipv6address prefix-length} eui64 command. Parameters ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 prefix in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
To restore the default value, use the no ipv6 control-plane icmp error-ratelimit command. Parameters pps Default 100 pps Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the maximum number of error packets generated per second. The range is from 1 to 200, where 0 disables the ratelimiting. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
ipv6 host Assign a name and IPv6 address the host-to-IPv6 address mapping table uses. Syntax ipv6 host name ipv6-address To remove an IP host, use the no ipv6 host name {ipv6–address}. Parameters name Enter a text string to associate with one IP address. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) to be mapped to the name. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can separately configure both IPv4 and IPv6 domain name servers. ipv6 nd dad attempts To perform duplicate address detection (DAD) on the management interface, configure the number of neighbor solicitation messages that are sent.
Parameters ipv6-RDNSSaddress Enter the IPv6 Recursive DNS Server’s (RDNSS) address. You can specify up to 4 IPv6 RDNSS server addresses. lifetime Enter the lifetime in seconds. The amount of time the IPv6 host can use the IPv6 RDNSS address for name resolution. The range is 0 to 4294967295 seconds. When you specify the maximum lifetime value of 4294967295 or infinite, the lifetime does not expire. A value of 0 indicates to the host that the RDNSS address should not be used.
no-autoconfig Enter the keywords no-autoconfig to disable Stateless Address Autoconfiguration. no-rtr-address Enter the keyword no-rtr-address to exclude the full router address from router advertisements (the R bit is not set). off-link Enter the keywords off-link to advertise the prefix without stating to recipients that the prefix is either on-link or off-link. valid-lifetime | infinite Enter the amount of time that the prefix is advertised, or enter infinite for an unlimited amount of time.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero (0) to 16383. • For the null interface, enter the keyword null then zero (0). • For a port channel interface, enter the keyword portchannel then the port channel number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When the interface goes down, the system withdraws the route. The route is reinstalled by the system when the interface comes back up. When a recursive resolution is “broken,” the system withdraws the route. The route is re-installed by the system when the recursive resolution is satisfied.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Because this command is enabled by default, it does not appear in the running configuration. When you disable unicast routing, the no ipv6 unicast-routing command is included in the running configuration.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show ipv6 fib stack-unit View all FIB entries. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 fib stack-unit unit-number [summary | ipv6-address] slot-number Enter the number of the stack unit. The range is from 0 to 5. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of entries in IPv6 cam. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have more specific prefixes. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 nd dad attempts — Configure system to set the flow label field in the packets to zero. show ipv6 interface Display the status of interfaces configured for IPv6.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History loopback (OPTIONAL) View information for IPv6 Loopback interfaces. port-channel (OPTIONAL) View information for IPv6 port channels. tengigabitethernet (OPTIONAL) View information for an IPv6 tengigabitethernet interface. fortyGigE (OPTIONAL) View information for an IPv6 fortygigabitethernet interface. vlan (OPTIONAL) View information for IPv6 VLANs. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.
Global Unicast address(es): Actual address is 300::1, subnet is 300::/64 (MANUAL) Remaining lifetime: infinite Virtual-IP IPv6 address is not set Global Anycast address(es): Joined Group address(es): ff02::1 ff02::1:ff00:1 ff02::1:ffa7:497e ND MTU is 0 ICMP redirects are not sent DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3 ND reachable time is 20410 milliseconds ND base reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND retransmit interval is 1000 milliseconds ND hop limit is 64 Dell# Example (Brief) Example (tunnel)
show ipv6 mld_host Display the IPv6 MLD host counters. Syntax show ipv6 mld_host Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ipv6 mld-host command shown in the following example.
show ipv6 route Displays the IPv6 routes. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 route [ipv6-address prefix-length] [hostname] [all] [bgp as number] [connected] [isis tag] [list prefix-list name] [ospf process-id] [rip] [static] [summary] ipv6-address prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
Example Field Description (undefined) Identifies the type of route: • L = Local • C = connected • S = static • R = RIP • B = BGP • IN = internal BGP • EX = external BGP • LO = Locally Originated • O = OSPF • IA = OSPF inter-area • N1 = OSPF NSSA external type 1 • N2 = OSPF NSSA external type 2 • E1 = OSPF external type 1 • E2 = OSPF external type 2 • i = IS-IS • L1 = IS-IS level-1 • L2 = IS-IS level-2 • IA = IS-IS inter-area • * = candidate default • > = non-active
S L Dell# Example (Summary) Direct, Tu 1, 00:09:02 800::/64 [1/0] via 100::1, Te 0/8, 00:00:50 fe80::/10 [0/0] Direct, Nu 0, 20:00:18 Dell#show ipv6 route summary Route Source Active Routes connected 3 static 1 Total 4 Total 4 active route(s) using 928 bytes Dell# Non-active Routes 0 0 0 trust ipv6-diffserv Allows the dynamic classification of IPv6 DSCP. Syntax trust ipv6-diffserv To remove the definition, use the no trust ipv6-diffserv command.
IPv6 Service Class Field Queue ID 010XXXXX 2 001XXXXX 1 000XXXXX 0 IPv6 Basics 796
29 IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) is supported on Dell Networking platforms. This chapter includes the following sections: • IPv6 BGP Commands • IPv6 MBGP Commands Topics: • IPv6 BGP Commands • IPv6 MBGP Commands IPv6 BGP Commands BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS).
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information After this command is executed, all subsequent commands apply to this address family. You can exit from this AFI/SAFI to the IPv6 Unicast (the default) family by entering the exit command and returning to the Router BGP context.
• Supported Modes Command History ROUTER BGP ADDRESS FAMILY IPv6 Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information At least one of the routes included in the aggregate address must be in the BGP routing table for the configured aggregate to become active.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Any update without a MED attribute is the least preferred route. If you enable this command, use the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size * command to recompute the best path. bgp bestpath as-path ignore Ignore the AS PATH in BGP best path calculations. Syntax bgp bestpath as-path ignore To return to the default, use the no bgp bestpath as-path ignore command.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The software compares the MEDs only if the path contains no external autonomous system numbers. If you enable this command, use the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size * command to recompute the best path.
Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Route reflection to clients is not necessary if all client routers are fully meshed. Related Commands bgp cluster-id — assigns and ID to a BGP cluster with two or more route reflectors. neighbor route-reflector-client — configures a route reflector and clients.
Related Commands bgp client-to-client reflection — enables route reflection between the route reflector and the clients. neighbor route-reflector-client — configures a route reflector and clients. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast cluster-list — views paths with a cluster ID. bgp confederation identifier Configure an identifier for a BGP confederation. Syntax bgp confederation identifier as-number To delete a BGP confederation identifier, use the no bgp confederation identifier as-number command.
Parameters as-number Enter the AS number. The range is 1 to 65535. ...as-number (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 16 confederation numbers. The range is from 1 to 65535. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The Autonomous Systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors.
longer advertised (that is, it is suppressed). The range is from 1 to 20000. The default is 2000. max-suppresstime (OPTIONAL) Enter the maximum number of minutes a route can be suppressed. The default is four times the half-life value. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 60 minutes. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route map. Only match commands in the configured route map are supported. Defaults Disabled.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bgp enforce-first-as Disable (or enable) enforce-first-as check for updates received from EBGP peers. Syntax bgp enforce-first-as To turn off the default, use the no bgp enforce-first-as command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The bgp fast-external-fallover command appears in the show config command output. bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-byte support for the BGP process. Syntax bgp four-octet-as-support To disable fast external fallover, use the no bgp four-octet-as-support command.
bgp graceful-restart Enable graceful restart on a BGP neighbor, a BGP node, or designate a local router to support graceful restart as a receiver only. Syntax bgp graceful-restart [restart-time seconds] [stale-path-time seconds] [role receiver-only] To return to the default, enter the no bgp graceful-restart command.
To disable logging, use the no bgp log-neighbor-changes command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The bgp log-neighbor-changes command appears in the show config command output. Related Commands show config — views the current configuration.
bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop Enable next-hop resolution through other routes learned by BGP. Syntax bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop To disable next-hop resolution, use the no bgp recursive-bgp-next-hop command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information BGP uses regular expressions (regex) to filter route information. In particular, the use of regular expressions to filter routes based on AS-PATHs and communities is quite common.
bgp soft-reconfig-backup Use this command only when route-refresh is not negotiated between peers to avoid having a peer re-send BGP updates. Syntax bgp soft-reconfig-backup To return to the default setting, use the no bgp soft-reconfig-backup command. Defaults Off Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6 ADDRESS FAMILY (conf-router_bgpv6_af) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• Supported Modes Command History Related Commands EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size — enables route reflection between the route reflector and the clients. show capture bgp-pdu neighbor — configures a route reflector and clients. capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size Set the size of the BGP packet capture buffer.
clear ip bgp * (asterisk) Reset all BGP sessions in the specified category. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp * [ipv4 multicast soft [in | out] | ipv6 unicast soft [in | out] | soft [in | out]] * Enter an asterisk ( * ) to reset all BGP sessions. ipv4 multicast soft [in | out] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 multicast soft [in | out] to set options within the specified IPv4 address family.
Parameters as-number Enter an autonomous system (AS) number to reset neighbors belonging to that AS. If used without a qualifier, the keyword resets all neighbors belonging to that AS. The range is from 1 to 65535. flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords flap-statistics to clear all flap statistics belonging to that AS or a specified address family within that AS. ipv4 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 to select options for that address family.
soft {in | out}} | ipv6 unicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}| soft [in | out] Parameters ipv6-address Enter an IPv6 address to reset neighbors belonging to that IP. Used without a qualifier, the keyword ipv6–address resets all neighbors belonging to that IP. flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords flap-statistics to clear all flap statistics belonging to that AS or a specified address family within that IP. ipv4 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ipv4 to select options for that address family.
Parameters peer-group-name Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the peer group name to reset the BGP sessions within that peer group. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip bgp ipv6 dampening Clear information on route dampening and return suppressed route to active state.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. filter-list as-pathname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords filter-list then the name of a configured AS-PATH list. regexp regularexpression (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp then the regular expressions. Use one or a combination of the following: Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History • .
as-number Clear and reapply policies for all neighbors belonging to the AS. The range is from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte), from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte), or from 0.1 to 0.65535.65535 (Dotted format). ipv4-neighboraddr | ipv6neighbor-addr Clear and reapply policies for a neighbor. peer-group name Clear and reapply policies for all BGP routers in the specified peer group. ipv6 unicast Clear and reapply policies for all IPv6 unicast routes. in Reapply only inbound policies.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only information on inbound BGP routes. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only information on outbound BGP routes. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To view information on both incoming and outgoing routes, do not include the in and out parameters in the debugging command.
peer-group peergroup-name Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only information on inbound BGP routes. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only information on outbound BGP routes. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened-paths — views BGP dampened routes. debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debugging for IPv6 unicast routes. Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration command.
To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] keepalives [in | out] command. Parameters ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group peergroup-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer group.
in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view BGP notifications received from neighbors. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view BGP notifications sent to neighbors. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP. default-metric Allows you to change the metrics of redistributed routes to locally originated routes. Use this command with the redistribute command.
description Enter a description of the BGP routing protocol. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters description Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter a description to identify the BGP protocol (80 characters maximum). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information CAUTION: Dell Networking recommends that you do not change the administrative distance of internal routes. Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table inconsistencies.
neighbor activate This command allows the specified neighbor/peer group to be enabled for the current AFI/SAFI. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} activate To disable, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} activate command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Identify a peer group by name.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Defaults peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers in the peer group. seconds Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, between BGP advertisements. The range is from 0 to 600 seconds. The default is 5 seconds for internal BGP peers and 30 seconds for external BGP peers.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bgp four-octet-as-support — enables 4-Byte support for the BGP process. neighbor default-originate Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor.
neighbor description Assign a character string describing the neighbor or group of neighbors (peer group). Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} description text To delete a description, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-groupname} description text command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group.
prefix-list-name Enter the name of an established prefix list. If the prefix list is not configured, the default is permit (to allow all routes). in Enter the keyword in to distribute only inbound traffic. out Enter the keyword out to distribute only outbound traffic. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To prevent loops, the neighbor ebgp-multihop command does not install default routes of the multihop peer. Networks not directly connected are not considered valid for best path selection. neighbor fall-over Enable or disable fast fall-over for BGP neighbors. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} fall-over To disable, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} fallover command.
To delete a BGP filter, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-groupname} filter-list as-path-name {in | out} command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to apply the filter to all routers in the peer group. in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound BGP routes. out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound BGP routes.
percentage of the maximum value, the software sends a message. The range is from 1 to 100 percent. The default is 75. warning-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword warning-only to set the router to send a log message when the maximum value is reached. If this parameter is not set, the router stops peering when the maximum number of prefixes is reached. Defaults threshold = 75 Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The TCP session is authentication and prevents the data from being compromised. neighbor next-hop-self Allows you to configure the router as the next hop for a BGP neighbor. (This command is used for IBGP).
Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group peergroup-name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of a configured peer group (maximum 16 characters). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
neighbor peer-group (creating group) Allows you to create a peer group and assign it a name. Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group To delete a peer group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group command. Parameters peer-group-name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information After you configure a peer group as passive, you must assign it a subnet using the neighbor subnet command. Related Commands neighbor subnet — assigns a subnet to a dynamically configured BGP neighbor. neighbor remote-as Create and specify the remote peer to the BGP neighbor.
Related Commands router bgp — enters the ROUTER BGP mode and configure routes in an AS. neighbor remove-private-as Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as To return to the default, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-groupname} remove-private-as command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
To remove the route map, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-groupname} route-map map-name {in | out} command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. map-name Enter the name of an established route map. If the Route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound routes.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. All routers in the peer group receive routes from a route reflector. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor shutdown Disable a BGP neighbor or peer group. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} shutdown To enable a disabled neighbor or peer group, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} shutdown command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
neighbor soft-reconfiguration inbound Enable a BGP soft-reconfiguration and start storing updates for inbound IPv6 unicast routes. Syntax Parameters neighbor {ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name} softreconfiguration inbound ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor for which you want to start storing inbound routing updates. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group for which you want to start storing inbound routing updates. Defaults Disabled.
mask Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a prefix mask in / prefix-length format (/x). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor timers Set keepalive and hold time timers for a BGP neighbor or a peer group.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Timer values configured with the neighbor timers command override the timer values configured with the timers bgp command.
neighbor weight Assign a weight to the neighbor connection, which is used to determine the best path. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} weight weight To remove a weight value, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-groupname} weight weight command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
Parameters ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, /24). The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Though the system does not generate a route due to backdoor config, there is an option for injecting/sourcing a local route in presence of network backdoor config on a learned route. redistribute Redistribute routes into BGP.
Usage Information If you do not configure the default-metric command, in addition to the redistribute command, or there is no route map to set the metric, the metric for redistributed static and connected is “0”. To redistribute the default route (0::0/0), configure the neighbor defaultoriginate command. Related Commands neighbor default-originate — injects the default route. redistribute isis Redistribute IS-IS routes into BGP.
redistribute ospf Redistribute OSPFv3 routes into BGP. Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [[match external {1 | 2}] [match internal]] [route-map map-name] To stop redistribution of OSPF routes, use the no redistribute ospf process-id command. Parameters process-id Enter the number of the OSPFv3 process. The range is from 1 to 65535. match external {1 | 2} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match external to redistribute OSPF external routes. You can specify 1 or 2 to redistribute those routes only.
Parameters as-number Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the AS number. The range is from 1 to 65535. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show capture bgp-pdu neighbor Display BGP packet capture information for an IPv6 address.
Supported Modes Command History Example Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• Supported Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable the bgp non-deterministic-med command, the show ip bgp command output for a BGP route does not list the INACTIVE reason. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast cluster-list View BGP neighbors in a specific cluster.
with the NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED (0xFFFFFF03) community attribute must not be advertised to external BGP peers. Command Modes Supported Modes Command History no-advertise Enter the keywords no-advertise to view all routes containing the well-known community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE. All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE (0xFFFFFF02) community attribute must not be advertised to other BGP peers.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened-paths View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active). Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened-paths • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast extcommunity-list View information on all routes with Extended Community attributes. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast extcommunity-list [list name] list name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the extended community list name you wish to view. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics View flap statistics on BGP routes. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics [ipv6-address prefixlength] [filter-list as-path-name] [regexp regular-expression] ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast inconsistent-as View routes with inconsistent originating autonomous system (AS) numbers; that is, prefixes that are announced from the same neighbor AS but with a different AS-Path. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast inconsistent-as • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword routes to view only the neighbor’s feasible routes. received-routes [network [network-mask] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords received-routes then either the network address (in dotted decimal format) or the network mask (in slash prefix format) to view all information received from neighbors. NOTE: You must configure the neighbor softreconfiguration inbound command prior to viewing all the information received from the neighbors.
Lines Beginning With Description • Example keepalive interval is the number of seconds between keepalive messages to help ensure that the TCP session is still alive Received messages This line displays the number of BGP messages received, the number of notifications (error messages), and the number of messages waiting in a queue for processing.
Last read 00:00:32, last write 00:00:32 Hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 1404 messages, 0 in queue 3 opens, 1 notifications, 1394 updates 6 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Sent 48 messages, 0 in queue 3 opens, 2 notifications, 0 updates 43 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv6 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO
Prefix advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:00:41, due to Closed by neighbor Notification History 'OPEN error/Bad AS' Sent : 0 Recv: 1 Local host: 5ffe:11::4, Local port: 179 show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group Allows you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group.
For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP neighbor is RR-CLIENT-PASSIV, peer-group internal, Number of peers in this group 1 Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized): 9000::9:2* Dell# show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary Allows you to view the status of all BGP connections. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
show ip bgp next-hop View all next hops (using learned routes only) with current reachability and flap status. This command only displays one path, even if the next hop is reachable by multiple paths. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip bgp next-hop [local-routes] local-routes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Show next-hop information for local routes. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
NOTE: You must enter an escape sequence (CTRL +v) prior to entering the ? regular expression. Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns. • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified. • $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp paths extcommunity View all unique extended community information in the BGP database. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp paths extcommunity • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified. • $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. timers bgp Allows you to adjust the BGP network timers for all neighbors.
IPv6 MBGP Commands Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the Internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems (AS). The Dell Networking MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858. address family This command changes the context to subsequent address family identifier (SAFI). Syntax address family ipv6 unicast To remove SAFI context, use the no address family ipv6 unicast command.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. advertise-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertise-map then the name of a configured route map to set filters for advertising an aggregate route. as-set (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords as-set to generate path attribute information and include it in the aggregate. AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes included in the aggregated route.
bgp dampening Enable MBGP route dampening. Syntax bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name] To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name] command. Parameters half-life time (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is decreased. After the router assigns a Penalty of 1024 to a route, the Penalty is decreased by half, after the half-life period expires. The range is from 1 to 45. The default is 15 minutes.
flap-statistics (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords flap-statistics to reset the flap statistics on all prefixes from that neighbor. peer-group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords peer-group to clear all members of a peer-group. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening Clear information on route dampening.
regexp regexp Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp then regular expressions. Use one or a combination of the following: • . (period) matches on any single character, including white space. • * (asterisk) matches on sequences in a pattern (zero or more sequences). • + (plus sign) matches on sequences in a pattern (one or more sequences). • ? (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences).
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group updates View information about BGP peer-group updates. Syntax debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group peer-group-name updates [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group peer-group-name updates [in | out] command. Parameters peer-group peergroup-name Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peergroup. updates Enter the keyword updates to view BGP update information.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only BGP updates sent to neighbors. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. distance bgp Define an administrative distance for routes. Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance To return to default values, use the no distance bgp command.
Usage Information CAUTION: Dell Networking recommends that you do not change the administrative distance of internal routes. Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table inconsistencies. The higher the administrative distance assigned to a route means that your confidence in that route is low. Routes assigned an administrative distance of 255 are not installed in the routing table. Routes from confederations are treated as internal BGP routes.
neighbor advertisement-interval Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval seconds To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} advertisement-interval command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the default route of all routers in that peer group. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route map. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor filter-list — assigns a AS-PATH list to a neighbor or peer group. neighbor route-map — assigns a route map to a neighbor or peer group. neighbor filter-list Configure a BGP filter based on the AS-PATH attribute.
neighbor maximum-prefix Control the number of network prefixes received. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold] [warning-only] To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold] [warning-only] command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
To return to the default setting, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} next-hop-self command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the peer group. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor route-map Apply an established route map to either incoming or outbound routes of a BGP neighbor or peer group. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out} To remove the route map, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-groupname} route-map map-name {in | out} command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format.
neighbor route-reflector-client Configure a neighbor as a member of a route reflector cluster. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} route-reflector-client To indicate that the neighbor is not a route reflector client or to delete a route reflector configuration, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} route-reflector-client command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you do not configure the default-metric command, in addition to the redistribute command, or there is no route map to set the metric, the metric for redistributed static and connected is “0”.
Usage Information When you enable the bgp non-deterministic-med command, the show ip bgp command output for a BGP route does not list the INACTIVE reason. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast cluster-list View BGP neighbors in a specific cluster. Syntax Paramters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast cluster-list [cluster-id] cluster-id • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the cluster id in dotted decimal format. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.
with the NO_EXPORT (0xFFFFFF01) community attribute must not be advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary. Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary command.
• Supported Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail Display detailed BGP information. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast filter-list View the routes that match the filter lists. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast filter-list as-path-name as-path-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the name of an AS-PATH. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics View flap statistics on BGP routes.
NOTE: You must enter an escape sequence (CTRL +v) prior to entering the ? regular expression. Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns. • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified. • $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors Allows you to view the information exchanged by BGP neighbors.
Lines Beginning With Description BGP neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address and its AS number. The last phrase in the line indicates whether the link between the BGP router and its neighbor is an external or internal one. If they are located in the same AS, then the link is internal; otherwise, the link is external. BGP version Displays the BGP version (always version 4) and the remote router ID.
Example Lines Beginning With Description Last reset Displays the amount of time since the peering session was last reset. Also states if the peer resets the peering session. If the peering session was never reset, the word “never” is displayed. Local host: Displays the peering address of the local router and the TCP port number. Foreign host: Displays the peering address of the neighbor and the TCP port number.
Last read 00:00:28, last write 00:00:28 Hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 27 messages, 3 notifications, 0 in queue Sent 0 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue Received 8 updates, Sent 0 updates Route refresh request: received 0, sent 0 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv6 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to
Related Commands Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) — assigns a peer to a peer-group. neighbor peer-group (creating group) — creates a peer group. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary Allows you to view the status of all BGP connections. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.
Field Description Neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address. AS Displays the AS number of the neighbor. MsgRcvd Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor received. MsgSent Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor sent. TblVer Displays the version of the BGP table that was sent to that neighbor. InQ Displays the number of messages from that neighbor waiting to be processed. OutQ Displays the number of messages waiting to be sent to that neighbor.
30 iSCSI Optimization Internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI storage traffic on an Aggregator. NOTE: When iSCSI storage devices are detected on the server-ports, storm-control is disabled on those ports. When the iSCSI devices are off the ports, storm-control is enabled again.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can configure iSCSI TLVs to send either globally or on a specified interface. The interface configuration takes priority over global configuration. iscsi aging time Set the aging time for iSCSI sessions.
iscsi cos Set the QoS policy that is applied to the iSCSI flows. Syntax iscsi cos {enable | disable | dot1p vlan-priority-value [remark] | dscp dscp-value [remark]} To disable the QoS policy, use the no iscsi cos dscp command. Parameters enable Enter the keyword enable to allow the application of preferential QoS treatment to iSCSI traffic so that the iSCSI packets are scheduled in the switch with a dot1p priority 4 regardless of the VLAN priority tag in the packet.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. iscsi enable Globally enable iSCSI optimization. Syntax iscsi enable To disable iSCSI optimization, use the no iscsi enable command. Parameters enable Enter the keyword enable to enable the iSCSI optimization feature. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Parameters priority-bitmap Enter the priority-bitmap range. The range is from 1 to FF. Defaults 0x10 Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is available at the global level only.
iscsi target port Configure the iSCSI target ports and optionally, the IP addresses on which iSCSI communication is monitored. Syntax iscsi target port [tcp-port-2...tcp-port-16]ip-address [ipaddress] To remove the configured iSCSI target ports or IP addresses, use the no iscsi target port command. Parameters tcpport-2...tcpport16 Enter the tcp-port number of the iSCSI target ports. The tcpport-n is the TCP port number or a list of TCP port numbers on which the iSCSI target listens to requests.
show iscsi Display the currently configured iSCSI settings. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example Related Commands show iscsi • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
• Supported Modes Command History Example EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell# show iscsi sessions Session 0: Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic: 0-8a0906-0e70c2002-10a0018426a48c94-iom010 Initiator: iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:win-x9l8v27yajg ISID: 400001370000 Session 1: Target: iqn.2001-05.com.
Example Related Commands Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell# show iscsi sessions detailed Session 0 : ----------------------------------------------Target:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia:ixload:iscsi-TG1 Initiator:iqn.2010-11.com.ixia.
• show iscsi sessions detailed — displays detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch.
31 Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) The Dell Networking OS supports the intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol for IPv4 and IPv6. IS-IS is an interior gateway protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. IS-IS facilitates the communication between open systems, supporting routers passing both IP and OSI traffic. A router is considered an intermediate system. Networks are partitioned into manageable routing domains, called areas.
• graceful-restart ietf • graceful-restart interval • graceful-restart t1 • graceful-restart t2 • graceful-restart t3 • graceful-restart restart-wait • hello padding • hostname dynamic • ignore-lsp-errors • ip router isis • ipv6 router isis • isis circuit-type • isis csnp-interval • isis csnp-interval • isis hello-multiplier • isis hello padding • isis ipv6 metric • isis metric • isis network point-to-point • isis password • isis priority • is-type • log-adjacenc
• show isis neighbors • show isis protocol • show isis traffic • spf-interval adjacency-check Verify that the “protocols supported” field of the IS-IS neighbor contains matching values to this router. Syntax adjacency-check To disable adjacency check, use the no adjacency-check command. Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Enabled. • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.
prefix-list-name Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Enter the name of a configured IP prefix list. Routes meeting the criteria of the IP Prefix list are leaked. level1-into-level2 (Level 1 to Level 2 leaking enabled.) • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To prevent the link state database from receiving incorrect routing information from unauthorized routers, use the area-password command on routers within an area. The configured password injects into Level 1 LSPs, CSNPs, and PSNPs. Related Commands • domain-password — allows you to set the authentication password for a routing domain.
Parameters tag (Optional) Enter an alphanumeric string to specify the IS-IS routing tag area. * Enter the keyword * to clear all IS-IS information and restart the IS-IS process. This command removes IS-IS neighbor information and IS-IS LSP database information and the full SPF calculation is done. database Clears IS-IS LSP database information. traffic Clears IS-IS counters. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Related Commands hostname dynamic — enables dynamic learning of host names from routers in the domain and allows the routers to advertise the host names in LSPs. debug isis Enable debugging for all IS-IS operations. Syntax debug isis To disable debugging of IS-IS, use the no debug isis command. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug isis local-updates To debug IS-IS local update packets, enable debugging on a specific interface and provides diagnostic information.
debug isis snp-packets To debug IS-IS complete sequence number PDU (CSNP) and partial sequence number PDU (PSNP) packets, enable debugging on a specific interface and provides diagnostic information. Syntax debug isis snp-packets [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis snp-packets [interface] command.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug isis update-packets Enable debugging on link state PDUs (LSPs) that a router detects. Syntax debug isis update-packets [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis update-packets [interface] command.
Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to have the default route always advertised. metric metric (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number to assign to the route. The range is from 0 to 16777215. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) A default route the routing process generates if the route map is satisfied. Not configured.
To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters description Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter a description to identify the IS-IS protocol (80 characters maximum). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. router isis — Enter ROUTER mode on the switch.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The administrative distance indicates the trust value of incoming packets. A low administrative distance indicates a high trust rate. A high value indicates a lower trust rate. For example, a weight of 255 is interpreted that the routing information source is not trustworthy and should be ignored. distribute-list in Filter network prefixes received in updates.
distribute-list out Suppress network prefixes from being advertised in outbound updates. Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | bgp as number | ospf process-id | rip | static] To return to the default values, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name out [bgp as number connected | ospf process-id | rip | static] command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History prefix-list-name Specify the prefix list to filter prefixes in routing updates.
distribute-list redistributed-override Suppress flapping of routes when the same route is redistributed into IS-IS from multiple routers in the network. Syntax distribute-list redistributed-override in To return to the default, use the no distribute-list redistributed-override in command. Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History none • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM.
Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The domain password is inserted in Level 2 link state PDUs (LSPs), complete sequence number PDUs (CSNPs), and partial sequence number PDUs (PSNPs). Related Commands • area-password — configures an IS-IS area authentication password.
graceful-restart interval Set the graceful restart grace period, the time during that all graceful restart attempts are prevented. Syntax graceful-restart interval minutes To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart interval command. Parameters minutes Defaults 5 minutes Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the graceful-restart interval minutes. The range is from 1 to 20 minutes. The default is 5 minutes. Version Description 9.9(0.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. graceful-restart t2 Configure the wait time for the graceful restart timer T2 that a restarting router uses as the wait time for each database to synchronize. Syntax graceful-restart t2 {level-1 | level-2} seconds To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart t2 command.
Parameters adjacency Enter the keyword adjacency so that the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if you have configured this option. manual Enter the keyword manual to specify a time value that the restarting router uses. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. Defaults manual, 30 seconds Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM.
Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. graceful-restart t3 — configures the overall wait time before graceful restart completes. hello padding Use to turn ON or OFF padding for LAN and point-to-point hello PDUs or to selectively turn padding ON or OFF for LAN or point-to-point hello PDUs.
hostname dynamic Enables dynamic learning of hostnames from routers in the domain and allows the routers to advertise the hostname in LSPs. Syntax hostname dynamic To disable this command, use the no hostname dynamic command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information IS-IS normally purges LSPs with an incorrect data link checksum causing the LSP source to regenerate the message. A cycle of purging and regenerating LSPs can occur when a network link continues to deliver accurate LSPs even though there is a link causing data corruption. This process could cause disruption to your system operation. ip router isis Configure IS-IS routing processes on an interface and attach an area tag name to the routing process.
The tag name must be unique for all IP router processes for a given router. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Configure a network entity title (the net command) to specify the area address and the router system ID.
Level 2. Level 1 adjacencies cannot be established on this interface. Defaults level-1-2 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Because the default establishes Level 1 and Level 2 adjacencies, you do not need to configure this command. Routers in an IS-IS system must be configured as a Level 1only, Level 1-2, or Level 2-only system.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The default values of this command are typically satisfactory transmission times for a specific interface on a designated intermediate system. To maintain database synchronization, the designated routers send CSNPs. You can configure Level 1 and Level 2 CSNP intervals independently.
isis hello-multiplier Specify the number of IS-IS hello packets a neighbor must miss before the router declares the adjacency down. Syntax isis hello-multiplier multiplier [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no isis hello-multiplier [multiplier] [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters multiplier Specifies an integer that sets the multiplier for the hello holding time. Never configure a hello-multiplier lower than the default (3). The range is from 3 to 1000. The default is 3.
Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Hello PDUs are “padded” only when both the global and interface padding options are ON. Turning either one OFF disables padding for the corresponding interface. Related Commands hello padding — turns ON or OFF padding for LAN and point-to-point hello PDUs.
Usage Information Dell Networking recommends configuring metrics on all interfaces. Without configuring this command, the IS-IS metrics are similar to hop-count metrics. isis metric Assign a metric to an interface. Syntax isis metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no isis metric [default-metric] [level-1 | level-2] command.
isis network point-to-point Enable the software to treat a broadcast interface as a point-to-point interface. Syntax isis network point-to-point To disable the feature, use the no isis network point-to-point command. Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. isis password Configure an authentication password for an interface.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To protect your network from unauthorized access, use this command to prevent unauthorized routers from forming adjacencies. You can assign different passwords for different routing levels by using the keywords level-1 and level-2.
Usage Information You can configure priorities independently for Level 1 and Level 2. Priorities determine which router on a LAN is the designated router. Priorities are advertised within hellos. The router with the highest priority becomes the designated intermediate system (DIS). NOTE: Routers with a priority of 0 cannot be a designated router. Setting the priority to 0 lowers the chance of this system becoming the DIS, but does not prevent it.
log-adjacency-changes Generate a log messages for adjacency state changes. Syntax log-adjacency-changes To disable this function, use the no log-adjacency-changes command. Defaults Adjacency changes are not logged. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
second_wait_inte rval seconds Defaults Refer to Parameters. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the wait interval, in seconds, between the first and second LSP generation. The range is from 0 to 120 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The link MTU and the LSP MTU size must be the same. Because each device can generate a maximum of 255 LSPs, consider carefully whether you use the lsp-mtu command. lsp-refresh-interval Set the link state PDU (LSP) refresh interval. LSPs must be refreshed before they expire.
Related Commands max-lsp-lifetime — sets the maximum interval that LSPs persist without being refreshed. max-area-addresses Configure manual area addresses. Syntax max-area-addresses number To return to the default values, use the no max-area-addresses command. Parameters number Defaults 3 addresses Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Set the maximum number of manual area addresses. The range is from 3 to 6. The default is 3. Version Description 9.9(0.
Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Change the maximum LSP lifetime with this command. The maximum LSP lifetime must always be greater than the LSP refresh interval. The seconds parameter enables the router to keep LSPs for the specified length of time. If the value is higher, the overhead is reduced on slower-speed links.
metric-style To generate and accept old-style, new-style, or both styles of type, length, and values (TLV), configure a router. Syntax metric-style {narrow [transition] | transition | wide [transition]} [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no metric-style {narrow [transition] | transition | wide [transition]} [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters narrow Allows you to generate and accept old-style TLVs. The metric range is from 0 to 63.
multi-topology Enables multi-topology IS-IS. It also allows enabling/disabling of old and new style TLVs for IP prefix information in the LSPs. Syntax multi-topology [transition] To return to a single topology configuration, use the no multi-topology [transition] command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. passive-interface Suppress routing updates on an interface. This command stops the router from sending updates on that interface. Syntax passive-interface interface To delete a passive interface configuration, use the no passive-interface interface command. Parameters interface Defaults Not configured.
redistribute Redistribute routes from one routing domain to another routing domain. Syntax redistribute {static | connected | rip} [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] To end redistribution or disable any of the specified keywords, use the no redistribute {static | connected | rip} [metric metric-value] [metric-type {external | internal}] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [route-map map-name] command.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To redistribute a default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command. Changing or disabling a keyword in this command does not affect the state of the other command keywords.
Parameters AS number Enter a number that corresponds to the autonomous system number. The range is from 1 to 65355. level-1 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS Level 1 routes only. level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS Level 1 and Level 2 routes. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Routes are independently redistributed into IS-IS as Level 2 routes only. This setting is the default. metric metricvalue (OPTIONAL) The value used for the redistributed route.
router isis redistribute bgp 1 level-1 metric 32 metric-type external routemap rmap-isis-to-bgp redistribute ospf Redistribute routing information from an OSPF process.
If you do not specify a map-name, all routes are redistributed. If you specify a keyword, but fail to list route map tags, no routes are imported. Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Refer to Parameters. • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information Configure a network entity title (the net command) to specify the area address and the router system ID. Enable routing on one or more interfaces to establish adjacencies and establish dynamic routing. You can configure only one IS-IS routing process to perform Level 2 routing. A level-1-2 designation performs Level 1 and Level 2 routing at the same time.
show config Display the changes you made to the IS-IS configuration. Default values are not shown. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example (RouterIsis) show config • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The bold section identifies that Multi-Topology IS-IS is enabled in Transition mode.
show isis database Display the IS-IS link state database. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show isis database [level-1 | level-2] [local] [detail | summary] [lspid] level-1 (OPTIONAL) Displays the Level 1 IS-IS link-state database. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Displays the Level 2 IS-IS link-state database. local (OPTIONAL) Displays local link-state database information. detail (OPTIONAL) Detailed link-state database information of each LSP displays when specified.
Field Description The designated router for a LAN creates and floods a pseudonode LSP and describes the attached systems. The last octet is the LSP number. An LSP is divided into multiple LSP fragments if there is more data than cannot fit in a single LSP. Each fragment has a unique LSP number. An * after the LSPID indicates that the system originates an LSP where this command was issued.
IPv6 Address: 1011::1 Topology: IPv4 (0x00) IPv6 (0x8002) Metric: 10 IS OSPF.00 Metric: 10 IS (MT-IPv6) OSPF.00 Metric: 10 IP 15.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 Metric: 10 IPv6 (MT-IPv6) 1511::/64 Metric: 10 IPv6 (MT-IPv6) 2511::/64 Metric: 10 IPv6 (MT-IPv6) 1011::/64 Metric: 10 IPv6 1511::/64 Metric: 10 IP 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 Hostname: ISIS IS-IS Level-2 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum LSP Holdtime ATT/P/OL ISIS.00-00 * 0x0000002D 0xB2CD 1075 0/0/0 Area Address: 49.0000.
Graceful Restart T3 Timer T3 Timeout Value T2 Timeout Value T1 Timeout Value Adjacency wait time : : : : : : Enabled Manual 30 30 (level-1), 30 (level-2) 5, retry count: 1 30 Operational Timer Value ====================== Current Mode/State : T3 Time left : T2 Time left : Restart ACK rcv count : Restart Req rcv count : Suppress Adj rcv count : Restart CSNP rcv count : Database Sync count : Dell# Normal/RUNNING 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 0 (level-1), 0 (
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example interface • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
show isis neighbors Display information about neighboring (adjacent) routers. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show isis neighbors [level-1 | level-2] [detail] [interface] level-1 (OPTIONAL) Displays information about Level 1 IS-IS neighbors. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Displays information about Level 2 IS-IS neighbors. detail (OPTIONAL) Displays detailed information about neighbors.
Example Field Description Type This value displays the adjacency type (Layer 2, Layer 2 or both). Priority IS-IS priority the neighbor advertises. The neighbor with highest priority becomes the designated router for the interface. Uptime Displays the interfaces uptime. Circuit Id The neighbor’s interpretation of the designated router for the interface. The bold sections below identify that Multi-Topology IS-IS is enabled.
Manual area address(es): 49.0000.0001 Routing for area address(es): 49.0000.0001 Interfaces supported by IS-IS: GigabitEthernet 1/0 - IP - IPv6 GigabitEthernet 1/1 - IP - IPv6 GigabitEthernet 1/10 - IP - IPv6 Loopback 0 - IP - IPv6 Redistributing: Distance: 115 Generate narrow metrics: level-1-2 Accept narrow metrics: level-1-2 Generate wide metrics: none Accept wide metrics: none Multi Topology Routing is enabled in transition mode.
Example Item Description Level-1/Level-2 Hellos (sent/rcvd) Displays the number of Hello packets sent and received. PTP Hellos (sent/ rcvd) Displays the number of point-to-point Hellos sent and received. Level-1/Level-2 LSPs sourced (new/refresh) Displays the number of new and refreshed LSPs. Level-1/Level-2 LSPs flooded (sent/rcvd) Displays the number of flooded LSPs sent and received. Level-1/Level-2 LSPs CSNPs (sent/ rcvd) Displays the number of CSNP LSPs sent and received.
spf-interval Specify the minimum interval between shortest path first (SPF) calculations. Syntax spf-interval [level-l | level-2] interval seconds [initial_wait_interval seconds [second_wait_interval seconds]] To restore default values, use the no spf-interval [level-l | level-2] interval seconds [initial_wait_interval seconds [second_wait_interval seconds]] command.
SPF throttling slows down the frequency at which route calculations are performed during network instability. Even though throttling route calculations slows down network convergence, not throttling can result in a network not functioning as expected. If network topology is unstable, throttling slows down the scheduling of route calculations until the topology regains its stability.
32 Isolated Networks This chapter describes the isolated networks commands in the Dell Networking OS. io-aggregator isolated-network vlan Enable the isolated-network functionality for a particular VLAN or a set of VLANs.
show io-aggregator isolated-networks Display the VLANs that are configured to be part of an isolated network on an Aggregator. Syntax Parameters show io-aggregator isolated-networks isolatednetworks Specify an isolated network to be configured vlan vlanrange Enter the keyword vlan followed by the member VLANs using VLAN IDs (separated by commas), a range of VLAN IDs (separated by a hyphen), a single VLAN ID, or a combination. For example: VLAN IDs (comma-separated): 3, 4, 6.
33 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) This chapter contains commands for Dell Networking’s implementation of the link aggregation control protocol (LACP) for the creation of dynamic link aggregation groups (LAGs — called port-channels in Dell Networking OS parlance).
Supported Modes Standalone, Stacking, VLT Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator 9.6(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. clear lacp counters Clear Port Channel counters. Syntax clear lacp port-channel-number counters Parameters port-channelnumber Enter a port-channel number: The range is from 1 to 128.
To disable LACP debugging, use the no debug lacp [pdu interface [in | out]] command. Parameters pdu in | out interface in | out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword pdu to debug the LACP Protocol Data Unit information.
Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. show io-aggregator auto-lag status—displays global information on the auto-lag status. lacp link-fallback member Enable the LACP link fallback member feature.
To reset the timeout period to a short timeout (1 second), use the no lacp longtimeout command. Defaults 1 second Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-po-number) Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. port-channel mode Configure the LACP port channel mode. Syntax Parameters port-channel number mode [active] [passive] [off] number Enter the keywords number then a number. active Enter the keyword active to set the mode to the active state. NOTE: LACP modes are defined in Usage Information.
Mode Function active An interface is in an active negotiating state in this mode. LACP runs on any link configured in the active state and also automatically initiates negotiation with other ports by initiating LACP packets. passive An interface is not in an active negotiating state in this mode. LACP runs on any link configured in the passive state. Ports in a passive state respond to negotiation requests from other ports that are in active states.
show interfaces port-channel Display information on configured Port Channel groups. Syntax Parameters show interfaces port-channel [channel-number] [brief| description] channel-number For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword port-channel followed by a number. The range is from 1 to 128. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display only the port channel number, the state of the port channel, and the number of interfaces in the port channel.
Example (EtherScale) Field Description Port-channel is part... Indicates whether the LAG is part of a LAG fate-sharing group (“Failover-group”). Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface. If an IP address is assigned, that address is displayed. MTU 1554... Displays link and IP MTU. LineSpeed Displays the interface’s line speed. For a port channel interface, it is the line speed of the interfaces in the port channel. Members in this...
Last clearing of "show interface" counters 03:28:00 Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts
Related Commands show lacp — displays the LACP matrix. show io-aggregator auto-lag status Displays global information on the auto-lag status. Syntax show io-aggregator auto-lag status Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Standalone, Stacking, VLT Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Supported Modes Command History Example (PortChannel-Number) All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell#show lacp Port-channel 1 Actor System Partner System 1 128 admin up, oper up, ID:Priority 32768, ID:Priority 32768, Actor Admin Key mode lacp Address 0001.e800.a12b Address 0001.e801.
show link-bundle-distribution portchannel Display the traffic-handling and utilization of the member interfaces of the port channel. Syntax show link-bundle-distribution port-channel Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
Interface Te 0/5 Line Protocol Up Utilization[In Percent] 0 show port-channel-flow Display an egress port in a given port-channel flow. Syntax Parameters show port-channel-flow port-channel number incoming-interface interface { src-mac address dest-mac address {vlan vlanid | ethertype }} [ src-ip address dest-ip address ] [ src-port number destport number ] port-channel number Enter the keywords port-channel then the number of the port channel to display flow information. The range is from 1 to 128.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information Because this command calculates based on a Layer 2 hash algorithm, use this command to display flows for switched Layer 2 packets, not for routed packets (use the show ip flow command to display routed packets).
34 Layer 2 This chapter describes commands to configure Layer 2 features.
• vlan vlan-id Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information. Enter the keyword vlan followed by a VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
mac-address-table static Associate specific MAC or hardware addresses to an interface and virtual local area networks (VLANs). Syntax mac-address-table static mac-address output interface vlan vlan-id To remove a MAC address, use the no mac-address-table static mac-address output interface vlan vlan-id command. Parameters mac-address Enter the 48-bit hexadecimal address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Modified the default option from none to Enabled. Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information For details about using this command, refer to the “NIC Teaming” section of the Layer 2 chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
Usage Information This command and its options are supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, LACP LAGs, and VLANs. If you do not specify the vlan option, the MAC address counters are not VLAN-based. That is, the sum of the addresses learned on all VLANs (not having any learning limit configuration) is counted against the MAC learning limit. MAC Learning Limit violation logs and actions are not available on a per-VLAN basis.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, and LACP LAGs. Related Commands show mac learning-limit — displays details of the mac learning-limit. mac learning-limit station-move-violation Specify the actions for a station move violation.
mac learning-limit reset Reset the MAC address learning-limit error-disabled state. Syntax mac learning-limit reset Defaults none Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show cam mac stack-unit Display the content addressable memory (CAM) size and the portions allocated for MAC addresses and for MAC ACLs.
• vlan vlan-id Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
• Command Modes Supported Modes For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. interface interface-type (OPTIONAL) Instead of entering the keyword interface then the interface type, slot and port information, as above, you can enter the interface type, then just a slot number. vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.
Example Column Heading Description State Lists if the MAC address is in use (Active) or not in use (Inactive). Dell#show mac-address-table VlanId Mac Address Type 20 00:00:c9:ad:f6:12 Dynamic Dell# Interface Te 0/3 State Active Usage Information The following describes the show mac-address-table command shown in the following example. Column Heading Description VlanId Displays the VLAN ID number. Mac Address Displays the MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
Total MAC Addresses in Use: Dell# 5 show mac-address-table aging-time Display the aging times assigned to the MAC addresses on the switch. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show mac-address-table aging-time [vlan vlan-id] vlan vlan-id • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. show vlan – displays the VLAN configuration. default vlan-id Specify a VLAN as the Default VLAN. Syntax default vlan-id vlan-id To remove the default VLAN status from a VLAN and VLAN 1 does not exist, use the no default vlan-id vlan-id syntax.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The no default vlan disable command is not listed in the running-configuration, but when the default VLAN is disabled, default-vlan disable is listed in the running-configuration. name Assign a name to the VLAN. Syntax name vlan-name To remove the name from the VLAN, use the no name command.
show config Display the current configuration of the selected VLAN. Syntax show config Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 1 description a no ip address mtu 2500 shutdown Dell(conf-if-vl-100)# show vlan Display the current VLAN configurations on the switch.
• Supported Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show vlan command shown in the following example. Column Heading (Column 1 — no heading) Description • asterisk symbol (*) = Default VLAN • G = GVRP VLAN • P = primary VLAN • C = community VLAN • I = isolated VLAN • O = OpenFlow NUM Displays existing VLAN IDs.
Example Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs, R - Remote Port Mirroring VLANs, P Primary, C - Community, I - Isolated Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack, H - VSN tagged i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged NUM Status Description Q Ports 1 Inactive a 2 Inactive * 20 Active U Te 0/3,5,13,53-56 1002 Active T Te 0/3,13,55-56 Dell# Example (VLAN ID) Dell# show vlan id 40 Codes: * - Default VL
tagged Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as a tagged interface. Syntax tagged interface To remove a tagged interface from a VLAN, use the no tagged interface command. Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
To remove the tracking feature from the VLAN, use the no track ip interface command. Parameters interface Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
• For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Defaults All interfaces in Layer 2 mode are untagged. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
35 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) The link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network management. The Dell Networking OS implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab. This chapter describes the LLDP commands.
advertise dot1-tlv Advertise dot1 TLVs (Type, Length, Value). Syntax advertise dot1-tlv {port-protocol-vlan-id | port-vlan-id | vlanname} To remove advertised dot1-tlv, use the no advertise dot1-tlv {portprotocol-vlan-id | port-vlan-id | vlan-name} command. Parameters port-protocolvlan-id Enter the keywords port-protocol-vlan-id to advertise the port protocol VLAN identification TLV. port-vlan-id Enter the keywords port-vlan-id to advertise the port VLAN identification TLV.
To remove advertised dot3-tlv, use the no advertise dot3-tlv {max-framesize} command. Parameters max-frame-size Enter the keywords max-frame-size to advertise the dot3 maximum frame size. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The command options system-capabilities, system-description, and system-name can be invoked individually or together, in any sequence.
Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display brief packet information. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to display detailed packet information. tx (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword tx to display transmit-only packet information. rx (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rx to display receive-only packet information. both (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword both to display both receive and transmit packet information.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Related Commands hello Configure the rate at which the LLDP control packets are sent to its peer. Syntax hello seconds To revert to the default, use the no hello seconds command. Parameters seconds Enter the rate, in seconds, at which the control packets are sent to its peer. The rate is from 5 to 180 seconds. The default is 30 seconds.
Parameters tx Enter the keyword tx to set the mode to transmit. rx Enter the keyword rx to set the mode to receive. Defaults Both transmit and receive. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol lldp (Configuration) Enable LLDP globally on the switch. Syntax protocol lldp To disable LLDP globally on the chassis, use the no protocol lldp command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Usage Information This command is available only in PMUX mode. By default, protocol lldp is enabled, To disable, use the no protocol lldp command. When you enter the LLDP protocol in the Interface context, it overrides global configurations. When you execute the no protocol lldp from INTERFACE mode, interfaces begin to inherit the configuration from global LLDP CONFIGURATION mode. show lldp neighbors Display LLDP neighbor information for all interfaces or a specified interface.
show lldp statistics Displays the LLDP statistical information. Syntax show lldp statistics Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description hello 15 multiplier 3 no disable Dell# LLDP-MED Commands The following are the LLDP-MED (Media Endpoint Discovery) commands. The LLDP-MED commands are an extension of the set of LLDP TLV advertisement commands.
priority-tagged number Enter the keywords priority-tagged followed the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults Unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Supported Modes Full-Switch Command History Related Commands 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol lldp (Configuration) — enables LLDP globally. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors.
Related Commands debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise med location-identification To advertise a location identifier, configure the system.
advertise med power-via-mdi To advertise the Extended Power via MDI TLV, configure the system. Syntax advertise med power-via-mdi To return to the default, use the no advertise med power-via-mdi command. Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Supported Modes Full-Switch Command History 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version 8.3.16.1 Related Commands Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise med streaming-video To advertise streaming video services for broadcast or multicast-based video, configure the system. This command does not include video applications that rely on TCP buffering.
To return to the default, use the no advertise med video-conferencing {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. priority-tagged number Enter the keywords priority-tagged then the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Supported Modes Full-Switch Command History Related Commands 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. Version 8.3.16.
show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise med voice To advertise a dedicated IP telephony handset or other appliances supporting interactive voice services, configure the system. Syntax advertise med voice {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094.
priority-tagged number Enter the keywords priority-tagged then the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Supported Modes Full-Switch Command History Related Commands 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration.
36 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network Load Balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
• With NLB feature enabled, after learning the NLB ARP entry, all the subsequent traffic is flooded on all ports in VLAN1. With NLB, the data frame is forwarded to all the servers for them to perform load-balancing. NLB Multicast Mode Scenario Consider a sample topology in which four servers, namely S1 through S4, are configured as a cluster or a farm. This set of servers is connected to a Layer 3 switch, which in turn is connected to the end-clients.
registers only the last received ARP reply, and the switch learns one server’s actual MAC address; the virtual MAC address is never learned. Because the virtual MAC address is never learned, traffic is forwarded to only one server rather than the entire cluster, and failover and balancing are not preserved. To preserve failover and balancing, the switch forwards the traffic destined for the server cluster to all member ports in the VLAN connected to the cluster.
Syntax mac-address-table static multicast-mac-address multicast vlan vlan-id range-output {single-interface | interface-list | interface-range} To remove a MAC address, use the no mac-address-table static multicastmac-address output interface vlan vlan-id command. Parameters multicast-macaddress Enter the 48-bit hexadecimal address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. multicast Enter a vlan port to where L2 multicast MAC traffic is forwarded.
ip vlan-flooding Enable unicast data traffic flooding on VLAN member ports. Syntax ip vlan-flooding To disable, use the no ip vlan-flooding command. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Default Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL Switch . Disabled Usage Information By default this command is disabled.
37 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) connects multiple PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) domains together. MSDP peers connect using TCP port 639. Peers send keepalives every 60 seconds. A peer connection is reset after 75 seconds if no MSDP packets are received. MSDP connections are parallel with MBGP connections.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL Switch . clear ip msdp sa-cache Clears the entire source-active cache, the source-active entries of a particular multicast group, rejected, or local source-active entries. Syntax Parameters clear ip msdp sa-cache [group-address | rejected-sa | local] group-address Enter the group IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.).
Parameters group-address Enter the group IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). rejected-sa Enter the keyword rejected-sa to clear the cache sourceactive entries that are rejected because the RPF check failed, an SA filter or limit is configured, the RP or MSDP peer is unreachable, or because of a format error. local Enter the keyword local to clear out local PIM advertised entries. It applies the redistribute filter (if present) while adding the local PIM SA entries to the SA cache.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip msdp cache-rejected-sa Enable an MSDP cache for the rejected source-active entries. Syntax ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number} To clear the MSDP rejected source-active entries, use the no ip msdp cacherejected-sa {number} command then the ip msdp cache-rejected-sa {number} command. Parameters number Enter the number of rejected SA entries to cache. The range is from 0 to 32766.
list name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keywords list name and specify a standard access list that contains the RP address that should be treated as the default peer. If no access list is specified, then all SAs from the peer are accepted. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
To remove the peer from a mesh group, use the no ip msdp mesh-group {name} {peer address} command. Parameters name Enter a string of up to 16 characters long for as the mesh group name. peer address Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip msdp peer Configure an MSDP peer.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The connect-source option is used to supply a source IP address for the TCP connection. When an interface is specified using the connect-source option, the primary configured address on the interface is used.
To apply the redistribute filter to entries already present in the SA cache, use the clear ip msdp sa-cache local command. ip msdp sa-filter Permit or deny MSDP source active (SA) messages based on multicast source and/or group from the specified peer. Syntax ip msdp sa-filter {in | out} peer-address list [access-list name] Remove this configuration using the no ip msdp sa-filter {in | out} peer address list [access-list name] command. Parameters in Enter the keyword in to enable incoming SA filtering.
Defaults 50000 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The system counts the SA messages originated by itself and those messages received from the MSDP peers. When the total SA messages reach this limit, the subsequent SA messages are dropped (even if they pass RPF checking and policy checking).
ip multicast-msdp Enable MSDP. Syntax ip multicast-msdp To exit MSDP, use the no ip multicast-msdp command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip msdp Display the MSDP peer status, SA cache, or peer summary.
Example Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ip msdp peer 100.1.1.1 Peer Addr: 100.1.1.1 Local Addr: 100.1.1.
UpTime 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 00:00:13 Dell# GroupAddr SourceAddr 225.1.2.1 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.2 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.3 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.4 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.5 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.6 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.7 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.8 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.9 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.10 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.11 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.11 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.12 10.1.1.4 225.1.2.13 10.1.1.3 225.1.2.14 10.1.1.4 225.1.
38 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP), as implemented by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS), conforms to IEEE 802.1s.
bpdu interface {in | out} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug bridge protocol data units (BPDU). (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface keyword along with the type slot/port of the interface you want displayed. Type slot/port options are the following: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol spanning-tree mstp — enters MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Globally disable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the switch. Syntax disable To enable MSTP, enter the no disable command. Defaults disabled.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module forward-delay The amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State before transitioning to the Forwarding State. Syntax forward-delay seconds To return to the default setting, use the no forward-delay command.
To return to the default value, use the no hello-time command. Parameters seconds Enter a number as the time interval between transmission of BPDUs. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. Defaults 2 seconds Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands edge-port bpdufilter default — the amount of time the interface waits in the Blocking State and the Learning State before transitioning to the Forwarding State. hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. max-hops Configure the maximum hop count. Syntax max-hops number To return to the default values, use the no max-hops command. Parameters range Enter a number for the maximum hop count. The range is from 1 to 40. The default is 20.
Parameters msti instance Enter the MSTP iInstance. The range is from zero (0) to 63. vlan range Enter the keyword vlan then the identifier range value. The range is from 1 to 4094. bridge-priority priority Enter the keywords bridge-priority then a value in increments of 4096 as the bridge priority. The range is from zero (0) to 61440. Valid priority values are: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, and 61440. All other values are rejected.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information For two MSTP switches to be within the same MSTP region, the switches must share the same region name (including matching case). Related Commands msti — maps the VLAN(s) to an MST instance. revision — assigns the revision number to the MST configuration.
revision The revision number for the multiple spanning tree configuration. Syntax revision range To return to the default values, use the no revision command. Parameters range Enter the revision number for the MST configuration. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 0. Defaults 0 Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Dell(conf-mstp)#show config ! protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable name CustomerSvc revision 2 MSTI 10 VLAN 101-105 max-hops 5 Dell(conf-mstp)# show spanning-tree mst configuration View the multiple spanning tree configuration. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show spanning-tree mst configuration • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History brief (Optional) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the MST instance. guard (Optional) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on an MSTP interface and the current port state. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Enable the multiple spanning tree protocol prior to using this command.
Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 20 Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.6aa8 We are the root of MSTI 0 (CIST) Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 20 CIST regional root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Interface Name --------Te 0/10 Te 0/11 Te 0/12 Instance -------0 0 0 Sts Guard type Bpdu Filter --------- ---------- ----------FWD None No FWD None No FWD None No spanning-tree Enable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the interface. Syntax spanning-tree To disable the multiple spanning tree protocol on the interface, use the no spanningtree command. Parameters spanning-tree Defaults Enable.
priority priority Defaults Port Channel with two 10 Gigabit Ethernet = 1800 • Port Channel with two 100 Mbps Ethernet = 180000 Enter keyword priority then a value in increments of 16 as the priority. The range is from 0 to 240. The default is 128. • cost = depends on the interface type • priority = 128 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History • Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
rootguard Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword rootguard to enable root guard on an MSTP port or port-channel interface. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information On an MSTP switch, a port configured as an edge port immediately transitions to the forwarding state. Only ports connected to end-hosts should be configured as an edge port.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information By default, the sytem implements an optimized flush mechanism for MSTP. This mechanism helps in flushing the MAC addresses only when necessary (and less often) allowing for faster convergence during topology changes.
39 Multicast The multicast commands are supported by Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • IPv4 Multicast Commands • IPv6 Multicast Commands Topics: • IPv4 Multicast Commands • clear ip mroute • ip mroute • ip multicast-limit • ip multicast-routing • show ip mroute • show ip rpf • IPv6 Multicast Commands • debug ipv6 mld_host • ip multicast-limit IPv4 Multicast Commands The following section contains the IPv4 multicast commands.
snooping Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter the keyword snooping to delete multicast snooping route table entries. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2.(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip pim tib — shows the PIM tree information base. ip mroute Assign a static mroute.
• static ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the Static IP address in dotted decimal format of the RPF neighbor. ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the RPF neighbor. distance (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the distance metric assigned to the mroute. The range is from 0 to 255. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter the RIP IP address in dotted decimal format of the RPF neighbor.
line card, the multicast module only installs the maximum number of entries, depending on the configured CAM profile. To store multicast routes, use the IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition. It is a separate hardware limit that exists per port-pipe. This hardware space limitation can supersede any software-configured limit. The opposite is also true, the CAM partition might not be exhausted at the time the system-wide route limit set by the ip multicast-limit command is reached.
Parameters static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view static multicast routes. group-address [source-address] (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group-address to view only routes associated with that group. Enter the source-address to view routes with that groupaddress and source-address. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to view the number of multicast routes and packets.
Mroute: 23.23.23.0/24, interface: Lo 2 Protocol: static, distance: 0, route-map: none, last change: 00:00:23 Example (Snooping) Dell#show ip mroute snooping IPv4 Multicast Snooping Table (*, 224.0.0.0), uptime 17:46:23 Incoming vlan: Vlan 2 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 4/13 (*, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:04:16 Incoming vlan: Vlan 2 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 0/4 TenGigabitEthernet 1/5 (165.87.1.7, 225.1.2.
Example Field Description Outgoing interface list: Lists the interfaces that meet one of the following: • a directly connected member of the Group • statically configured member of the Group • received a (*,G) or (S,G) Join message Dell#show ip mroute IP Multicast Routing Table (*, 224.10.10.1), uptime 00:05:12 Incoming interface: TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 3/13 (1.13.1.100, 224.10.10.
NOTE: The default distance of mroutes is zero (0) and is CLI configurable on a per route basis. Example Dell#show ip rpf RPF information for 10.10.10.9 RPF interface: Te 0/4 RPF neighbor: 165.87.31.4 RPF route/mask: 10.10.10.9/255.255.255.255 RPF type: unicast IPv6 Multicast Commands The following section contains the IPv6 multicast commands. debug ipv6 mld_host Enable the collection of debug information for MLD host transactions.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2.(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To debug the MLD protocol for all ports or for specified ports, use the debug ipv6 mld_host command. Displayed information includes when a query is received, when a report is sent, when a mcast joins or leaves a group, and some reasons why an MLD query is rejected.
40 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports the network discovery protocol for IPv6. The neighbor discovery protocol for IPv6 is defined in RFC 2461 as part of the Stateless Address Autoconfiguration protocol. It replaces the Address Resolution Protocol used with IPv4.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. interface interface Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege To remove all neighbor entries learned on a specific interface, enter the keyword interface then the interface type and slot/ port or number information of the interface: • For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastEthernet then the slot/port information.
hardware_address Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History • For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Enter a 48-bit hardware MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. Version Description 9.9(0.
• Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell# show ipv6 neighbors IPv6 Address Expires(min)Hardware Address State Interface VLAN CPU -----------------------------------------------------------------100::1 0.
41 NPIV Proxy Gateway The N-port identifier virtualization (NPIV) Proxy Gateway (NPG) feature provides FCoE-FC bridging capability on the FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module switch, allowing server CNAs to communicate with SAN fabrics over the FN IOMwith the FC Flex IO module.
INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information A DCB map is a template used to configure DCB parameters and apply them on converged Ethernet interfaces. DCB parameters include priority-based flow control (PFC) and enhanced traffic selection (ETS).
Command Modes FCOE MAP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN 2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The text description is displayed in show fcoe-map command output. Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric.
Version Description 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN 2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information In the fabric-id vlan command, the fabric and VLAN ID numbers must be the same. In each FCoE map, the fabric ID, FC-MAP value, and FCoE VLAN parameters must be unique. To remove a fabric-VLAN association from an FCoE map, enter the no fabric-id vlan command. Create a VLAN and then specify the configured VLAN ID in the fabric-id vlan command.
Version Description 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN 2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. Usage Information The FCF priority you assign to an FN 2210S Aggregator is used by server CNAs to select an upstream FCF to use for a fabric login (FLOGI). To remove a configured FCF priority from an FCoE map, enter the no fcf-priority command.
Usage Information The FC-MAP value you enter must match the FC-MAP value used by an FC switch or FCoE forwarder (FCF) in the fabric. An FCF switch accepts only FCoE traffic that uses the correct FC-MAP value. The FC-MAP value is used to generate the fabric-provided MAC address (FP-MAC). The FPMA is used by servers to transmit FCoE traffic to the fabric. An FC-MAP can be associated with only one FCoE VLAN and vice versa. In an FCoE map, the FC-MAP value, fabric ID, and FCoE VLAN parameters must be unique.
INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN2210S Aggregator with the PMUX module. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator with the PMUX module. Usage Information An FCoE map is a template used to map FCoE and FC parameters in a converged fabric.
Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Default Command History Enabled Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aaggregator. Usage Information The command is supported only in FN2210S Aggregator. fka-adv-period In an FCoE map, configure the time interval used to transmit FIP keepalive (FKA) advertisements.
keepalive In an FCoE map, enable the monitoring of FIP keepalive messages (if it is disabled). Syntax keepalive Parameters None Defaults FIP keepalive monitoring is enabled on Ethernet and Fibre Channel interfaces. Command Modes FCoE MAP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN 2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.
(FCoE) and FC ports to transmit FC storage traffic to a specified fabric. Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module.
Field Description complete on peer FC port), or Removed (port has been shut down). The following describes the show fcoe-map map-name output shown in the example. Example Field Description Fabric-Name Name of a SAN fabric. Fabric ID The ID number of the SAN fabric to which FC traffic is forwarded. VLAN ID The dedicated FCoE VLAN used to transport FCoE storage traffic between servers and a fabric over the NPIV proxy gateway. The configured VLAN ID must be the same as the fabric ID.
Vlan Id Vlan priority FC-MAP FKA-ADV-Period Fcf Priority Config-State Oper-State Members Related Commands 1004 3 0efc04 8 128 ACTIVE DOWN fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show fc sw Display the switch configuration for Fibre Channel capability. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show fc sw • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.
• linecard slotnumber Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard then the slot number. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN 2210S Aggregator. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6.(0.0) Supported on the FN2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module.
Te 0/12 20:01:00:10:18:f1:94:20 1003 Fc 0/5 fid_1003 FLOG LOGGED_IN Te 0/13 10:00:00:00:c9:d9:9c:cb 1003 Fc 0/0 fid_1003 FDISC LOGGED_IN Usage Information The following describes the show npiv devices output shown in the example. Example Field Description ENode [number] A server CNA that has successfully logged in to a fabric over an FN I/O Aggregator with the FC Flex IO module Ethernet port in ENode mode. Enode MAC MAC address of a server CNA port.
Related Commands LoginMethod Secs Status : FLOGI : 5593 : LOGGED_IN ENode[1]: ENode MAC ENode Intf FCF MAC Fabric Intf FCoE Vlan Fabric Map ENode WWPN ENode WWNN FCoE MAC FC-ID LoginMethod Secs Status : : : : : : : : : : : : : 00:10:18:f1:94:22 Te 0/13 5c:f9:dd:ef:10:c9 Fc 0/0 1003 fid_1003 10:00:00:00:c9:d9:9c:cb 10:00:00:00:c9:d9:9c:cd 0e:fc:03:01:02:02 01:02:01 FDISC 5593 LOGGED_IN dcb-map— creates a DCB map to configure DCB parameters on Ethernet ports that support converged Ethernet traffic.
Usage Information Use the show qos dcb-map command to display the enhanced transmission selection (ETS) and priority-based flow control (PFC) parameters used to configure server-facing Ethernet ports. The following table describes the show qos dcb-map output shown in the example below. Example Field Description State Complete: All mandatory DCB parameters are correctly configured. In progress: The DCB map configuration is not complete. Some mandatory parameters are not configured.
Version Description 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module.
42 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) The Switch supports open shortest path first version 2 (OSPFv2) for IPv4 and version 3 (OSPFv3) for IPv6. Up to 16 OSPF instances can be run simultaneously on the Switch. OSPF is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), which means that it distributes routing information between routers in a single Autonomous System (AS). OSPF is also a link-state protocol in which all routers contain forwarding tables derived from information about their links to their neighbors.
• graceful-restart mode • graceful-restart role • ip ospf auth-change-wait-time • ip ospf authentication-key • ip ospf cost • ip ospf dead-interval • ip ospf hello-interval • ip ospf message-digest-key • ip ospf mtu-ignore • ip ospf network • ip ospf priority • ip ospf retransmit-interval • ip ospf transmit-delay • log-adjacency-changes • maximum-paths • mib-binding • network area • passive-interface • redistribute • redistribute bgp • redistribute isis • router-id
• timers spf • timers throttle lsa all • timers throttle lsa arrival • OSPFv3 Commands • area authentication • area encryption • auto-cost • clear ipv6 ospf process • debug ipv6 ospf bfd • debug ipv6 ospf • default-information originate • graceful-restart grace-period • graceful-restart mode • ipv6 ospf area • ipv6 ospf authentication • ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors • ipv6 ospf cost • ipv6 ospf dead-interval • ipv6 ospf encryption • ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reje
OSPFv2 Commands The Dell Networking implementation of OSPFv2 is based on IETF RFC 2328. area default-cost Set the metric for the summary default route the area border router (ABR) generates into the stub area. Use this command on the border routers at the edge of a stub area. Syntax area area-id default-cost cost To return default values, use the no area area-id default-cost command. Parameters area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero (0) to 65535.
To delete an NSSA, use the no area area-id nssa command. Parameters area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero (0) to 65535. no-redistribution (OPTIONAL) Specify that the redistribute command does not distribute routes into the NSSA. Only use this command in an NSSA area border router (ABR). defaultinformationoriginate (OPTIONAL) Allows external routing information to be imported into the NSSA by using Type 7 default.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Only the routes within an area are summarized, and that summary is advertised to other areas by the ABR. External routes are not summarized. Related Commands area stub — creates a stub area. router ospf — enters ROUTER OSPF mode to configure an OSPF instance.
auto-cost Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method. Syntax auto-cost [reference-bandwidth ref-bw] To return to the default bandwidth or to assign cost based on the interface type, use the no auto-cost [reference-bandwidth] command. Parameters ref-bw (OPTIONAL) Specify a reference bandwidth in megabits per second. The range is from 1 to 4294967. The default is 100 megabits per second. Defaults 100 megabits per second.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip ospf statistics Clear the packet statistics in interfaces and neighbors. Syntax Parameters clear ip ospf process-id statistics [interface name {neighbor router-id}] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, all OSPF processes are cleared.
debug ip ospf Display debug information on OSPF. Entering the debug ip ospf commands enables OSPF debugging for the first OSPF process. Syntax debug ip ospf process-id [bfd |event | packet | spf | databasetimer rate-limit] To cancel the debug command, use the no debug ip ospf command. Parameters process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, all OSPF processes are cleared. bfd (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bfd to debug only OSPF BFD information.
Field Description • 3 - link state request • 4 - link state update • 5 - link state acknowledgement l: Displays the packet length. rid: Displays the OSPF router ID. aid: Displays the Autonomous System ID. chk: Displays the OSPF checksum. aut: States if OSPF authentication is configured.
Example Field Description bdr: Displays the IP address of the Border Area Router. Dell#debug ip ospf 1 packet OSPF process 90, packet debugging is on Dell# 08:14:24 : OSPF(100:00): Xmt. v:2 t:1(HELLO) l:44 rid:192.1.1.1 aid:0.0.0.1 chk:0xa098 aut:0 auk: keyid:0 to:Gi 4/3 dst: 224.0.0.5 netmask:255.255.255.0 pri:1 N-, MC-, E+, T-, hi:10 di:40 dr:90.1.1.1 bdr:0.0.0.0 default-information originate To generate a default external route into an OSPF routing domain, configure the system.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. redistribute — redistributes routes from other routing protocols into OSPF. default-metric Change the metrics of redistributed routes to a value useful to OSPF. Use this command with the redistribute command. Syntax default-metric number To return to the default values, use the no default-metric [number] command. Parameters number Defaults Disabled.
Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip ospf asbr — displays the VLAN configuration. distance Define an administrative distance for particular routes to a specific IP address. Syntax distance weight [ip-address mask access-list-name] To delete the settings, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask accesslist-name] command.
distance ospf Configure an OSPF distance metric for different types of routes. Syntax distance ospf [external dist3] [inter-area dist2] [intra-area dist1] To delete these settings, use the no distance ospf command. Parameters Defaults external dist3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword external then a number to specify a distance for external type 5 and 7 routes. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 110.
To delete a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] command. Parameters prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History • For Port Channel groups, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
rip (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rip to specify that RIP routes are distributed. static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to specify that only manually configured routes are distributed. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description heading 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This behavior impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies. Generally, convergence level 1 meets most convergence requirements. Higher convergence levels should only be selected following consultation with Dell Networking technical support. flood-2328 Enable RFC-2328 flooding behavior. Syntax flood-2328 To disable, use the no flood-2328 command. Defaults Disabled.
graceful-restart grace-period Specifies the time duration, in seconds, that the router’s neighbors continue to advertise the router as fully adjacent regardless of the synchronization state during a graceful restart. Syntax graceful-restart grace-period seconds To disable the grace period, use the no graceful-restart grace-period command.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. graceful-restart mode Enable the graceful restart mode. Syntax graceful-restart mode [planned-only | unplanned-only] To disable graceful restart mode, use the no graceful-restart mode command. Parameters planned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords planned-only to indicate graceful restart is supported in a planned restart condition only.
role restart-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords restart-only to specify the OSPF router is a restart only during graceful-restart. Defaults By default, OSPF routers are both helper and restart routers during a graceful restart. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 to encrypt the key. key Enter an eight-character string. Strings longer than eight characters are truncated. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information All neighboring routers in the same network must use the same password to exchange OSPF information.
ip ospf dead-interval Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router. After the interval elapses, the neighboring routers declare the router dead. Syntax ip ospf dead-interval seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip ospf dead-interval command. Parameters seconds Defaults 40 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Enter the number of seconds for the interval. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 40 seconds.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The time interval between the hello packets must be the same for routers in a network. Related Commands ip ospf dead-interval — sets the time interval before a router is declared dead. ip ospf message-digest-key Enable OSPF MD5 authentication and send an OSPF message digest key on the interface.
NOTE: The MD5 secret is stored as plain text in the configuration file with service password encryption. Write down or otherwise record the key. You cannot learn the key once it is configured. Use caution when changing the key. ip ospf mtu-ignore Disable OSPF MTU mismatch detection upon receipt of database description (DBD) packets. Syntax ip ospf mtu-ignore To return to the default, use the no ip ospf mtu-ignore command. Defaults Enabled.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip ospf priority To determine the designated router for the OSPF network, set the priority of the interface. Syntax ip ospf priority number To return to the default setting, use the no ip ospf priority command. Parameters number Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Enter a number as the priority. The range is from 0 to 255. The default is 1. Version Description 9.9(0.
Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds as the interval between retransmission. The range is from 1 to 3600. The default is 5 seconds. This interval must be greater than the expected round-trip time for a packet to travel between two routers. Defaults 5 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
log-adjacency-changes To send a Syslog message about changes in the OSPF adjacency state, set the system. Syntax log-adjacency-changes To disable the Syslog messages, use the no log-adjacency-changes command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. mib-binding Enable this OSPF process ID to manage the SNMP traps and process SNMP queries. Syntax mib-binding To mib-binding on this OSPF process, use the no mib-binding command. Defaults none. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
area-id Enter the OSPF area ID as either a decimal value or in a valid IP address. Decimal value range is from 0 to 65535. IP address format is dotted decimal format A.B.C.D. NOTE: If the area ID is smaller than 65535, it is converted to a decimal value. For example, if you use an area ID of 0.0.0.1, it is converted to 1. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
• Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.19.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Although the passive interface does not send or receive routing updates, the network on that interface is still included in OSPF updates sent using other interfaces. The default keyword sets all interfaces as passive.
• May update ABR status. redistribute Redistribute information from another routing protocol throughout the OSPF process. Syntax redistribute {connected | rip | static} [metric metric-value | metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value] To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute {connected | isis | rip | static} command. Parameters connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes on interfaces is redistributed.
Related Commands default-information originate — generates a default route into the OSPF routing domain. redistribute bgp Redistribute BGP routing information throughout the OSPF instance. Syntax redistribute bgp as number [metric metric-value] | [metric-type type-value] | [tag tag-value] To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute bgp as number [metric metric-value] | [metric-type type-value] [tag tag-value] command. Parameters as number Enter the autonomous system number.
redistribute isis Redistribute IS-IS routing information throughout the OSPF instance. Syntax redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value | metric-type type-value] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value] To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute isis [tag] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value | metric-type typevalue] [route-map map-name] [tag tag-value] command. Parameters tag (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of the IS-IS routing process.
router-id To configure a fixed router ID, use this command. Syntax router-id ip-address To remove the fixed router ID, use the no router-id ip-address command. Parameters ip-address Defaults none. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the router ID in the IP address format. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
To clear an OSPF instance, use the no router ospf process-id command. Parameters process-id Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a number for the OSPF instance. The range is from 1 to 65535. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You must have an IP address assigned to an interface to enter ROUTER OSPF mode and configure OSPF.
show ip ospf Display information on the OSPF process configured on the switch. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip ospf process-id process-id • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Min LSA origination 0 msec, Min LSA arrival 1000 msec Min LSA hold time 5000 msec, Max LSA wait time 5000 msec Number of area in this router is 1, normal 1 stub 0 nssa 0 Area BACKBONE (0) Number of interface in this area is 1 SPF algorithm executed 205 times Area ranges are Dell# Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays information about the OSPF routes configured. show ip ospf interface — displays the OSPF interfaces configured. show ip ospf neighbor — displays the OSPF neighbors configured.
1.1.1.1 is in a directly connected area since the Flag is E/-/-/. For remote ASBRs, the E flag is clear (-/-/-/). Example Dell#show ip ospf 1asbr RouterID 3.3.3.3 1.1.1.1 Dell# Flags -/-/-/ E/-/-/ Cost Nexthop 2 10.0.0.2 0 0.0.0.0 Interface Area Gi 0/1 1 0 show ip ospf database Display all LSA information. If you do not enable OSPF on the switch, no output is generated.
Example Field Description Link count Displays the number of interfaces for that router. Dell>show ip ospf 1 database OSPF Router with ID (11.1.2.1) (Process ID 1) Router (Area 0.0.0.0) Link ID ADV Router Age Seq# Checksum 11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 673 0x80000005 0x707e 13.1.1.1 13.1.1.1 676 0x80000097 0x1035 192.68.135.2 192.68.135.2 1419 0x80000294 0x9cbd Link ID 10.2.3.2 10.2.4.2 Link ID 0.0.0.0 1.1.1.1 10.1.1.0 10.1.2.0 10.2.2.0 10.2.3.0 10.2.4.0 11.1.1.0 11.1.2.0 12.1.2.0 13.1.1.0 13.1.2.0 172.16.1.
adv-router ipaddress Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs • the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router and the ipaddress to display only the LSA information about that router. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Summary Asbr (Area 0.0.0.0) LS age: 1437 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Summary Asbr Link State ID: 103.1.50.1 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10 LS Seq Number: 0x8000000f Checksum: 0x8221 Length: 28 Network Mask: /0 TOS: 0 Metric: 2 LS age: 473 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Summary Asbr Link State ID: 104.1.50.1 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10 LS Seq Number: 0x80000010 Checksum: 0x4198 Length: 28 --More-Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information.
• Supported Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database external command shown in the following example. Field Description LS Age Displays the LSA’s age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router.
Example Dell#show ip ospf 1 database external OSPF Router with ID (20.20.20.5) (Process ID 1) Type-5 AS External LS age: 612 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Type-5 AS External Link State ID: 12.12.12.2 Advertising Router: 20.31.3.1 LS Seq Number: 0x80000007 Checksum: 0x4cde Length: 36 Network Mask: /32 Metrics Type: 2 TOS: 0 Metrics: 25 Forward Address: 0.0.0.0 External Route Tag: 43 LS age: 1868 Options: (No TOS-capability, DC) LS type: Type-5 AS External Link State ID: 24.216.12.
adv-router ipaddress Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs • the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs • the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router and the ipaddress to display only the LSA information about that router. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Network (Area 0.0.0.0) LS age: 1372 Options: (No TOS-capability, DC, E) LS type: Network Link State ID: 202.10.10.2 Advertising Router: 20.20.20.8 LS Seq Number: 0x80000006 Checksum: 0xa35 Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Attached Router: 20.20.20.8 Attached Router: 20.20.20.9 Attached Router: 20.20.20.7 Network (Area 0.0.0.1) LS age: 252 Options: (TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Network Link State ID: 192.10.10.2 Advertising Router: 192.10.10.
• Supported Modes Command History Related Commands EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf database opaque-area Display the opaque-area (type 10) LSA information.
Example Item Description LS Age Displays the LSA’s age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can be found in this item: • TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router can support Type of Service. • DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can support OSPF over demand circuits. • E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External LSAs.
show ip ospf database opaque-as Display the opaque-as (type 11) LSA information. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id database opaque-as [link-state-id] [advrouter ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF process ID to show a specific process. If you do not enter the process ID, the command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
Parameters process-id Enter the OSPF process ID to show a specific process. If you do not enter the process ID, the command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
• adv-router ipaddress Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege the default destination (0.0.0.0) for Type 5 LSAs (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords adv-router then the IP address of an Advertising Router to display only the LSA information about that router. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Item Description (Link Data) Identifies the router interface address. Number of TOS Metric Lists the number of TOS metrics. TOS 0 Metric Lists the number of TOS 0 metrics. Dell#show ip ospf 100 database router OSPF Router with ID (1.1.1.10) (Process ID 100) Router (Area 0) LS age: 967 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Router Link State ID: 1.1.1.10 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.
Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf database summary Display the network summary (type 3) LSA routing information. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id database summary [link-state-id] [advrouter ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF process ID to show a specific process. If you do not enter a process ID, the command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
Item Example Description • TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router can support Type of Service. • DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can support OSPF over demand circuits. • E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External LSAs. LS Type Displays the LSA type. Link State ID Displays the Link State ID. Advertising Router Identifies the router ID of the LSA’s originating router.
Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10 LS Seq Number: 0x80000016 Checksum: 0x1241 Length: 28 Network Mask: /26 TOS: 0 Metric: 1 # Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf interface Display the OSPF interfaces configured. If OSPF is not enabled on the switch, no output is generated. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip ospf process-id interface [interface] process-id Enter the OSPF process ID to show a specific process.
Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf process-id interface command shown in the following example. Example Item Description TenGigabitEthern et... This line identifies the interface type slot/port and the status of the OSPF protocol on that interface. Internet Address... This line displays the IP address, network mask and area assigned to this interface. Process ID... This line displays the OSPF Process ID, Router ID, Network type and cost metric for this interface.
192.168.0.2 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:08 Neighbor Count is 3, Adjacent neighbor count is 2 Adjacent with neighbor 192.168.253.5 (Designated Router) Adjacent with neighbor 192.168.253.3 (Backup Designated Router) Loopback 0 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 192.168.253.2/32, Area 0.0.0.1 Process ID 1, Router ID 192.168.253.2, Network Type LOOPBACK, Cost: 1 Loopback interface is treated as a stub Host.
Example Item Description Area Displays the neighbor’s area (process ID). Dell#show ip ospf 34 neighbor Neighbor ID 20.20.20.7 192.10.10.2 20.20.20.1 Dell# Pri State Dead Time Address 1 FULL/DR 00:00:32 182.10.10.3 1 FULL/DR 00:00:37 192.10.10.2 1 FULL/DROTHER00:00:36 192.10.10.4 Interface Area Gi 0/0 0.0.0.2 Gi 0/1 0.0.0.1 Gi 0/1 0.0.0.1 show ip ospf routes Display routes OSPF calculates and stores in OSPF RIB.
1.1.1.1 3.3.3.3 13.0.0.0 150.150.150.0 172.30.1.0 Dell# 1 2 1 2 2 0.0.0.0 13.0.0.3 0.0.0.0 13.0.0.3 13.0.0.3 Lo Te Te Te Te 0 0/4 0/4 0/4 0/4 0 1 0 1 Intra-Area Intra-Area Intra-Area External Intra-Area show ip ospf statistics Display OSPF statistics. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id statistics global | [interface name {neighbor router-id}] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process.
Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf statistics process-id global command shown in the following example. Row Heading Description Total Displays the total number of packets the OSPF process receives/ transmits. Error Displays the error count while receiving and transmitting packets by the OSPF process. Hello Number of OSPF Hello packets. DDiscr Number of database description packets. LSReq Number of link state request packets. LSUpd Number of link state update packets.
Example Error Type Description MD5-Error MD5 error Cksum-Err Checksum Error Version Version mismatch AreaMismatch Area mismatch Conf-Issue The received hello packet has a different hello or dead interval than the configuration. No-Buffer Buffer allocation failure. Seq-no A sequence no errors occurred during the database exchange process. Socket Socket Read/Write operation error. Q-overflow Packets dropped due to queue overflow. Unknown-Pkt Received packet is not an OSPF packet.
• The packet count received and transmitted for each neighbor • Dead timer remaining value for each neighbor • Transmit timer remaining value for each neighbor • The LSU Q length and its highest mark for each neighbor • The LSR Q length and its highest mark for each neighbor Example (Statistics) Dell#show ip ospf 10 statistics Interface TenGigabitEthernet 4/45 Error packets (Receive statistics) Intf-Down 0 Non-Dr 0 Self-Org Wrong-Len 0 Invld-Nbr 0 Nbr-State Auth-Error 0 MD5-Error 0 Cksum-Err Versi
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ip ospf 10 timers rate-limit List of LSAs in rate limit Queue LSA id: 1.1.1.0 Type: 3 Adv Rtid: 3.3.3.3 Expiry time: 00:00:09.111 LSA id: 3.3.3.3 Type: 1 Adv Rtid: 3.3.3.3 Expiry time: 00:00:23.96 Dell# show ip ospf topology Display routers in directly connected areas.
summary-address To advertise one external route, set the OSPF ASBR. Syntax summary-address ip-address mask [not-advertise] [tag tag-value] To disable summary address, use the no summary-address ip-address mask command. Parameters ip-address Specify the IP address in dotted decimal format of the address to summarize. mask Specify the mask in dotted decimal format of the address to summarize. not-advertise (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords not-advertise to suppress that match the network prefix/mask pair.
timers spf Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation. Syntax timers spf delay holdtime To return to the default, use the no timers spf command. Parameters Defaults delay Enter a number as the delay. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 5 seconds. holdtime Enter a number as the hold time. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 10 seconds.
timers throttle lsa all Configure LSA transmit intervals. Syntax timers throttle lsa all {start-interval | hold-interval | maxinterval} To return to the default, use the no timers throttle lsa command. Parameters Defaults start-interval Set the minimum interval between initial sending and resending the same LSA. The range is from 0 to 600,000 milliseconds. hold-interval Set the next interval to send the same LSA.
timers throttle lsa arrival Configure the LSA acceptance intervals. Syntax timers throttle lsa arrival arrival-time To return to the default, use the no timers throttle lsa command. Parameters arrival-time Defaults 1000 msec Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Set the interval between receiving the same LSA repeatedly, to allow sufficient time for the system to accept the LSA. The range is from 0 to 600,000 milliseconds. Version Description 9.9(0.
Parameters area area-id Area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be authenticated. For area-id, you can enter a number. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. ipsec spi number Security Policy index (SPI) value that identifies an IPsec security policy. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. MD5 | SHA1 Authentication type: Message Digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA-1). key-encryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted. The values are 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted).
The configuration of IPsec authentication on an interface-level takes precedence over an area-level configuration. If you remove an interface configuration, an area authentication policy that has been configured is applied to the interface. area encryption Configure an IPsec encryption policy for OSPFv3 packets in an OSPFv3 area.
authenticationalgorithm Specifies the authentication algorithm to use for encryption. Valid values are MD5 or SHA1. key-encryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the authentication key is encrypted. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). key Text string used in authentication. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (nonencrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (nonencrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted).
The configuration of IPsec encryption on an interface-level takes precedence over an area-level configuration. If you remove an interface configuration, an area encryption policy that has been configured is applied to the interface. auto-cost Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method.
Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)# clear ipv6 ospf process Reset an OSPFv3 router process without removing or re-configuring the process. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History clear ipv6 ospf process • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug ipv6 ospf bfd Display debug information and interface types for BFD on OSPF IPv6 packets.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following section describes the command fields. Example Lines Beginning With or Including Description OSPFv3... Debugging is on for all OSPFv3 packets and all interfaces. 05:21:01 Displays the time stamp. Sending Ver:3 Sending OSPF3 version..
debug ipv6 ospf Display debug information and interface types on OSPF IPv6 packets or events. Syntax Parameters debug ipv6 ospf {packet | events} [interface] interface Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
metric metricvalue (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number to configure a metric value for the route. The range is from 1 to 16777214. metric-type typevalue (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords metric-type then an OSPFv3 link state type of 1 or 2 for default routes. The values are: route-map mapname Defaults Disabled.
Usage Information By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA. To enable OSPFv3 graceful restart, enter the ipv6 router ospf command to enter OSPFv3 configuration mode and then configure a grace period using the gracefulrestart grace-period command.
planned restart, OSPF sends out a Type-11 Grace LSA before the system switches over to the backup RPM. • An unplanned restart occurs when an unplanned event causes the active RPM to switch to the backup RPM, such as when an active process crashes, the active RPM is removed, or a power failure happens. During an unplanned restart, OSPF sends out a Grace LSA when the backup RPM comes online. By default, both planned and unplanned restarts trigger an OSPFv3 graceful restart.
To remove null authentication on an interface to allow the interface to inherit the authentication policy configured for the OSPFv3 area, use the no ipv6 ospf authentication null command. Parameters null Causes an authentication policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface. ipsec spi number Security Policy index (SPI) value that identifies an IPsec security policy. The range is from 256 to 4294967295.
ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors Establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface or use non-default BFD session parameters. Syntax ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors [disable | [interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive}]] To disable all BFD sessions on an OSPFv3 interface implicitly, use the no ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors disable command. Parameters disable (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface.
Usage Information This command provides the flexibility to fine-tune the timer values based on individual interface needs when you configure the ipv6 ospf bfd command in CONFIGURATION mode. Any timer values specified with this command overrides timers set using the bfd all-neighbors command. Using the no form of this command does not disable BFD if you configured BFD in CONFIGURATION mode. To disable BFD on a specific interface while BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode, use the keyword disable.
ipv6 ospf dead-interval Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router. After the time interval elapses, the neighboring routers declare the router down. Syntax Parameters ipv6 ospf dead-interval seconds seconds Enter the time interval in seconds. The range is from 1 to 65535 seconds. Defaults 40 seconds (Ethernet). Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
ipsec spi number Security Policy index (SPI) value that identifies an IPsec security policy. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. esp encryptionalgorithm Encryption algorithm used with ESP. Valid values are: 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL. For AES-CBC, only the AES-128 and AES-192 ciphers are supported. key-encryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). key Text string used in authentication.
Usage Information Before you enable IPsec encryption on an OSPFv3 interface, first enable IPv6 unicast routing globally, configure an IPv6 address and enable OSPFv3 on the interface, and assign the interface to an area. An SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router. Configure the same encryption policy (same SPI and key) on each OSPFv3 interface in a link.
ipv6 ospf hello-interval Specify the time interval between the hello packets sent on the interface. Syntax Parameters ipv6 ospf hello—interval seconds seconds Enter the time interval in seconds as the time between hello packets. The range is from 1 to 65525 seconds. Defaults 10 seconds (Ethernet). Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Setting a priority of 0 makes the router ineligible for election as a Designated Router or Backup Designated Router. Use this command for interfaces connected to multi-access networks, not point-topoint networks. ipv6 router ospf Enable OSPF for IPv6 router configuration. Syntax ipv6 router ospf process-id To exit OSPF for IPv6, use the no ipv6 router ospf process-id command.
Parameters number Specify the number of paths. The range is from 1 to 64. The default is 8 paths. Defaults 4 Command Modes ROUTER OSPF for OSPFv3 Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Added support for OSPFv3. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. passive-interface Disable (suppress) sending routing updates on an interface.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Added support for OSPFv3. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information By default, no interfaces are passive. Routing updates are sent to all interfaces on which the routing protocol is enabled.
The default is 20. metric-type typevalue (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords metric-type then the OSPFv3 link state type of 1 or 2 for default routes. The values are: • 1 for a type 1 external route • 2 for a type 2 external route The default is 2. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes).
router-id Designate a fixed router ID. Syntax router-id ip-address To return to the previous router ID, use the no router-id ip-address command. Parameters ip-address Enter the router ID in the dotted decimal format. Defaults The router ID is selected automatically from the set of IPv4 addresses configured on a router. Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 for OSPFv3 Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Added support for OSPFv3.
show crypto ipsec policy Display the configuration of IPsec authentication and encryption policies. Syntax Parameters show crypto ipsec policy [name name] name name Defaults none Command Modes EXEC (OPTIONAL) Displays configuration details about a specified policy. EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port number. • For a VLAN interface, enter vlan vlan-id. The valid VLAN IDs range is from 1 to 4094. EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 command output displays security associations set up for OSPFv3 links in IPsec authentication and encryption policies on the router. show ipv6 ospf interface View OSPFv3 interface information.
Link Local Address fe80::201:e8ff:fe17:5bbd, Interface ID 67420217 Area 0, Process ID 1, Instance ID 0, Router ID 11.1.1.1 NetworkType BROADCAST, Cost: 1, Passive: No Transmit Delay is 100 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Interface is using OSPF global mode BFD configuration. Designated router on this network is 11.1.1.
timers spf Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation. Syntax timers spf delay holdtime To return to the default, use the no timers spf command. Parameters Defaults delay Enter a number as the delay. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 5 seconds. holdtime Enter a number as the hold time. The range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 10 seconds.
43 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows you to apply routing policies to specific interfaces. To enable PBR, create a redirect list and apply it to the interface. After the redirect list is applied to the interface, all traffic passing through the interface is subject to the rules defined in the redirect list. PBR is supported by the Dell Networking operating software (OS).
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip redirect-list – enables an IP Redirect List. ip redirect-group Apply a redirect list (policy-based routing) on an interface. You can apply multiple redirect lists to an interface by entering this command multiple times. Syntax ip redirect-group redirect-list-name To remove a redirect list from an interface, use the no ip redirect-group name command.
NOTE: Apply the redirect list to physical, VLAN, or LAG interfaces only. Related Commands • show cam pbr – displays the content of the PBR CAM. • show ip redirect-list – displays the redirect-list configuration. ip redirect-list Configure a redirect list and enter REDIRECT-LIST mode. Syntax ip redirect-list redirect-list-name To remove a redirect list, use the no ip redirect-list command.
• Parameters You can also use the no permit {ip-protocol-number | protocol-type} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operators] command. ip-protocolnumber Enter a number from 0 to 255 for the protocol identified in the IP protocol header.
Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series. 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series TeraScale. 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. redirect Configure a rule for the redirect list.
bit tcp for transmission control protocol • udp for user datagram protocol (OPTIONAL) For the TCP protocol type only, enter one or a combination of the following TCP flags: • ack = acknowledgement • fin = finish (no more data from the user) • psh = push function • rst = reset the connection • syn = synchronize sequence number • urg = urgent field source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x).
Version Description 8.4.2.0 Introduced on the E-Series TeraScale. seq Configure a filter with an assigned sequence number for the redirect list.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
Version Description 9.7(0.0) Added support for thetrack-id on the MXL. 9.4(0.0) Added support for removing the Sonet interface on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show cam pbr Displaysthe PBR CAM content. Syntax Parameters show cam pbr {[interface interface] | stack—unit slot-number portset number]} [summary] interface interface Enter the keyword interface then the name of the interface. stack–unit number Enter the keyword stack-unit then the slot number. The range is from 0 to 11 .
00:01:e8:8a:fd:76 Po 128 00004 5 N/A IP 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 00:01:e8:8a:fd:76 Vl 1020(Po 100) Dell# Related Commands 0.0.0.0/0 • ip redirect-group – applies a redirect group to an interface. • show ip redirect-list – displays the redirect-list configuration. • show cam-usage – displays the CAM usage on ACL, router, or switch. show ip redirect-list View the redirect list configuration and the interfaces it is applied to.
200 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 2/11) , Track Policy-based Routing (PBR) 1188
44 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) The protocol-independent multicast (PIM) commands are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS).
• ipv6 pim bsr-border • ipv6 pim bsr-candidate • ipv6 pim dr-priority • ipv6 pim join-filter • ipv6 pim query-interval • ipv6 pim neighbor-filter • ipv6 pim register-filter • ipv6 pim rp-address • ipv6 pim rp-candidate • ipv6 pim sparse-mode • ipv6 pim spt-threshold • show ipv6 pim bsr-router • show ipv6 pim interface • show ipv6 pim neighbor • show ipv6 pim rp • show ipv6 pim tib IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands The following describes the IPv4 PIM-sparse mode (PIM-SM) commands
clear ip pim tib Clear PIM tree information from the PIM database. Syntax Parameters clear ip pim tib [group] group Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
group (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword group to view PIM messages for a specific group. packet [in | out] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword packet to view PIM packets. Enter one of the optional parameters: in: to view incoming packets • out: to view outgoing packets register (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword register to view PIM register address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). state (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword state to view PIM state changes.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is applied to the subsequent PIM-BSR. Existing BSR advertisements are cleaned up by time-out. To clean the candidate RP advertisements, use the clear ip pim rp-mapping command. ip pim bsr-candidate To join the Bootstrap election process, configure the PIM router.
ip pim dr-priority Change the designated router (DR) priority for the interface. Syntax ip pim dr-priority priority-value To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ip pim dr-priority command. Parameters priority-value Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number. The range is from 0 to 4294967294. The default is 1. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell(conf)# ip access-list extended iptv-channels Dell(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip 10.1.2.3/24 225.1.1.0/24 Dell(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip any 232.1.1.0/24 Dell(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip 100.1.1.
ip pim neighbor-filter To prevent a router from participating in protocol independent multicast (PIM), configure this feature. Syntax ip pim neighbor-filter {access-list} To remove the restriction, use the no ip pim neighbor-filter {access-list} command. Parameters access-list Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Enter the name of a standard access list. Maximum 16 characters. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip pim register-filter To prevent a PIM source DR from sending register packets to an RP for the specified multicast source and group, use this feature. Syntax ip pim register-filter access-list To return to the default, use the no ip pim register-filter access-list command. Parameters access-list Defaults Not configured.
Parameters address Enter the RP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). group-address group-address mask Enter the keywords group-address then a group-address mask, in dotted decimal format (/xx), to assign that group address to the RP. override Enter the keyword override to override the BSR updates with static RP. The override takes effect immediately during enable/ disable. NOTE: This option is applicable to multicast group range. Defaults Not configured.
• priority Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. (OPTIONAL) Enter the priority used in Bootstrap election process. The range is zero (0) to 255. The default is 192. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer Enable expiry timers globally for all sources, or for a specific set of (S,G) pairs an access list defines. Syntax ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds [access-list name] To disable configured timers and return to default mode, use the no ip pim sparsemode sg-expiry-timer command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds the S, G entries are retained. The range is from 211 to 86400.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is applicable to last hop routers on the shared tree towards the rendezvous point (RP). no ip pim snooping dr-flood Disable the flooding of multicast packets to the PIM designated router.
• Related Commands Multicast traffic for an unknown group is sent on the port towards the PIM DR. When DR flooding is disabled, multicast traffic for an unknown group is dropped. ip pim sparse-mode — enables PIM-SM snooping. show ip pim bsr-router View information on the Bootstrap router. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip pim bsr-router • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip pim interface command shown in the following example. Example Field Description Address Lists the IP addresses of the interfaces participating in PIM. Interface List the interface type, with either slot/port information or ID (VLAN or Port Channel), of the interfaces participating in PIM.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip pim neighbor command shown in the following example. Field Description Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the PIM neighbor.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example mapping (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mapping to display the multicast groups-to-RP mapping and information on how RP is learnt. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address mask in dotted decimal format to view RP for a specific group. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History vlan vlan-id • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter a VLAN ID to display information about a specified VLAN configured for PIM-SM snooping. The valid VLAN IDs range is from 1 to 4094. Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip pim snooping interface commands shown in the following example.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History vlan vlan-id • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter a VLAN ID to display information about PIM neighbors that PIM-SM snooping discovered on a specified VLAN. The valid VLAN IDs range is from 1 to 4094. Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show ip pim snooping tib Display information from the tree information base (TIB) PIM-SM snooping discovered about multicast group members and states. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip pim snooping tib [vlan vlan-id] [group-address [sourceaddress]] vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a VLAN ID to display TIB information PIM-SM snooping discovered on a specified VLAN. The valid VLAN IDs range is from 1 to 4094.
Field Example Description • L = local to the multicast group • P = route was pruned • R = the forwarding entry is pointing toward the RP • F = Dell Networking OS is registering this entry for a multicast source • T = packets were received via Shortest Tree Path • J = first packet from the last hop router is received and the entry is ready to switch to SPT • K=acknowledge pending state Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) interface towards the RP/ source.
show ip pim summary View information about PIM-SM operation. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip pim summary • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
0/0 pim-assert messages sent/received 0/0 register messages sent/received Memory usage: TIB Nexthop cache Interface table Neighbor table RP Mapping : : : : : 3768 bytes 0 bytes 992 bytes 528 bytes 0 bytes show ip pim tib View the PIM tree information base (TIB). Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip pim tib [group-address [source-address]] group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
Field Example Description • S = PIM Sparse Mode • C = directly connected • L = local to the multicast group • P = route was pruned • R = the forwarding entry is pointing toward the RP • F = Dell Networking OS is registering this entry for a multicast source • T = packets were received via Shortest Tree Path • J = first packet from the last hop router is received and the entry is ready to switch to SPT • K = acknowledge pending state Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwardin
(*, 226.1.1.4), uptime 00:18:08, expires 00:00:52, RP 10.211.2.1, flags: SCJ Incoming interface: TenGigabitEthernet 1/2, RPF neighbor 10.211.1.2 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 0/8 show running-config pim Display the current configuration of PIM-SM snooping. Syntax show running-config pim Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is applied to the subsequent PIM-BSR messages. Existing BSR advertisements are cleaned up by time-out. ipv6 pim bsr-candidate Configure the router as a bootstrap (BSR) candidate.
ipv6 pim dr-priority Change the designated router (DR) priority for the IPv6 interface. Syntax ipv6 pim dr-priority priority-value To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ipv6 pim dr-priority command. Parameters priority-value Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number. The range is from 0 to 4294967294. The default is 1. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Supported Modes Command History Example Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
ipv6 pim neighbor-filter Prevent the system from forming a PIM adjacency with a neighboring system. Syntax Parameters ipv6 pim neighbor-filter {access-list} access-list Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History Enter the name of a standard access list. Maximum 16 characters. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Dell(conf)#ipv6 pim register-filter REG-FIL_ACL Dell(conf)#ipv6 access-list REG-FIL_ACL Dell(conf-ipv6-acl)#deny ipv6 165:87:34::10/128 ff0e:: 225:1:2:0/112 Dell(conf-ipv6-acl)#permit ipv6 any any Dell(conf-ipv6-acl)#exit ipv6 pim rp-address Configure a static PIM rendezvous point (RP) address for a group. First-hop routers use this address to send register packets on behalf of the source multicast host.
Usage Information The RP addresses are stored in the order in which they are entered. RP addresses learned via BSR take priority over static RP addresses. Without the override option, the BSR-advertised RPs updates take precedence over the statically configured RPs. ipv6 pim rp-candidate Specify an interface as an RP candidate.
ipv6 pim sparse-mode Enable IPv6 PIM sparse mode on the interface. Syntax ipv6 pim sparse-mode To disable IPv6 PIM sparse mode, use the no ipv6 pim sparse-mode command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Enable the interface (use the no shutdown command) and not have the switchport command configured.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information PIM leaf routers join the shortest path tree immediately after the first packet arrives from a new source. show ipv6 pim bsr-router View information on the Bootstrap router (v2). Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ipv6 pim bsr-router • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.
• Supported Modes Command History Example EXEC Privilege Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ipv6 pim interface Interface Ver/ Nbr Query DR Mode Count Intvl Prio Te 0/3 v2/S 1 30 1 Address : fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:140f DR : this router Te 0/1 v2/S 0 30 1 Address : fe80::201:e8ff:fe02:1417 DR : this router Dell# show ipv6 pim neighbor Displays IPv6 PIM neighbor information.
show ipv6 pim rp View all multicast groups-to-RP mappings. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ipv6 pim rp [mapping | group-address] mapping (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword mapping to display the multicast groups-to-RP mapping and information on how RP is learnt. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address mask in dotted decimal format to view RP for a specific group. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.
show ipv6 pim tib View the IPv6 PIM multicast-routing database (tree information base — tib). Syntax Parameters show ipv6 pim tib [group-address [source-address]] group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in the x:x:x:x::x format to view RP mappings for a specific group. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. source-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero.
TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 (25::2, ff0e::225:1:2:2), uptime 00:09:54, expires 00:00:00,flags: CJ RPF neighbor: TenGigabitEthernet 0/3, fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 (25::1, ff0e::226:1:2:1), uptime 00:09:54, expires 00:00:00,flags: CJ RPF neighbor: TenGigabitEthernet 0/3, fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 Dell# PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) 1225
45 Port Monitoring The port monitoring feature allows you to monitor network traffic by forwarding a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port to another port. Important Points to Remember • Port monitoring is supported on physical ports only. Port-channel interfaces and virtual local area networks (VLANs), are not supported. • The monitoring (destination, “MG”) and monitored (source, “MD”) ports must be on the same switch.
• show config • show monitor session • show running-config monitor session • source (port monitoring) description Enter a description of this monitoring session. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters description Enter a description regarding this session (80 characters maximum).
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for the RPM/ERPM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information To monitor traffic with particular flows the interface, appropriate ACLs has be applied in ingress direction. Flow- based is not supported in the tx direction.
Related Commands monitor session — enables a monitoring session. show monitor session — displays the monitor session. monitor session Create a session for monitoring traffic with port monitoring. Syntax monitor session session-ID To delete a session, use the no monitor session session-ID command. To delete all monitor sessions, use the no monitor session all command.
Command Modes MONITOR SESSION (conf-mon-sess-session-ID) Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Dell(conf-mon-sess-5)#show config ! monitor session 5 source TenGigabitEthernet 0/4 destination TenGigabitEthernet 0/7 direction rx Dell(conf-mon-sess-5)# show monitor session Display the monitor information of a particular session or all sessions.
Related Commands monitor session — creates a session for monitoring. show running-config monitor session Displays the running configuration of all monitor sessions or a specific session. Syntax show running-config monitor session {session-ID} To display the running configuration for all monitor sessions, use the show runningconfig monitor session command.
source (port monitoring) Configure a port monitor source. Syntax source interface destination interface direction {rx | tx | both} To disable a monitor source, use the no source interface destination interface direction {rx | tx | both} command. Parameters interface Enter the one of the following keywords and slot/port information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
46 Private VLAN (PVLAN) Private VLANs extend the Dell Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same private VLAN. A private VLAN partitions a traditional VLAN into subdomains identified by a primary and secondary VLAN pair. The Dell Networking OS private VLAN implementation is based on RFC 3069. For more information, refer to the following commands. The command output is augmented in the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.
• Isolated port: An isolated port is a port that, in Layer 2, can only communicate with promiscuous ports that are in the same PVLAN. • Promiscuous port: A promiscuous port is a port that is allowed to communicate with any other port type. • Trunk port: A trunk port carries VLAN traffic across switches: • A trunk port in a PVLAN is always tagged. • A trunk port in Tagged mode carries primary or secondary VLAN traffic. The tag on the packet helps identify the VLAN to which the packet belongs.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. private-vlan mode — sets the mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary. private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan — maps secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN. show arp — displays the ARP table. show interfaces private-vlan — displays the type and status of the PVLAN interfaces. show vlan private-vlan — displays the PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN.
Related Commands • Specified with this command even before they have been created. • Amended by specifying the new secondary VLAN to be added to the list. private-vlan mode — sets the mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary. show interfaces private-vlan — displays the type and status of the PVLAN interfaces. show vlan private-vlan — displays the PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN. show vlan private-vlan mapping — displays the primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
• mode ode to community or isolated even before associating it to a primary VLAN. This secondary VLAN continues to work normally as a normal VLAN even though it is not associated to a primary VLAN. (A syslog message indicates this.) • must not have a port in it when VLAN mode is being set. Only ports (and port channels) configured as promiscuous, host, or PVLAN trunk ports (as previously described) can be added to the PVLAN. No other regular ports can be added to the PVLAN.
Usage Information This command has two types of display — a list of all PVLAN interfaces or for a specific interface. Examples of both types of output are shown below. The following describes the show interfaces private-vlan command shown in the following examples. Example (All) Field Description Interface Displays the type of interface and associated slot and port number. Vlan Displays the VLAN ID of the designated interface.
Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History community (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword community to display VLANs configured as community VLANs, along with their interfaces. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface to display VLANs configured as community VLANs, along with their interfaces. isolated (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword isolated to display VLANs configured as isolated VLANs, along with their interfaces.
Example (All) Dell# show vlan private-vlan Primary Secondary Type Active ------- --------- --------- -----10 primary Yes 100 isolated Yes 101 community Yes 20 primary Yes 200 201 202 isolated Yes community No community Yes Ports ----------Gi 2/1,3 Gi 2/2 Gi 2/10 Po 10, 12-13 Gi 3/1 Gi 3/2,4-6 Gi 3/11-12 Example (Primary) Dell# show vlan private-vlan primary Primary Secondary Type Active Ports ------- --------- --------- ------ ------10 primary Yes Gi 2/1,3 20 primary Yes Gi 3/1,3 Example (Isolated) D
Related Commands private-vlan mode — sets the mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary. show interfaces private-vlan — displays type and status of PVLAN interfaces. show vlan private-vlan mapping — displays the primary-secondary VLAN mapping. switchport mode private-vlan — sets PVLAN mode of the selected port. show vlan private-vlan mapping Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
switchport mode private-vlan Set PVLAN mode of the selected port. Syntax [no] switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous | trunk} To remove PVLAN mode from the selected port, use the no switchport mode private-vlan command. Parameters host Enter the keyword host to configure the selected port or port channel as an isolated interface in a PVLAN. promiscuous Enter the keyword promiscuous to configure the selected port or port channel as an promiscuous interface.
private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan — sets the mode of the selected VLAN to primary and then associates the secondary VLANs to it. show interfaces private-vlan — displays type and status of PVLAN interfaces. show vlan private-vlan mapping — displays the primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
47 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST +) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation of per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning tree protocol, but it creates a separate spanning tree for each VLAN configured. NOTE: For easier command line entry, the plus (+) sign is not used at the command line.
Command Modes SPANNING TREE PVST+ (The prompt is “config-pvst”.) Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Disable PVST+ globally. Syntax disable To enable PVST+, use the no disable command. Defaults Disabled.
Supported Modes Command History Full—Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. extend system-id To augment the Bridge ID with a VLAN ID so that PVST+ differentiate between BPDUs for each VLAN, use extend system ID. If the VLAN receives a BPDU meant for another VLAN, PVST+ does not detect a loop, and both ports can remain in Forwarding state.
Po 23 Desg 128.24 128 1600 FWD 0 No Te 0/9 Dis 128.450 128 2000 DIS 0 No Te 0/10 Desg 128.459 128 2000 FWD 0 No Related Commands P2P No P2P No P2P No protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. protocol spanning-tree pvst To enable PVST+ on a device, enter the PVST+ mode. Syntax protocol spanning-tree pvst To disable PVST+, use the disable command. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.
show spanning-tree pvst View the Per-VLAN spanning tree configuration. Syntax Parameters show spanning-tree pvst [vlan vlan-id] [brief] [guard] vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is 1 to 4094. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the PVST+ configuration information.
Field Description Bpdu Filter Yes - Bpdu filter Enabled No - Bpdu filter Disabled Example (Brief) Dell# show spanning-tree pvst vlan 2 brief VLAN 2 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32768, Address 001e.c9f1.00f3 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 001e.c9f1.
Port 459 (TenGigabitEthernet 0/5) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 2000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.459 Designated root has priority 32768, address 001e.c9f1.00:f3 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 001e.c9f1.00:f3 Designated port id is 128.
spanning-tree pvst Configure a PVST+ interface with one of these settings: edge port with optional bridge port data unit (BPDU) guard, port disablement if an error condition occurs, port priority or cost for a VLAN range, loop guard, or root guard.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The BPDU guard option prevents the port from participating in an active STP topology in case a BPDU appears on a port unintentionally, or is misconfigured, or is subject to a DOS attack.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Some non-Dell Networking systems which have hybrid ports participating in PVST+ transmit two kinds of BPDUs: an 802.1D BPDU and an untagged PVST+ BPDU. Dell Networking systems do not expect PVST+ BPDU on an untagged port. If this happens, the system places the port in the Error-Disable state. This behavior might result in the network not converging.
vlan bridge-priority Set the PVST+ bridge-priority for a VLAN or a set of VLANs. Syntax vlan vlan-id bridge-priority value To return to the default value, use the no vlan bridge-priority command. Parameters vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN numbers. The range is from 1 to 4094. bridge-priority value Enter the keywords bridge-priority then the bridge priority value in increments of 4096. The range is from 0 to 61440. The default is 32768.
Parameters vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN numbers. The range is from 1 to 4094. forward-delay seconds Enter the keywords forward-delay then the time interval, in seconds, that the system waits before transitioning PVST+ to the forwarding state. The range is from 4 to 30 seconds. The default is 15 seconds. Defaults 15 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst) Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. vlan bridge-priority — sets the bridge-priority value. vlan forward-delay — changes the time interval before the system transitions to the forwarding state. vlan max-age — changes the time interval before PVST+ refreshes. show spanning-tree pvst — displays the PVST+ configuration.
vlan hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. show spanning-tree pvst — displays the PVST+ configuration.
48 Quality of Service (QoS) The Dell Networking operating software commands for quality of service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control. QoS commands are not universally supported on all Dell Networking Products. Global Configuration Commands There are only two global configuration QoS commands. qos-rate-adjust By default, while rate limiting, policing, and shaping, the system does not include the Preamble, SFD, or the IFG fields.
service-class dot1p-mapping Configure a service-class criterion based on a dot1p value. Syntax Parameters Defaults service-class dot1p-mapping {dot1p0 value | dot1p1 value | dot1p2 queue | dot1p3 value | dot1p4 value| dot1p5 value | dot1p6 value | dot1p7 value} value Enter a dot1p list number and value. The list number range is from 0 to 7. The range is from 0 to 3.
Per-Port QoS Commands Per-port QoS (port-based QoS) allows you to define the QoS configuration on a per-physical-port basis. dot1p-priority Assign a value to the IEEE 802.1p bits on the traffic this interface receives. Syntax dot1p-priority priority-value To delete the IEEE 802.1p configuration on the interface, use the no dot1p-priority command. Parameters priority-value Enter a value from 0 to 7.
Usage Information The dot1p-priority command changes the priority of incoming traffic on the interface. The system places traffic marked with a priority in the correct queue and processes that traffic according to its queue. When you set the priority for a port channel, the physical interfaces assigned to the port channel are configured with the same value. You cannot assign the dot1p-priority command to individual interfaces in a port channel.
interface, you can configure three rate police commands specifying different VLANS. For each physical interface, you can configure three rate police commands specifying different VLANs. Related Commands rate-police — specifies traffic policing on the selected interface. rate-shape Shape the traffic output on the selected interface. Syntax Parameters rate shape [kbps] rate [burst-KB] kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps).
service-class dynamic dot1p Honor all 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on an interface (from INTERFACE mode) or on all interfaces (from CONFIGURATION mode). A CONFIGURATION mode entry supersedes an INTERFACE mode entry. Syntax service-class dynamic dot1p To return to the default setting, use the no service-class dynamic dot1p command. Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable the service-class dynamic dot1p command.
You can apply this command on both physical interfaces and port channels. When you set the service-class dynamic for a port channel, the physical interfaces assigned to the port channel are automatically configured; you cannot assign the service-class dynamic command to individual interfaces in a port channel. • All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable the service-class dynamic dot1p command on an interface or globally.
strict-priority unicast Configure a unicast queue as a strict-priority (SP) queue. Syntax Parameters strict-priority unicast queue number unicast number Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword unicast then the queue number. The range is from 1 to 3. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
bandwidth-percentage Assign a percentage of weight to the class/queue. Syntax bandwidth-percentage percentage To remove the bandwidth percentage, use the no bandwidth-percentage command. Parameters percentage Enter the percentage assignment of weight to the class/queue. The range is from 1 to 100% (granularity 1%). Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-out) Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full-Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
the packets must meet all the match criteria in order to be a member of the class. match-any Determines how packets are evaluated when multiple match criteria exist. Enter the keywords match-any to determine that the packets must meet at least one of the match criteria in order to be a member of the class. class-map-name Enter a name of the class for the class map in a character format (32 character maximum). layer2 Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map. The default is Layer 3.
show qos class-map — views the current class map information. clear qos statistics Clears matched packets. Syntax Parameters clear qos statistics interface-name interface-name Enter one of the following keywords: • Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.
match ip access-group Configure match criteria for a class map, based on the access control list (ACL). Syntax match ip access-group access-group-name [set-ip-dscp value] To remove ACL match criteria from a class map, use the no match ip accessgroup access-group-name [set-ip-dscp value] command. Parameters access-groupname Enter the ACL name whose contents are used as the match criteria in determining if packets belong to the class the classmap specifies.
Parameters vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan and then the ID of the VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. Defaults none Command Modes CONF-CLASS-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL switch. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. Use this command to match an IP class-map against a single VRF ID . Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. description Add a description to the selected policy map or QoS policy.
match ip dscp Use a differentiated services code point (DSCP) value as a match criteria. Syntax match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} dscp dscp-list [set-ip-dscp value] To remove a DSCP value as a match criteria, use the no match {ip | ipv6 | ipany} dscp dscp-list [[multicast] set-ip-dscp value] command. Parameters ip Enter the keyword ip to support IPv4 traffic. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to support IPv6 traffic ip-any Enter the keyword ip-any to support IPv4 and IPv6 traffic.
Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. match ip precedence Use IP precedence values as a match criteria. Syntax match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} precedence ip-precedence-list [set-ipdscp value] To remove IP precedence as a match criteria, use the no match {ip | ipv6 | ipany} precedence ip-precedence-list [[multicast] set-ip-dscp value] command. Parameters ip Enter the keyword ip to support IPv4 traffic. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to support IPv6 traffic.
Up to eight precedence values can be matched in one match statement. For example, to indicate the IP precedence values 0 1 2 3, enter either the match ip precedence 0-3 or match ip precedence 0,1,2,3 command. NOTE: Only one of the IP precedence values must be a successful match criterion, not all of the specified IP precedence values must match. Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. match mac vlan Configure a match criterion for a class map based on VLAN ID.
Parameters qos-policy-name Enter the name of the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum). Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (policy-map-input and policy-map-output) Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
layer2 Defaults Layer 3 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map. The default is Layer 3. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The input policy map is used to classify incoming traffic to different flows using classmap, QoS policy, or incoming packets DSCP.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To assign traffic to different flows using QoS policy, use the Output Policy map. This command enables Policy-Map-Output Configuration mode (conf-policy-map-out). Related Commands service-queue — assigns a class map and QoS policy to different queues.
When changing a Service-Queue configuration in a QoS policy map, all QoS rules are deleted and re-added automatically to ensure that the order of the rules is maintained. As a result, the Matched Packets value shown in the show qos statistics command is reset. Related Commands rate police — incoming traffic policing function. qos-policy-output Create a QoS output policy. Syntax qos-policy-output qos-policy-name To remove an existing output QoS policy, use the no qos-policy-output qospolicy-name command.
rate police Police the incoming traffic rate on the selected interface. Syntax Parameters rate police [kbps] committed-rate [burst-KB] [peak [kbps] peakrate [burst-KB]] kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). Make the following value a multiple of 64. The range is from 0 to 40000000. The default granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps). committed-rate Enter the bandwidth in Mbps. The range is from 0 to 10000. burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter the burst size in KB.
range is from 0 to 40000000. The default granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps). rate Enter the outgoing rate in multiples of 10 Mbps. The range is from 10 to 10000. burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter the burst size in KB. The range is from 0 to 10000. The default is 50. Defaults Granularity for rate is Mbps unless you use the kbps option. Command Modes QOS-POLICY-OUT Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can attach a single policy-map to one or more interfaces to specify the servicepolicy for those interfaces. A policy map attached to an interface can be modified. NOTE: The service-policy commands are not allowed on a port channel. The service-policy input policy-map-name command and the serviceclass dynamic dot1p command are not allowed simultaneously on an interface.
service-queue Assign a class map and QoS policy to different queues. Syntax service-queue queue-id [class-map class-map-name] [qos-policy qospolicy-name] To remove the queue assignment, use the no service-queue queue-id [classmap class-map-name] [qos-policy qos-policy-name] command. Parameters queue-id Enter the value used to identify a queue. The range is from 0 to 3 (four queues per interface; four queues are reserved for control traffic).
set Mark outgoing traffic with a differentiated service code point (DSCP) or dot1p value. Syntax Parameters set {ip-dscp value | mac-dot1p value} ip-dscp value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ip-dscp then the IP DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. mac-dot1p value Enter the keywords mac-dot1p then the dot1p value. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-in) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Example Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show qos class-map Class-map match-any CM Match ip access-group ACL Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. show qos dcb-map Display the DCB parameters configured in a specified DCB map. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show qos dcb-map map-name map-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Displays the PFC and ETS parameters configured in the specified map.
Example Field Description TSA Transmission scheduling algorithm used by the priority group: Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS). BW Percentage of bandwidth allocated to the priority group. PFC PFC setting for the priority group: On (enabled) or Off. Priorities 802.1p priorities configured in the priority group.
Supported Modes Command History Example (IPv4) Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show qos policy-map-input Policy-map-input PolicyMapInput Aggregate Qos-policy-name AggPolicyIn Queue# Class-map-name Qos-policy-name 0 ClassMap1 qosPolicyInput Dell# show qos qos-policy-output View the output QoS policy details.
show qos qos-policy-input View the input QoS policy details. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show qos qos-policy-input [qos-policy-name] qos-policy-name Enter the QoS policy name. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show qos qos-policy-output Qos-policy-output qmap_out Bandwidth-percentage 10 Qos-policy-output qmap_wg Rate-shape 100 50 Wred yellow wy Wred green wg Dell# show qos statistics View QoS statistics.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.8(0.0) Added the egress-queue keyword. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show qos statistics Interface Te 0/2 Queue# Matched Pkts 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 Dell# show qos wred-profile View the WRED profile details.
test cam-usage Checks the Input Policy Map configuration for the CAM usage. Syntax Parameters test cam-usage service-policy input policy-map stack-unit {[number | [all]} policy-map Enter the policy map name. stack-unit number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stackunit number. stack-unit all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords stack-unit all all to indicate all the stack-units. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Field Description Estimated CAM per Port Indicates the number of free CAM entries required (for the classification rules) to apply the input policy map on a single interface. NOTE: The CAM entries for the default rule are not included in this column; a CAM entry for the default rule is always dedicated to a port and is always available for that interface.
fallback Enter the keyword fallback to classify packets according to their DSCP value as a secondary option in case no match occurs against the configured class maps. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-policy-map-in) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
To remove the WRED drop precedence, use the no wred {yellow | green} [profile-name] command. Parameters yellow | green Enter the keyword yellow for yellow traffic. A DSCP value of xxx110 and xxx101 maps to yellow. Enter the keyword green for green traffic. A DSCP value of xxx0xx maps to green. profile-name Enter your WRED profile name in character format (16 character maximum). Or use one of the five pre-defined WRED profile names.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-qos-policy-out) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820t. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.
Parameters wred-profilename Enter your WRED profile name in character format (16 character maximum). Or use one of the pre-defined WRED profile names. You can configure up to 26 WRED profiles plus the five predefined profiles, for a total of 31 WRED profiles. Pre-defined Profiles: wred_drop, wred-ge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_g. Defaults The five pre-defined WRED profiles. When you configure a new profile, the minimum and maximum threshold defaults to predefined wred_ge_g values.
Defaults None Command Modes CONFIG-COLOR-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL.
Parameters map-name Enter the name of the DSCP color map. The map name can have a maximum of 32 characters. Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.
Defaults None Command Modes CONFIG-INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. Version 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL.
The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. Example Related Commands show qos dscp-color-map — displays DSCP color maps show qos dscp-color-map Display the DSCP color map for one or all interfaces. Syntax Parameters show qos dscp-color-map map-name map-name Enter the name of the color map.
Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 Related Commands show qos dscp-color-policy — displays a DSCP Color Policy Configuration show qos dot1p-queue-mapping View dot1p to queue mapping. Syntax show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Defaults none Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information When you configure trust, matched bytes/packets counters are not incremented in the show qos statistics command. Dynamic mapping honors packets marked according to the standard definitions of DSCP. The following lists the default mapping. Table 3.
49 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Routing information protocol (RIP) is a distance vector routing protocol. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports both RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2). The implementation of RIP is based on IETF RFCs 2453 and RFC 1058. For more information about configuring RIP, refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
auto-summary Restore the default behavior of automatic summarization of subnet routes into network routes. This command applies only to RIP version 2. Syntax auto-summary To send sub-prefix routing information, use the no auto-summary command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
debug ip rip Examine RIP routing information for troubleshooting. Syntax debug ip rip [interface | database | events [interface] | packet [interface] | trigger] To turn off debugging output, use the no debug ip rip command. Parameters interface • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
To return to the default values, use the no default-information originate command. Parameters always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to enable the switch software to always advertise the default route. metric metricvalue (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number as the metric value. The range is from 1 to 16. The default is 1. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route-map. Defaults Disabled. Metric: 1.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command ensures that route information being redistributed is converted to the same metric value. Related Commands redistribute — allows you to redistribute routes learned by other methods. description Enter a description of the RIP routing protocol. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.
Parameters weight Enter a number from 1 to 255 for the weight (for prioritization). The default is 120. ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), of the host or network to receive the new distance metric. mask If you enter an IP address, also enter a mask for that IP address, in either dotted decimal format or /prefix format (/x). prefix-name (OPTIONAL) Enter a configured prefix list name.
Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip prefix-list — enters PREFIX-LIST mode and configures a prefix list. distribute-list out Configure a filter for outgoing routing updates.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip prefix-list — enters PREFIX-LIST mode and configures a prefix list. ip poison-reverse Set the prefix of the RIP routing updates to the RIP infinity value. Syntax ip poison-reverse To disable poison reverse, use the no ip poison-reverse command. Defaults Disabled.
Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you want the interface to receive both versions of RIP, use the ip rip receive version 1 2 command. Related Commands ip rip send version — sets the RIP version for sending RIP traffic on an interface. version — sets the RIP version the switch software uses.
ip split-horizon Enable split-horizon for RIP data on the interface. As described in RFC 2453, the split-horizon scheme prevents any routes learned over a specific interface to be sent back out that interface. Syntax ip split-horizon To disable split-horizon, use the no ip split-horizon command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Usage Information RIP supports a maximum of 16 ECMP paths. neighbor Define a neighbor router with which to exchange RIP information. Syntax neighbor ip-address To delete a neighbor setting, use the no neighbor ip-address command. Parameters ip-address Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format, of a router with which to exchange information. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM.
Parameters ip-address Specify an IP network address in dotted decimal format. You cannot specify a subnet. Defaults No RIP network is configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can enable an unlimited number of RIP networks. RIP operates over interfaces configured with any address the network command specifies.
Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When the offset metric is applied to an interface, that value takes precedence over an offset value that is not extended to an interface. Related Commands ip prefix-list — enters PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list.
To delete a passive interface, use the no passive-interface interface command. Parameters interface Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the following information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command. Related Commands default-information originate — generates a default route for RIP traffic. redistribute ospf Redistribute routing information from an OSPF process.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. router rip To configure and enable RIP, enter ROUTER RIP mode. Syntax router rip To disable RIP, use the no router rip command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 172.31.0.0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 Dell(conf-router_rip)# show ip rip database Display the routes that RIP learns. If the switch learned no RIP routes, no output is generated.
Example Field Description 209.9.16.0/24... Lists the routes and the sources advertising those routes. Dell#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 1624 204.250.54.0/24 [50/1] via 192.14.1.3, 00:00:12, TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 204.250.54.0/24 auto-summary 203.250.49.0/24 [50/1] via 192.13.1.3, 00:00:12, TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 203.250.49.0/24 auto-summary 210.250.40.0/24 [50/2] via 1.1.18.2, 00:00:14, Vlan 18 [50/2] via 1.1.130.2, 00:00:12, Port-channel 30 210.250.40.
redistribute ospf 999 version 2 timers basic Manipulate the RIP timers for routing updates, invalid, holddown times, and flush time. Syntax timers basic update invalid holddown flush To return to the default settings, use the no timers basic command. Parameters Defaults update Enter the number of seconds to specify the rate at which RIP routing updates are sent. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. The default is 30 seconds.
Usage Information If you change the timers on one router, also synchronize the timers on all routers in the RIP domain. version Specify either RIP version 1 or RIP version 2. Syntax version {1 | 2} To return to the default version setting, use the no version command. Parameters 1 Enter the keyword 1 to specify RIP version 1. 2 Enter the keyword 2 to specify RIP version 2. Defaults The system sends RIPv1 and receives RIPv1 and RIPv2.
50 Remote Monitoring (RMON) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) remote monitoring (RMON) is based on IEEE standards, providing both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring and long-term statistics collection.
rmon alarm Set an alarm on any MIB object. Syntax rmon alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} risingthreshold value event-number falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] To disable the alarm, use the no rmon alarm number command. Parameters number Enter the alarm integer number from 1 to 65535. The value must be unique in the RMON alarm table. variable Enter the MIB object to monitor. The variable must be in the SNMP OID format; for example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. rmon collection history Enable the RMON MIB history group of statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner name] [buckets number] [interval seconds] To remove a specified RMON history group of statistics collection, use the no rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} command.
rmon collection statistics Enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} [owner name] To remove RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the no rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} command. Parameters controlEntry integer Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value. Then enter an integer value from 1 to 65535 that identifies the RMON Statistic Table.
trap community (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword trap then an SNMP community string to configure the eventType setting in the RMON MIB. This keyword sets either snmp-trap or log-and-trap. The default is public. description string (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword description then a string describing the event. owner name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner then the name of the owner of this event. Defaults As noted in the Parameters section.
rising-threshold value eventnumber Enter the keywords rising-threshold then the value (64 bit) the rising-threshold alarm is either triggered or reset. Then enter the event-number to trigger when the rising threshold exceeds its limit. This value is the same as the alarmRisingEventIndex or alarmTable of the RMON MIB. If there is no corresponding rising-threshold event, the value is zero.
ether statistics table: 8 entries, 4608 bytes ether history table: 8 entries, 6000 bytes alarm table: 390 entries, 102960 bytes high-capacity alarm table: 5 entries, 1680 bytes event table: 500 entries, 206000 bytes log table: 2 entries, 552 bytes Dell# show rmon alarms Display the contents of the RMON alarm table. Syntax Parameters show rmon alarms [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Dell# 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 show rmon events Display the contents of the RMON event table. Syntax Parameters show rmon events [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry.
-----------------------------1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 Dell# show rmon hc-alarm Display the contents of RMON High-Capacity alarm table. Syntax Parameters show rmon hc-alarm [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON High-Capacity alarm table in an easy-to-read format.
value: 0, value status: positive alarm type: rising or falling alarm. alarm rising threshold value: positive. rising threshold: 500, RMON event index: 3 alarm falling threshold value: positive. falling threshold: 300, RMON event index: 4 alarm sampling failed 0 times. alarm owner: alarm storage type: non-volatile. alarm status: OK Dell# Example (Brief) Dell#show rmon hc-alarm brief index SNMP OID ---------------------------------1 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 2 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 4 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 5 1.3.
status: OK Dell# Example (Brief) Dell#show rmon history brief index ifIndex interface --------------------------------------6001 100974631 GigabitEthernet 2/0 6002 100974631 GigabitEthernet 2/0 6003 101236775 GigabitEthernet 2/1 6004 101236775 GigabitEthernet 2/1 9001 134529054 GigabitEthernet 3/0 9002 134529054 GigabitEthernet 3/0 9003 134791198 GigabitEthernet 3/1 9004 134791198 GigabitEthernet 3/1 Dell# show rmon log Display the contents of the RMON log table.
4 Dell# 4 show rmon statistics Display the contents of RMON Ethernet statistics table. Syntax Parameters show rmon statistics [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON Ethernet statistics table in an easy-to-read format. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example (Index) Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
HC 64bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 64bytes packets: 0 HC 65-127 bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 65-127 bytes packets: 0 HC 128-255 bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 128-255 bytes packets: 0 HC 256-511 bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 256-511 bytes packets: 0 HC 512-1023 bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 512-1023 bytes packets: 0 HC 1024-1518 bytes packets overflow: 0 HC 1024-1518 bytes packets: 0 Dell# Example (Brief) Dell#show rmon statistics br index ifIndex interface ---------------------------------------6001 100974631
51 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation of rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning-tree protocol. The RSTP algorithm configures connectivity throughout a bridged local area network (LAN) that is comprised of LANs interconnected by bridges. bridge-priority Set the bridge priority for RSTP. Syntax bridge-priority priority-value To return to the default value, use the no bridge-priority command.
Parameters all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations. bpdu interface {in | out} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug the bridge protocol data units. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface along with the type slot/port of the interface you want displayed. Type slot/port options are the following: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Defaults none Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-rstp”.) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol spanning-tree rstp — enters SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Disable RSTP globally on the system. Syntax disable To enable Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, use the no disable command. Defaults RSTP is disabled.
Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds that the system waits before transitioning RSTP to the forwarding state. The range is from 4 to 30. The default is 15 seconds. Defaults 15 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs.
Usage Information The hello time is encoded in BPDUs in increments of 1/256ths of a second. The standard minimum hello time in seconds is 1 second, which is encoded as 256. Millisecond hello times are encoded using values less than 256; the millisecond hello time equals (x/1000)*256. When you configure millisecond hellos, the default hello interval of 2 seconds is still used for edge ports; the millisecond hello interval is not used.
edge-port bpdufilter default To filter transmission of BPDU on port fast enabled interfaces, enable BPDU Filter globally. Syntax edge-port bpdufilter default To disable global bpdu filter default, use the no edge-port bpdufilter default command. Parameters priority-value Enter a number as the bridge priority value in increments of 4096. The range is from 0 to 61440. The default is 32768.
Example Dell(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell(config-rstp)##no disable Related Commands disable — disables RSTP globally on the system. show config View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are displayed. Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• Port Channel with two 40 Gigabit Ethernet = 600 edge-port Enter the keywords edge-port to configure the interface as a rapid spanning tree edge port. bpduguard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into Forwarding mode immediately after the root fails. Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU.
configured, the following error message displays: % Error: RootGuard is configured. Cannot configure LoopGuard. Enabling Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard at the same time on a port results in a port that remains in a Blocking state and prevents traffic from flowing through it. For example, when Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard are both configured: Example • If a BPDU is received from a remote device, BPDU guard places the port in an ErrDisabled Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port.
bpduguard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into Forwarding mode immediately after the root fails. Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU. shutdown-onviolation (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled.
Enabling Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard at the same time on a port results in a port that remains in a Blocking state and prevents traffic from flowing through it. For example, when Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard are both configured: Example • If a BPDU is received from a remote device, BPDU guard places the port in an ErrDisabled Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port.
52 Security This chapter describes various types of security commands in the Dell Networking OS, in the following sections: The commands are listed in the following sections: • AAA Accounting Commands • Authentication and Password Commands • RADIUS Commands • TACACS+ Commands • SSH Server and SCP Commands NOTE: Starting with the Dell Networking OS version 7.2.1.0, LEAP with MSCHAP v2 supplicant is implemented.
aaa accounting Enable AAA Accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function. Syntax aaa accounting {system | exec | commands level} {name | default} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} To disable AAA Accounting, use the no aaa accounting {system | exec | command level} {name | default}{start-stop | wait-start | stoponly} {tacacs+} command. Parameters system Enter the keyword system to send accounting information of any other AAA configuration.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator and M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information In the example above, TACACS+ accounting is used to track all usage of EXEC command and commands on privilege level 15. Privilege level 15 is the default. If you want to track usage at privilege level 1 for example, use the aaa accounting command 1 command.
aaa authorization commands Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC and CONFIGURATION level commands. Syntax aaa authorization commands {level}{name|default} {local | tacacs+| none} Undo a configuration with the no aaa authorization commands {level|{name| default} {local | tacacs+ | none} command. Parameters commands level Enter the keyword commands then the command privilege level for command level authorization. name Define a name for the list of authorization methods.
Defaults Enabled when you configure aaa authorization commands command. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following table lists the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6.(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator and M I/O Aggregator.
Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6.(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator and M I/O Aggregator. accounting Apply an accounting method list to terminal lines. Syntax Parameters accounting {exec | commands {level | role role-name} method-list} exec Enter the keyword exec to apply an EXEC level accounting method list.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supporting Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.
Authentication and Password Commands This section contains the commands that control the management access to the system. aaa authentication enable Configure AAA Authentication method lists for user access to EXEC privilege mode (the “Enable” access). Syntax aaa authentication enable {default | method-list-name} method [... method2] To return to the default setting, use the no aaa authentication enable {default | method-list-name} method [... method2] command.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information By default, the Enable password is used. If you configure aaa authentication enable default, Dell Networking Operating System (OS) uses the methods defined for Enable access instead. Methods configured with the aaa authentication enable command are evaluated in the order they are configured.
... method4 • line: use the password the password command defines in LINE mode. • none: no authentication. • radius: use the RADIUS servers configured with the radius-server host command. • tacacs+: use the TACACS+ servers configured with the tacacs-server host command. (OPTIONAL) Enter up to four additional methods. In the event of a “no response” from the first method, Dell Networking Operating System (OS) applies the next configured method (up to four configured methods).
Related Commands login authentication — enables AAA login authentication on the terminal lines. radius-server host — specifies a RADIUS server host. tacacs-server host — specifies a TACACS+ server host. authorization Apply an authorization method list to terminal lines. Syntax Parameters authorization {exec | commands {level | role role-name} methodlist exec Enter the keyword exec to apply an EXEC level accounting method list.
aaa authorization commands Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC and CONFIGURATION level commands. Syntax aaa authorization commands {level | role role-name}{name | default} {local | tacacs+ | none} Undo a configuration with the no aaa authorization commands {level | role role-name}{name | default} {local | tacacs+ | none} command. Parameters commands level Enter the keyword commands then the command privilege level for command level authorization.
Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters. It cannot be one of the system defined roles (sysadmin, secadmin, netadmin, netoperator). inherit existingrole-name Enter the inherit keyword then specify the system defined role to inherit permissions from (sysadmin, secadmin, netadmin, netoperator). Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.
Defaults Enabled when you configure aaa authorization commands command. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes. Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information By default, the aaa authorization commands command configures the system to check both EXEC level and CONFIGURATION level commands.
privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) Change the access or privilege level of one or more commands. Syntax privilege mode {level level command | reset command} To delete access to a level and command, use the no privilege mode level level command command.
privilege level (LINE mode) Change the access level for users on the terminal lines. Syntax privilege level level To delete access to a terminal line, use the no privilege level level command. Parameters level level Enter the keyword level then a number for the access level. The range is from 0 to 15. Level 1 is EXEC mode and Level 15 allows access to all CLI modes. Defaults level = 15 Command Modes LINE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information After entering the banner login command, type one or more spaces and a delineator character. Enter the banner text then the second delineator character. When the user is connected to the router, if a message of the day banner is configured, it displays first.
c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. The delineator is a percent character (%). line Enter a text string for your text banner message ending the message with your delineator. The delineator is a percent character (%). Range: maximum of 50 lines, up to 255 characters per line Defaults No banner is configured and the CR is required when creating a banner. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
banner motd Set a message of the day (MOTD) banner. Syntax Parameters banner motd c line c c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. The delineator is a percent character (%). line Enter a text string for your MOTD banner the message with your delineator. The delineator is a percent character (%). Defaults No banner is configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. debug tacacs+ To assist with troubleshooting, view TACACS+ transactions. Syntax debug tacacs+ To disable debugging of TACACS+, use the no debug tacacs+ command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Usage Information Optionally, use the banner exec command to create a text string that is displayed when you access EXEC mode. This command toggles that display. Related Commands banner exec— configures a banner to display when entering EXEC mode. line — enables and configures console and virtual terminal lines to the system. access-class Restrict incoming connections to a particular IP address in a defined IP access control list (ACL).
Parameters level level (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level then a number as the level of access. The range is from 1 to 15. encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 7 or 0 as the encryption type. Enter a 7 then a text string as the hidden password. The text string must be a password that was already encrypted by a Dell Networking router. Use this parameter only with a password that you copied from the show running-config file of another Dell Networking router.
enable restricted Allows Dell Networking technical support to access restricted commands. Syntax enable restricted [encryption-type] password To disallow access to restricted commands, use the no enable restricted command. Parameters encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 7 as the encryption type. Enter 7 followed a text string as the hidden password. The text string must be a password that was already encrypted by a Dell Networking router.
encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 5 or 0 as the encryption type. Enter a 5 then a text string as the hidden password. The text string must be a password that was already encrypted by a Dell Networking router. Use this parameter only with a password that you copied from the show running-config file of another Dell Networking router. password Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long, as the clear text password. Defaults No password is configured. level = 15.
To delete a password, use the no enable sha256-password [encryption-type] password [level level] command. Parameters sha256-password Enter the keyword sha256-password then the encryptiontype or the password. level level (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword level then a number as the level of access. The range is from 1 to 15. encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter the number 8 or 0 as the encryption type. Enter 8 to enter the sha256–based hashed password.
Defaults No authentication is performed on the console lines. Local authentication is performed on the virtual terminal and auxiliary lines. Command Modes LINE Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Usage Information The system prompts users for these passwords when the method for authentication or authorization used is "line". Related Commands enable password — sets the password for the enable command. login authentication — configures an authentication method to log in to the switch. service password-encryption — encrypts all passwords configured in the system. radius-server key — configures a key for all RADIUS communications between the switch and the RADIUS host server.
lower number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword lower then the lower number. The range is from 0 to 31. numeric number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword numeric then the numeric number. The range is from 0 to 31. special-char number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords special-char then the number of special characters permitted. The range is from 0 to 31. The following special characters are supported: !"#%&'();<=>?[\]*+,-.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information CAUTION: Encrypting passwords with this command does not provide a high level of security. When the passwords are encrypted, you cannot return them to plain text unless you re-configure them. To remove an encrypted password, use the no password password command. To keep unauthorized people from viewing passwords in the switch configuration file, use the service password-encryption command.
show users Allows you to view information on all users logged in to the switch. Syntax Parameters show users [all] all Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view all terminal lines in the switch. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for roles on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
timeout login response Specify how long the software waits for the login input (for example, the user name and password) before timing out. Syntax timeout login response seconds To return to the default values, use the no timeout login response command. Parameters seconds Enter a number of seconds the software waits before logging you out. The range is: • VTY: the range is from 1 to 30 seconds, the default is 30 seconds.
Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters. access-class access-list-name Enter the keywords access-class then the name of a configured access control list (either an IP access control list or MAC access control list). nopassword Enter the keyword nopassword to specify that the user should not enter a password. password Enter the keyword password then the encryption-type or the password. secret Enter the keyword secret then the encryption-type or the password.
Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for roles on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To view the defined user names, use the show running-config user command. Related Commands password — specifies a password for users on terminal lines. show running-config — views the current configuration.
Parameters interface Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a ten-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.
radius-server host Configure a RADIUS server host. Syntax Parameters radius-server host {hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [authport port-number] [retransmit retries] [timeout seconds] [key [encryption-type] key] hostname Enter the name of the RADIUS server host. ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of the RADIUS server host. auth-port portnumber (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords auth-port then a number as the port number.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information To configure any number of RADIUS server hosts for each server host that is configured, use this command. Dell Networking Operating System (OS) searches for the RADIUS hosts in the order they are configured in the software.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The key configured on the switch must match the key configured on the RADIUS server daemon. If you configure the key parameter in the radius-server host command, the key configured with the radius-server key command is the default key for all RADIUS communications.
radius-server timeout To reply to a request, configure the amount of time the RADIUS client (the switch) waits for a RADIUS host server . Syntax radius-server timeout seconds To return to the default value, use the no radius-server timeout command. Parameters seconds Defaults 5 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Related Commands Enter the number of seconds between an unsuccessful attempt and the radius-server timeout times out.
route-map for Route-map mode router for Router mode addrole Enter the keyword addrole to add permission to the command. You cannot add or delete rights for the sysadmin role. deleterole Enter the keyword deleterole to remove access to the command. You cannot add or delete rights for the sysadmin role. role-name Enter a text string for the name of the user role up to 63 characters. These are 3 system defined roles you can modify: secadmin, netadmin, and netoperator.
Example Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell#show privilege Current privilege level is 15 Dell# Suppressing AAA Accounting for Null Username Sessions When you activate AAA accounting, the Dell Networking OS software issues accounting records for all users on the system, including users whose username string, because of protocol translation, is NULL.
exec Enter the keyword exec to send accounting information when a user has logged in to EXEC mode. commands level Enter the keyword command then a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level. name | default Enter one of the following: • For name, enter a user-defined name of a list of accounting methods. • For default, the default accounting methods used.
password creates a password. tacacs-server host specifies a TACACS+ server host. debug tacacs+ To assist with troubleshooting, view TACACS+ transactions. Syntax debug tacacs+ To disable debugging of TACACS+, use the no debug tacacs+ command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. tacacs-server host Specify a TACACS+ host. Syntax Parameters tacacs-server host {hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [port number] [timeout seconds] [key key] hostname Enter the name of the TACACS+ server host. ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of the TACACS+ server host.
If you are not configuring the switch as a TACACS+ server, you do not need to configure the port, timeout and key optional parameters. If you do not configure a key, the key assigned in the tacacs-server key command is used. Related Commands aaa authentication login — specifies the login authentication method. tacacs-server key — configures a TACACS+ key for the TACACS server. tacacs-server key Configure a key for communication between a TACACS+ server and a client.
timeout login response Specify how long the software waits for the login input (for example, the user name and password) before timing out. Syntax timeout login response seconds To return to the default values, use the no timeout login response command. Parameters seconds Enter a number of seconds the software waits before logging you out. The range is: • VTY: the range is from 1 to 30 seconds, the default is 30 seconds.
SSH Server and SCP Commands The Dell Networking OS supports secure shell (SSH) protocol versions 1.5 and 2.0. SSH is a protocol for secure remote login over an insecure network. SSH sessions are encrypted and use authentication. crypto key generate Generates keys for the SSH server. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command History crypto key generate {rsa | rsa1} rsa Enter the keyword rsa then the key size to generate a SSHv2 RSA host keys.
! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! Dell(conf)# Related Commands ip ssh server — enables the SSH server. show crypto — displays the SSH host public keys. debug ip ssh Enables collecting SSH debug information. Syntax debug ip ssh {client | server} To disable debugging, use the no debug ip ssh {client | server} command. Parameters client Enter the keyword client to enable collecting debug information on the client.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To configure the switch as an SCP server, use the ip ssh server command. Related Commands ip ssh server — enables the SSH and SCP server on the switch. ip ssh authentication-retries Configure the maximum number of attempts that should be used to authenticate a user.
Defaults • aes256-ctr • aes256-cbc • aes192-ctr • aes192-cbc • aes128-ctr • aes128-cbc • 3des-cbc The default list of ciphers is in the order as shown below: • aes256-ctr • aes256-cbc • aes192-ctr • aes192-cbc • aes128-ctr • aes128-cbc • 3des-cbc Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Parameters 1-10 Enter the number of maximum numbers of incoming SSH connections allowed per minute. The range is from 1 to 10 per minute. The default is 10 per minute. Defaults 10 per minute Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip ssh hostbased-authentication Enable hostbased-authentication for the SSHv2 server.
Related Commands ip ssh pub-key-file — public keys of trusted hosts from a file. ip ssh rhostsfile — trusted hosts and users for rhost authentication. ip ssh key-size Configure the size of the server-generated RSA SSHv1 key. Syntax Parameters ip ssh key-size 512-869 512-869 Defaults Key size 768 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the key-size number for the server-generated RSA SSHv1 key. The range is from 512 to 869. The default is 768.
Defaults • hmac-sha1–96 • hmac-md5 • hmac-md5-96 The default list of MAC algorithm is in the order as shown below: When FIPS mode is enabled: • hmac-sha2–256 • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1–96 When FIPS mode is disabled: • hmac-sha2-256 • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1–96 • hmac-md5 • hmac-md5-96 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Parameters enable Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword enable to enable password-authentication for the SSH server. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information With password authentication enabled, you can authenticate using the local, RADIUS, or TACACS+ password fallback order as configured.
NOTE: For rhostfile and pub-key-file, the administrator must FTP the file to the switch. ip ssh rekey Configures the time rekey-interval or volume rekey-limit threshold at which to re-generate the SSH key during an SSH session. Syntax ip ssh rekey [time rekey-interval] [volume rekey-limit] To reset to the default, use no ip ssh rekey [time rekey-interval] [volume rekey-limit] command. Parameters time minutes Enter the keywords time then the amount of time in minutes.
Parameters enable Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword enable to enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Enabling RSA authentication allows the user to log in without being prompted for a password.
keys. This command adds the specified RSA keys to the following file: flash:// ADMIN_DIR/ssh/authorized-keys-username (where username is the user associated with this terminal). NOTE: The no form of this command deletes the file flash://ADMIN_DIR/ ssh/ authorized-keys-username file. Related Commands show ip ssh rsa-authentication — displays the RSA authorized keys. ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config) — enables RSA authentication. ip ssh server Configure an SSH server.
• mac hmacalgorithm aes256-ctr Enter the keyword mac then a space-delimited list of hash message authentication code (HMAC) algorithms supported by the SSH server for keying hashing for the message authentication. The following HMAC algorithms are available: • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1-96 • hmac-sha2-256 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmacsha1-96.
[version {1 | 2}] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword version then the SSH version 1 or 2 to specify only SSHv1 or SSHv2. NOTE: If you enable FIPS mode, you can only select version 2. Defaults Default listening port is 22. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.5(0.0) Introduced the cipher, kex and mac options on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is useful if the remote SSH client implements Strict Host Key Checking. You can copy the host key to your list of known hosts.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Example Dell#show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v1 and v2. SSH server vrf : default. SSH server ciphers : 3des-cbc,aes128-cbc,aes192-cbc,aes256cbc,aes128-ctr,aes192-ctr,aes256-ctr. SSH server macs : hmac-sha2-256, hmac-sha1, hmacsha1-96, hmac-md5, hmac-md5-96. SSH server kex algorithms : diffie-hellman-group-exchangesha1,diffie-hellman-group1-sha1,diffie-hellman-group14-sha1. Password Authentication : enabled.
Dell# show ip ssh rsa-authentication Displays the authorized-keys for the RSA authentication. Syntax Parameters show ip ssh rsa-authentication {my-authorized-keys} my-authorizedkeys Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes All Modes Command History Display the RSA authorized keys. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Examples • interface • line • route-map • router Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL. userrole — creates user roles for the role-based security model. ssh Open an SSH connection specifying the host name, username, port number and version of the SSH client. Dell Networking OS supports both inbound and outbound SSH sessions using IPv4 addressing.
Example Dell#ssh 123.12.1.123 -l ashwani -p 5005 -v 2 ip ssh pub-key-file Specify the file used for host-based authentication. Syntax Parameters ip ssh pub-key-file {WORD} WORD Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the file name for the host-based authentication. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Secure DHCP Commands The dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks. clear ip dhcp snooping Clear the DHCP binding table. Syntax clear ip dhcp snooping binding Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP Snooping globally. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When enabled, no learning takes place until you enable snooping on a VLAN.
ip dhcp snooping binding Create a static entry in the DHCP binding table. Syntax Parameters [no] ip dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ip ipaddress interface type slot/port lease number mac address Enter the keyword mac then the MAC address of the host to which the server is leasing the IP address. vlan-id vlan-id Enter the keywords vlan-id then the VLAN to which the host belongs. The range is from 2 to 4094.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping trust Defaults Untrusted Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
ip dhcp snooping vlan Enable DHCP Snooping on one or more VLANs. Syntax Parameters [no] ip dhcp snooping vlan name name Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the name of a VLAN on which to enable DHCP Snooping. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When enabled, the system begins creating entries in the binding table for the specified VLANs.
username Establish an authentication system based on user names. Syntax username name [nopassword | {password | secret} [encryption-type] password] [privilege level] If you do not want a specific user to enter a password, use the nopassword option. To delete authentication for a user, use the no username name command. Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters. nopassword Enter the keyword nopassword to specify that the user should not enter a password.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information To view the defined user names, use the show running-config user command. Related Commands service password-encryption — specifies a password for users on terminal lines. show running-config — views the current configuration. userrole Create user roles for the role-based security model. Syntax userrole name inherit existing-role-name To delete a role name, use the no userrole name command.
Important Points to Remember Consider the following when creating a user role: • Only the system administrator and user-defined roles inherited from the system administrator can create roles and usernames. Only the system administrator, security administrator, and roles inherited from these can use the role command to modify command permissions. The security administrator and roles inherited by security administrator can only modify permissions for commands they already have access to.
53 sFlow sFlow monitoring system includes an sFlow Agent and an sFlow Collector. • The sFlow Agent combines the flow samples and interface counters into sFlow datagrams and forwards them to the sFlow Collector. • The sFlow Collector analyses the sFlow Datagrams received from the different devices and produces a network-wide view of traffic flows.
• sflow polling-interval (Global) • sflow polling-interval (Interface) • sflow sample-rate (Global) • sflow sample-rate (Interface) • show sflow • show sflow stack-unit sflow collector Configure a collector device to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded.
In sFlow, the agent address is a single invariant IPv4 or IPv6 address used to identify the agent to the collector. It is usually assigned the address of a loopback interface on the agent, which provides invariance. The agent address is carried as a field in the payload of the sFlow packets. As part of the sFlow-MIB, if the SNMP request originates from a configured collector, the system returns the corresponding configured agent IP in the MIB requests.
Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL switch.
the destination IP addresses are learned by different routing protocols and for cases where the destination is reachable over ECMP. Related Commands show sflow — displays the sFlow configuration. sflow max-header-size extended Set the maximum header size of a packet to 256 bytes. Syntax sflow max-header-size extended To reset the maximum header size of a packet, use the[no] sflow max-headersize extended command.
To return to the default, use the no sflow polling-interval interval command. Parameters interval value Defaults 20 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Enter the interval value in seconds. The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds. The default is 20 seconds. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands sflow polling-interval (Global) — globally sets the polling interval. sflow sample-rate (Global) Change the global default sampling rate. Syntax sflow sample-rate value To return to the default sampling rate, use the no sflow sample-rate command. Parameters value Defaults 32768 packets Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Enter the sampling rate value. The range is from 256 to 8388608 packets.
Parameters value Enter the sampling rate value. The range is from 256 to 8388608 packets. Enter values in powers of 2 only; for example, 4096, 8192, and 16384. The default is the Global default sampling. Defaults The Global default sampling. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The dropEvent counter (sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling) shown in the following example always displays a value of zero.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The dropEvent counter (sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling) shown in the following example below always displays a value of zero.
54 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging is composed of virtual local area network (VLAN) Stacking, Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, and Provider Backbone Bridging as described in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. This chapter includes commands for the Dell Networking operating software Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT). L2PT enables protocols to tunnel through an 802.1q tunnel. For more information, see VLAN Stacking, Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), and GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP).
To disable debugging, use the no debug protocol-tunnel interface {in | out | both} [vlan vlan-id] [count value] command. Parameters interface • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. in | out | both Enter the keyword in, out, or both to debug incoming interfaces, outgoing interfaces, or both incoming and outgoing interfaces.
Command Modes CONF-IF-VLAN Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#conf Dell(conf)#interface vlan 2 Dell(conf-if-vl-2)#vlan-stack compatible Dell(conf-if-vl-2)#member Te1/2-3 Dell(conf-if-vl-2)#protocol-tunnel stp Dell(conf-if-vl-2)#protocol-tunnel enable Related Command show protocol-tunnel — displays tunneling information for all VLANs.
protocol-tunnel enable Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. Syntax protocol-tunnel enable To disable protocol tunneling, use the no protocol-tunnel enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Dell# Dell#conf Dell(conf)#protocol-tunnel rate-limit 1000 Dell(conf)# Related Commands show protocol-tunnel — displays tunneling information for all VLANs. show running-config — displays the current configuration. show protocol-tunnel Display protocol tunnel information for all or a specified VLAN-Stack VLAN.
55 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Syslog This chapter contains commands to configure and monitor the simple network management protocol (SNMP) v1/v2/v3 and Syslog.
• default logging trap • logging • logging buffered • logging console • logging facility • logging history • logging history size • logging monitor • logging on • logging source-interface • logging synchronous • logging trap • logging version • show logging • show logging driverlog stack-unit • show logging auditlog • terminal monitor SNMP Commands The following SNMP commands are available in the Dell Networking OS.
clear logging auditlog Clears audit log. Syntax clear logging auditlog Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the MXL.
Example Dell#show snmp 32685 SNMP packets input 0 Bad SNMP version errors 0 Unknown community name 0 Illegal operation for community name supplied 0 Encoding errors 96988 Number of requested variables 0 Number of altered variables 31681 Get-request PDUs 968 Get-next PDUs 0 Set-request PDUs 61727 SNMP packets output 0 Too big errors (Maximum packet size 1500) 9 No such name errors 0 Bad values errors 0 General errors 32649 Response PDUs 29078 Trap PDUs Dell# Related Commands snmp-server community — enable
show snmp group Display the group name, security model, status, and storage type of each group. Syntax Command Modes Command History show snmp group • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following Example displays a group named ngroup.
Example Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show snmp user User name: v1v2creadu Engine ID: 0000178B02000001E80214A8 storage-type: nonvolatile active Authentication Protocol: None Privacy Protocol: None Dell# snmp ifmib ifalias long Display the entire description string through the Interface MIB, which would be truncated otherwise to 63 characters. Syntax snmp ifmib ifalias long Defaults Interface description truncated beyond 63 characters.
snmp-server community Configure a new community string access for SNMPv1 v2 and v3. Syntax snmp-server community community-name {ro | rw} [security-name name][access-list-name] To remove access to a community, use the no snmp-server community community-string {ro | rw} [security-name name [access-list-name] command. Parameters community-name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) to act as a password for SNMP. ro Enter the keyword ro to specify read-only permission.
The community-name parameter indexes this command. If you do not configure the snmp-server community command, you cannot query SNMP data. Only Standard IPv4 ACL and IPv6 ACL is supported in the optional accesslist-name. The command options ipv6, security-name, and access-list-name are recursive. In other words, each option can, in turn, accept any of the three options as a suboption, and each of those sub-options can accept any of the three sub-options as a sub-option, and so forth.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. snmp-server enable traps Enable SNMP traps. Syntax snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notification-option] To disable traps, use the no snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notification-option] command. Parameters notification-type notificationoption Enter the type of notification from the following list: • ecfm — Notification of changes to ECFM.
Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History • syslog-reachable • syslog-unreachable Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.8(0.0) Added the following two SNMP notification options: syslogreachable and syslog-unreachable. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The system supports up to 16 SNMP trap receivers.
remote ip-address Enter the keyword remote then the IP address that identifies the copy of the SNMP on the remote device. udp-port portnumber engineID Enter the keywords udp-port then the user datagram protocol (UDP) port number on the remote device. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 162. Defaults As above. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Parameters group_name 1 | 2c | 3 Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the group. The following groups are created for mapping to read/ write community/security-names (defaults): • v1v2creadg — maps to a community/security-name with ro permissions. • 1v2cwriteg — maps to a community/security-name rw permissions. (OPTIONAL) Enter the security model version number (1, 2c, or 3): • 1 is the least secure version. • 3 is the most secure of the security modes.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following Example specifies the group named harig as a version 3 user requiring both authentication and encryption and read access limited to the read named rview. NOTE: The number of configurable groups is limited to 16 groups.
The default is version 1. auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet without encryption. noauth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword noauth to specify no authentication of a packet. priv (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv to specify both authentication and then scrambling of the packet. community-string Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the SNMP community.
9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information In order to configure the router to send SNMP notifications, enter at least one snmpserver host command. If you enter the command with no keywords, all trap types are enabled for the host. If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent. In order to enable multiple hosts, issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host.
snmp-server location Configure the location of the SNMP server. Syntax snmp-server location text To delete the SNMP location, use the no snmp-server location command. Parameters text Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Enter an alpha-numeric text string, up to 55 characters long. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
snmp-server trap-source Configure a specific interface as the source for SNMP traffic. Syntax snmp-server trap-source interface To disable sending traps out a specific interface, use the no snmp trap-source command. Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
To remove a user from the SNMP group, use the no snmp-server user name {group_name remote ip-address udp-port port-number} [1 | 2c | 3] [encrypted] [auth {md5 | sha} auth-password] [priv des56 | aes128– cfb} priv password] [access access-list-name | ipv6 access-listname] command. Parameters name Enter the name of the user (not to exceed 20 characters), on the host that connects to the agent. group_name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the group.
host and to send packets to the host. Minimum: eight characters long. priv des56 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords priv des56 to initiate a privacy authentication level setting using the CBC-DES privacy authentication algorithm (des56). aes128 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword aes128 to initiate the AES128CFB encryption algorithm for transmission of SNMP packets.
Example Dell#conf Dell(conf)# snmp-server user authuser v3group v3 auth md5 authpasswd Usage Information The following command configures a remote user named n3user with a v3 security model and a security level of authNOPriv. Example Dell#conf Dell(conf)# snmp-server user n3user ngroup remote 172.31.1.3 udpport 5009 3 auth md5 authpasswd Related Commands show snmp user — displays the information configured on each SNMP user name.
message it receives from the agent. Minimum: eight characters long. Defaults If no authentication or privacy option is configured, then the messages are exchanged (attempted anyway) without any authentication or encryption. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Added support for the AES128-CFB encryption algorithm on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform 8.3.16.
oid-tree Enter the OID sub tree for the view (not to exceed 20 characters). included (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword included to include the MIB family in the view. excluded (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword excluded to exclude the MIB family in the view. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Syslog Commands The following commands allow you to configure logging functions on all Dell Networking switches. clear logging Clear the messages in the logging buffer. Syntax clear logging Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
default logging console Return the default settings for messages logged to the console. Syntax default logging console Defaults level = 7 or debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. logging console — sets the logging console parameters. logging extended Logs security and audit events to a system log server.
extended logging is disabled, you can only view system events, regardless of RBAC user role. When you enabled RBAC and extended logging: • Only the system administrator role can execute this command. • The system administrator and system security administrator roles can view security events and system events. • The system administrator role can view audit, security, and system events. • The network administrator and network operator roles can view system events.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. logging trap — limit messages logged to the Syslog servers based on severity. logging Configure an IP address or host name of a Syslog server where logging messages are sent. You can configure multiple logging servers of both IPv4 and/or IPv6.
8.3.16.1 Related Commands Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. logging on — enables the logging asynchronously to logging buffer, console, Syslog server, and terminal lines. logging trap — enables logging to the Syslog server based on severity. logging buffered Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer. By default, all messages are logged to the internal buffer.
show logging — displays the logging setting and system messages in the internal buffer. logging console Specify which messages are logged to the console. Syntax logging console [level] To return to the default values, use the default logging console command. To disable logging to the console, use the no logging console command.
Parameters facility-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following parameters: • auth (authorization system) • cron (Cron/at facility) • deamon (system deamons) • kern (kernel) • local0 (local use) • local1 (local use) • local2 (local use) • local3 (local use) • local4 (local use) • local5 (local use) • local6 (local use) • local7 (local use) • lpr (line printer system) • mail (mail system) • news (USENET news) • sys9 (system use) • sys10 (system use) • sys11 (system use) •
logging history Specify which messages are logged to the history table of the switch and the SNMP network management station (if configured). Syntax logging history level To return to the default values, use the no logging history command.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When the number of messages reach the limit you set with the logging history size command, older messages are deleted as newer ones are added to the table. Related Commands show logging — displays information logged to the history buffer.
logging on Specify that debug or error messages are asynchronously logged to multiple destinations, such as the logging buffer, Syslog server, or terminal lines. Syntax logging on To disable logging to logging buffer, Syslog server and terminal lines, use the no logging on command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History • For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero (0) to 16383. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a ten-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
Defaults Disabled. If enabled without the level or number-of-buffers options specified, level = 2 and number-of-buffers = 20 are the defaults. Command Modes LINE Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable logging synchronous, unsolicited messages appear between software prompts and outputs.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. logging — enables the logging to another device. logging on — enables logging. logging version Displays syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format. Syntax logging version {0|1} Defaults 0 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific.
show logging Display the logging settings and system messages logged to the internal buffer of the switch. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example (Partial) show logging [number | history [reverse][number] | reverse [number] | summary] number (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of messages displayed in the output. The range is from 1 to 65535. history (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword history to view only information in the Syslog history table.
May 22 09:01:51: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from vty0 ( 10.11.68.22 )by admin May 22 08:53:09: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SEC-3AUTHENTICATION_ENABLE_SUCCESS: Enable password authentication suc cess on vty0 ( 10.11.68.22 ) May 22 08:53:04: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SEC-5-LOGIN_SUCCESS: Login successful for user admin on vty0 (10.11.68.22) May 19 16:58:32: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SEC-5-LOGOUT: Exec session is terminated for user admin on line vty2 (10.11.68.
Usage Information This command displays internal software driver information, which may be useful during troubleshooting switch initialization errors, such as a downed Port-Pipe. show logging auditlog Displays an audit log. Syntax show logging auditlog Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. logging monitor — sets the logging parameters on the monitor/terminal.
56 Stacking Commands Stacking is supported on the FN410S and FN410T cards with ports 9 and 10 as the stack ports. Stacking is limited to six Aggregators in the same or different chassis in a single stack. Stacking provides a single point of management and NIC teaming for high availability and higher throughput. To configure an Aggregator stack, you must use the CLI. The stacking commands are always available and operational.
power-cycle stack-unit To hard reset any stack unit including master unit. Syntax Parameter power-cycle stack-unit unit-number Unit number Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History The unit number ranges from 0 to 5. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6.(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is supported on the M I/O, FN410S, and FN410T Aggregators.
8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When the command is given as redundancy disable-auto-reboot stack-unit, it prevents the switch stack management unit and standby unit from rebooting if they fail. When a particular unit number in the range from 0 to 5 is issued as part of the CLI, it prevents that particular unit from rebooting after failure. When members are issued as part of the CLI, all the units part of the stack are prevented from rebooting after failure.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6.(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is supported on the M I/O, FN410S, and FN410T Aggregators Resetting the management unit is not allowed and an error message displays if you try to do so. Resetting is a soft reboot, including flushing the forwarding tables.
• Supported Modes Command History Example EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Mode Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show system stack-ports Display information about the stacking ports on all switches in the FN I/O Aggregator switch stack.. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show system stack-ports [status | topology] status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword status to display the command output without the Connection field. topology (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword topology to limit the table to just the Interface and Connection fields.
1/10 Dell# Example (Status) Example (Topology) 0/10 10 up Dell# show system stack-ports status Topology: Daisy chain Interface Link Speed Admin Link (Gb/s) Status Status 0/9 10 up down 0/10 10 up up 1/9 10 up down 1/10 10 up up up Trunk Group Dell# show system stack-ports topology Topology: Daisy chain Interface Connection Trunk Group 0/9 0/9 1/10 1/10 Dell Related Commands 1/10 # 0/10 power-cycle stack-unit—resets the designated stack member.
Usage information This command is supported on the M I/O, FN410S, and FN410T Aggregators Example Dell#show system stack-unit all iom-mode ? | Pipe through a command Dell#show system stack-unit all iom-mode Unit Boot-Mode Next-Boot -----------------------------------------------0 stack stack 1 stack stack 2 stack stack 3 stack stack 4 Not Present 5 Not Present Dell# show system stack-unit stack-group Displays the stack-groups present/configured for a FN I/O Aggregator stack unit.
Related Commands reload— reboots the system. show system— displays the current status of all stack members or a specific member. stack-unit iom-mode Toggle the operating mode between programmable multiplex, standalone, stack, full–switch,and VLT modes. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History stack-unit iom-mode [programmable-mux | stack | standalone | vlt | full-switch unit number <0-5> Enter the number of the member stack unit. The range is from 0 to 5.
show system— displays the current status of all stack members or a specific member. stack-unit priority Configure the ability of a switch to become the management unit of a stack. Syntax Parameters stack-unit stack-number priority 1-14 stack-number Enter the stack member unit identifier. 1–14 This preference parameter allows you to specify the management priority of one backup switch over another, with 0 the lowest priority and 14 the highest.
MXL-10/40GbE Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Related Commands Enter the model identifier of the switch to be added as a stack member. This identifier is also referred to as the provision type. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • reload — reboots the system. • show system — displays the status of all stack members or a specific member.
When executing this command on the master, the stack reloads. When the members are renumbered, only that specific unit is reset and comes up with the new unit number. Example Dell#stack-unit 5 renumber 4 Renumbering will reset the unit. Warning: Interface configuration for current unit will be lost! Proceed to renumber [confirm yes/no]: Related Commands • reload – reboots Dell Networking Operating System (OS). • reset stack-unit – resets the designated stack member.
57 Storm Control The Dell Networking operating software storm control feature allows you to limit or suppress traffic during a traffic storm. Important Points to Remember • Interface commands can only be applied on physical interfaces (virtual local area networks [VLANs] and link aggregation group [LAG] interfaces are not supported). • An INTERFACE-level command only supports storm control configuration on ingress.
• storm-control multicast (Interface) • storm-control broadcast (Configuration) • storm-control broadcast (Interface) • storm-control multicast (Configuration) • storm-control PFC/LLFC • storm-control unknown-unicast (Configuration) • storm-control unknown-unicast (Interface) io-aggregator broadcast storm-control Rate-limit the traffic storm to 1 Gbps. Syntax io-aggregator broadcast storm-control To disable storm control, use the no io-aggregator broadcast storm-control command.
Supported Modes Standalone-Mux (SMUX) Full–Switch Mode Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell#show io-aggregator broadcast storm-control status Storm-Control Enabled Broadcast Traffic limited to 1000 Mbps Dell# show storm-control unknown-unicast Display the storm control unknown-unicast configuration.
show storm-control broadcast Display the storm control broadcast configuration. Syntax Parameters show storm-control broadcast [interface] interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following interfaces to display the interface-specific storm control configuration: • Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
• Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Mode Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. storm-control broadcast (Configuration) Configure the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed in the network. Syntax storm-control broadcast [packets_per_second in] To disable broadcast rate-limiting, use the no storm-control broadcast [packets_per_second in] command. Parameters packets_per_seco nd Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network.
Parameters packets_per_seco nd Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network. The range is from 0 to 33554368. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. storm-control multicast (Configuration) Configure the packets per second (pps) of multicast traffic.
storm-control PFC/LLFC Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC frames more than the configured rate. Syntax Parameters storm-control pfc-llfc [pps]in shutdown pfc-llfc in Enter the keyword pfc-llfc to get the flow control traffic. The range is from 0 to 33554368 packets per second. shutdown Enter the keyword shutdown to shut down the port when the rate exceeds. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-slot/port) Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Unknown Unicast Storm-Control is valid for Layer 2 and Layer 2/Layer 3 interfaces. storm-control unknown-unicast (Interface) Configure percentage of unknown-unicast traffic allowed on the interface.
58 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The commands in this chapter configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1d spanning tree protocol (STP). Topics: • bridge-priority • debug spanning-tree • description • disable • forward-delay • hello-time • max-age • portfast bpdufilter default • protocol spanning-tree • show config • show spanning-tree 0 • spanning-tree 0 bridge-priority Set the bridge priority of the switch in an IEEE 802.1D spanning tree.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug spanning-tree Enable debugging of the spanning tree protocol and view information on the protocol. Syntax debug spanning-tree {stp-id [all | bpdu | events | exceptions] | protocol} To disable debugging, use the no debug spanning-tree command. Parameters stp-id Enter zero (0). The switch supports one spanning tree group with a group ID of 0.
description Enter a description of the spanning tree. Syntax description {description} To remove the description from the spanning tree, use the no description {description} command. Parameters description Enter a description to identify the spanning tree (80 characters maximum). Defaults none Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-stp”.) Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Related Commands portfast bpdufilter default — enters SPANNING TREE mode. forward-delay The amount of time the interface waits in the Listening state and the Learning state before transitioning to the Forwarding state. Syntax forward-delay seconds To return to the default setting, use the no forward-delay command.
Defaults 2 seconds Command Modes SPANNING TREE Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. forward-delay — changes the wait time before STP transitions to the Forwarding state. max-age — changes the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information.
portfast bpdufilter default Enable BPDU Filter globally to filter transmission of BPDU on port fast enabled interfaces. Syntax portfast bpdufilter default To disable global bpdu filter default, use the no edge-port bpdufilter default command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes SPANNING TREE Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN MXL. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Dell(conf)#protocol spanning-tree 0 Dell(config-stp)# Related Commands disable — disables spanning tree group 0. To enable spanning tree group 0, use the no disable command. show config Display the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values display. Syntax show config Command Modes SPANNING TREE Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
interface interface • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. root (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword root to display configuration information on the spanning tree group root. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to only the number of ports in the spanning tree group and their state.
Field Description • Example aging “Port 1...” Displays the Interface type slot/port information and the status of the interface (Disabled or Enabled). “Port path...” Displays the path cost, priority, and identifier for the interface. “Designated root...” Displays the priority and MAC address of the root bridge of the STG that the interface belongs. “Designated port...” Displays the designated port ID.
Example (Brief) Usage Information The following describes the show spanning-tree 0 guard command shown in the example. Example (Guard) Field Description Interface Name STP interface. Instance STP 0 instance. Sts Port state: root-inconsistent (INCON Root), forwarding (FWD), listening (LIS), blocking (BLK), or shut down (EDS Shut). Guard Type Type of STP guard configured (Root, Loop, or BPDU guard).
portfast [bpduguard [shutdown-onviol ation] | bpdufilter] Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into Forwarding mode immediately after the root fails. Enter the optional keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU. Enter the optional keywords shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled.
59 System Time The commands in this chapter configure time values on the system, either using the Dell Networking OS, the hardware, or using the network time protocol (NTP). With NTP, the switch can act only as a client to an NTP clock host. For more information, refer to the Network Time Protocol section of the Management chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
Parameters time Enter the time in hours:minutes:seconds. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15:00 is 5:15 pm. month Enter the name of one of the 12 months, in English. You can enter the number of a day and change the order of the display to time day month year . day Enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time month day year . year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
Parameters time-zone Enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name is displayed in the show clock output. start-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year. start-day Enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. start-year Enter a four-digit number as the year.
clock summer-time recurring Set the software clock to convert to daylight saving time on a specific day each year. Syntax clock summer-time time-zone recurring [start-week start-day startmonth start-time end-week end-day end-month end-time [offset]] To delete a daylight saving time zone configuration, use the no clock summer-time command. Parameters time-zone Enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name is displayed in the show clock output. You can enter up to eight characters.
end-time Enter the time in hours:minutes:seconds. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15:00 is 5:15 pm. offset (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to 1440. The default is 60 minutes. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
loopfilter Enter the keyword loopfilter to display information on NTP local clock frequency. packets Enter the keyword packets to display information on NTP packets. select Enter the keyword select to display information on the NTP clock selection. sync Enter the keyword sync to display information on the NTP clock synchronization. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Example Dell(config)# ntp offset-threshold 4 ntp server Configure an NTP time-serving host. Syntax Parameters ntp server {ipv4-address} ipv4-address Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter an IPv4 address (A.B.C.D). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information You can configure multiple time-serving hosts (up to 250).
8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You also must configure an authentication key for NTP traffic using the ntp authentication-key command. Related Commands ntp authentication-key — configures the authentication key for NTP traffic. ntp trusted-key — configures a key to authenticate. ntp authentication-key Specify a key for authenticating the NTP server.
The Dell Networking OS versions 8.2.1.0 and later use an encryption algorithm to store the authentication key that is different from previous versions; beginning in version 8.2.1.0, the system uses DES encryption to store the key in the startup-config when you enter the ntp authentication-key command. Therefore, if your system boots with a startup-configuration from an versions prior to 8.2.1.
ntp server Configure an NTP time-serving host. Syntax Parameters ntp server[vrf vrf-name] {hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [key keyid] [prefer] [version number] vrf vrf-name (Optional) Enter the keyword vrf and then the name of the VRF to configure a NTP time-serving host corresponding to that VRF. ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter an IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) of NTP server. hostname Enter the hostname of the server.
ntp source Specify an interface’s IP address to be included in the NTP packets. Syntax ntp source interface To delete the configuration, use the no ntp source command. Parameters interface Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero (0) to 16383.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The number parameter in the ntp trusted-key command must be the same number as the number parameter in the ntp authentication-key command. If you change the ntp authentication-key command, you must also change the ntp trustedkey command.
Example (Detail) Dell#show clock detail 12:30:26.892 pacific Tue May 22 2012 Time source is RTC hardware Summer time starts 00:00:00 UTC Wed Mar 14 2012 Summer time ends 00:00:00 pacific Wed Nov 7 2012 Dell# Related Commands clock summer-time recurring — sets the software clock to convert to daylight saving time on a specific day each year. show ntp associations Display the NTP master and peers.
Field Description when Displays the last time the switch received an NTP packet. poll Displays the polling interval (in seconds). reach Displays the reachability to the peer (in octal bitstream). delay Displays the time interval or delay for a packet to complete a round-trip to the NTP time source (in milliseconds). offset Displays the relative time of the NTP peer’s clock to the switch clock (in milliseconds). disp Displays the dispersion.
9.4.(0.0) Added support for VRF. show ntp status Display the current NTP status. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ntp status • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ntp status command shown in the following example. Example Field Description “Clock is...
peer mode is unspec Dell# Related Commands show ntp associations — displays information on the NTP master and peer configurations.
60 Tunneling Tunneling is supported on the Dell Networking OS. tunnel-mode Enable a tunnel interface. Syntax tunnel mode {ipip | ipv6 | ipv6ip}[decapsulate-any] To disable an active tunnel interface, use the no tunnel mode command. Parameters ipip Enable tunnel in RFC 2003 mode and encapsulate IPv4 and/or IPv6 datagrams inside an IPv4 tunnel. ipv6 Enable tunnel in RFC 2473 mode and encapsulate IPv4 and/or IPv6 datagrams inside an IPv6 tunnel.
any tunnel allow-remote entries, the tunnel—mode command fails unless the decapsulate-any option is included Configuration of IPv6 commands over decapsulate-any tunnel causes an error. tunnel source Set a source address for the tunnel. Syntax tunnel source {ip-address | ipv6–address | interface-type-number} To delete the current tunnel source address, use the no tunnel source command. Parameters ip-address Enter the source IPv4 address in A.B.C.D format.
tunnel keepalive Configure the tunnel keepalive target, interval and attempts. Syntax tunnel keepalive {ip-address | ipv6-address}[interval {seconds}] [attempts {count | unlimited}] Use the no tunnel keepalive command to disable tunnel keepalive probes. Parameters ip-address ipv6 address Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the peer to which the keepalive probes will be sent.
tunnel allow-remote Configure an IPv4 or IPv6 address or prefix whose tunneled packets will be accepted for decapsulation. If no allow-remote entries are configured, tunneled packets from any remote peer address will be accepted. Syntax tunnel allow-remote {ip-address | ipv6-address} [mask] Use the no tunnel allow-remote command to delete a configured allow-remote entry. Any specified address/mask values must match an existing entry for the delete to succeed.
tunnel dscp Configure the method to set the DSCP in the outer tunnel header. Syntax tunnel dscp {mapped | } To use the default tunnel mapping behavior, use the no tunnel dscp value command. Parameters mapped Enter the keyword mapped to map the original packet DSCP (IPv4)/Traffic Class (IPv6) to the tunnel header DSCP (IPv4)/ Traffic Class (IPv6) depending on the mode of tunnel. value Enter a value to set the DSCP value in the tunnel header. The range is from 0 to 63.
To delete a tunnel destination address, use the no tunnel destination {ipaddress | ipv6–address} command. Parameters ip-address Enter the destination IPv4 address for the tunnel. ipv6–address Enter the destination IPv6 address for the tunnel. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL (conf-if-tu) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is only valid for tunnel interfaces with an IPv6 outer header. tunnel hop-limit Configure the method to set the IPv4 time-to-live or the IPv6 hop limit value in the outer tunnel header. Syntax tunnel hop-limit value To restore the default tunnel hop-limit, use the no tunnel hop-limit command. Parameters value Enter the hop limit (ipv6) or time-to-live (ipv4) value to include in the tunnel header.
Parameters interface-type interface-number Defaults None Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the interface type, followed by a slot number. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL. Usage Information The ip unnumbered command will fail in two condition: • If the logical ip address is configured. • If the tunnel mode is ipv6ip (where ip address over tunnel interface is not possible).
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL. Usage Information The ip unnumbered command will fail in two condition: • If the logical ip address is configured. • If the tunnel mode is ipv6ip (where ip address over tunnel interface is not possible). To ping the unnumbered tunnels the logical address route information should be present in both the ends.
61 u-Boot All commands in this chapter are in u-Boot mode. These commands are supported on the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) FN IOM platform. To access this mode, press any key when the following line appears on the console during a system boot. Hit any key to stop autoboot: Enter u-Boot immediately, as the BOOT_USER# prompt. NOTE: This chapter describes only a few commands available in u-Boot mode. NOTE: You cannot use the Tab key to complete commands in this mode.
boot change Change the operating system boot parameters. Syntax boot change [primary | secondary | default] Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. boot selection Change the ROM bootstrap bootflash partition. Syntax boot selection [a | b] Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Example 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER# boot show net config retries Number of Network Boot Config Retries is : 0 BOOT_USER # boot write net config retries Set the number of retries for network boot configuration failure. Syntax boot write net config retries Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
default gateway Set the default gateway IP address. Syntax default-gateway Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. enable Change the access privilege level. Syntax enable [user | admin] Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Example 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # help ***** Dell Force10 Boot Interface Help Information ***** Current access level: USER LEVEL Use "syntax help" for more information on syntax.
Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. interface management ethernet ip address Set the management port IP address and mask. Syntax interface management ethernet ip address Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
no interface management ethernet ip address Clear the management port IP address and mask. Syntax no interface management ethernet ip address Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. reload Reload the FN IOM switch. Syntax reload Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # show boot blc ? Total 1 possible command found. Possible command list: show boot blc show the boot loop counter value BOOT_USER # show boot blc Boot Loop Counter : 10 BOOT_USER # show boot selection Display the ROM bootstrap bootflash partition.
Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # show bootflash GENERAL BOOTFLASH INFO ====================== Bootflash Partition A: Dell Force10 Networks System Boot Official IOM_LP_IMG_BOOT_LOADER, BSP Release 4.0.1.
Server IP address : 10.16.127.35 Default Gateway IP address : 15.0.0.1 Management Etherenet MAC address : 00:01:E8:43:DE:DF SECONDARY OPERATING SYSTEM BOOT PARAMETERS: ======================================== No Operating System boot parameters specified! DEFAULT OPERATING SYSTEM BOOT PARAMETERS: ======================================== boot device : tftp file name : FTOS-XL-8-3-16-99.bin Management Etherenet IP address : 10.16.130.134/16 Server IP address : 10.16.127.53 Default Gateway IP address : 15.0.0.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # show interface management ethernet Management ethernet IP address: 10.16.130.134/16 BOOT_USER # show interface management port config Show the management port boot characteristics. Syntax show interface management port config Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.
Supported Modes Command History Example Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # help ***** Dell Force10 Boot Interface Help Information ***** Current access level: USER LEVEL Use "syntax help" for more information on syntax.
62 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if you use this with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link. NOTE: In Standalone, VLT, and Stacking modes, the UFD group number is 1 by default and cannot be changed.
channels in any order; for example: tengigabitethernet 1/1-2,5,9,11-12 port-channel 1-3,5. A comma is required to separate each port and port-range entry. uplink-stategroup group-id Re-enables all UFD-disabled downstream interfaces in the group. The valid group-id values are from 1 to 16. Defaults A downstream interface in a UFD-disabled uplink-state group is also disabled and is in a UFD-Disabled Error state.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. clear ufd-disable — re-enables downstream interfaces that are in a UFD-Disabled Error state. defer-timer Configure a timer that prevents unwanted flapping of downstream ports when the uplink port channel goes down and comes up.
Parameters text Text description of the uplink-state group. The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. Defaults none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information You can assign physical port or port-channel interfaces to an uplink-state group. You can assign an interface to only one uplink-state group. Configure each interface assigned to an uplink-state group as either an upstream or downstream interface, but not both.
Related Commands Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. • downstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. • uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. downstream disable links Configure the number of downstream links in the uplink-state group that are disabled if one upstream link in an uplink-state group goes down.
Related Commands • downstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. • uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. enable Re-enable upstream-link tracking for an uplink-state group after it has been disabled. Syntax enable To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command. group-id Enables debugging on the specified uplink-state group.
• Supported Modes EXEC Privilege Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Example Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information After you enter the command, to assign upstream and downstream interfaces to the group, enter Uplink-State-Group Configuration mode. An uplink-state group is considered to be operationally up if at least one upstream interface in the group is in the Link-Up state.
• Port channel: port-channel {1-512 | portchannel-range} Where port-range and port-channel-range specify a range of ports separated by a dash (-) and/or individual ports/port channels in any order; for example: tengigabitethernet 0/1-2,5,9,11-12 port-channel 1-3,5. A comma is required to separate each port and port-range entry. Defaults none Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM.
63 VLAN Stacking With the virtual local area network (VLAN)-stacking feature (also called stackable VLANs and QinQ), you can “stack” VLANs into one tunnel and switch them through the network transparently. For more information about basic VLAN commands, refer to the Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands section in the Layer 2 chapter.
dei enable Make packets eligible for dropping based on their drop eligible indicator (DEI) value. Syntax dei enable Defaults Packets are colored green; no packets are dropped. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dei honor Honor the incoming DEI value by mapping it to a system drop precedence. Enter the command once for 0 and once for 1.
8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You must first enable DEI for this configuration to take effect. Related Commands dei enable — enables DEI. dei mark Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet. Syntax Parameters dei mark {green | yellow} {0 | 1} 0|1 Enter the bit value you want to map to a color. green | yellow Choose a color: • Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped.
To remove an interface from a Stackable VLAN, use the no member interface command. Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Defaults Not configured.
Default Drop precedence: Green Interface CFI/DEI Drop precedence --------------------------------------------Te 0/1 0 Green Te 0/1 1 Yellow Te 1/9 1 Red Te 1/12 0 Yellow Dell#show interface dei-honor Default Drop precedence: Green Interface CFI/DEI Drop precedence --------------------------------------------Te 0/1 0 Green Te 0/1 1 Yellow Te 1/2 1 Red Te 1/3 0 Yellow Related Commands dei honor — honors the incoming DEI value. show interface dei-mark Display the dei mark configuration.
vlan-stack access Specify a Layer 2 port or port channel as an access port to the stackable VLAN network. Syntax vlan-stack access To remove access port designation, use the no vlan-stack access command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information Prior to disabling the stackable VLAN feature, remove the members. To view the stackable VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode. Stackable VLANs contain members, designated by the M in the Q column of the command output.
vlan-stack protocol-type Define the stackable VLAN tag protocol identifier (TPID) for the outer VLAN tag (also called the VMAN tag). If you do not configure this command, the system assigns the value 0x9100. Syntax Parameters vlan-stack protocol-type number number Enter the hexadecimal number as the stackable VLAN tag. You may specify both bytes of the 2-byte S-Tag TPID. The range is from 0 to FFFF. The default is 9100.
Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Prior to using this command, to place the interface in Layer 2 mode, execute the switchport command. To remove the trunk port designation, first remove the port (using the no member interface command) from all stackable VLAN-enabled VLANs. Starting with the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.
tagged TenGigabitEthernet 0/12 shutdown Dell(conf-if-vl-20)#do show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM Status Description * 1 Inactive 20 Active 100 Active Dell(conf-if-vl-20)# Example Q Ports T Te 0/12 M Te 0/12 Dell(config)#vlan-stack protocol-type 88A8 Dell(config)#interface TenGigabitethernet 3/8 Dell(conf-if-te-3/8)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-3/8)#switchport Dell(conf-if-te-3/8)#vlan-stack
64 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) VLT allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core. VLT eliminates the requirement for Spanning Tree protocols by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches, and by supporting a loop-free topology.
• show vlt backup-link • show vlt brief • show vlt detail • show vlt inconsistency • show vlt mismatch • show vlt role • show vlt statistics • stack-unit iom-mode • system-mac • unit-id • vlt domain • vlt-peer-lag port-channel • show vlt private-vlan back-up destination Configure the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer to be used as the endpoint of the VLT backup link for sending out-of-band hello messages.
clear ip mroute Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the protocol-independent multicast (PIM) tree information base, use the clear ip pim tib command. Syntax Parameters clear ip mroute {group-address [source-address] | * | snooping} group-address [source-address] Enter the multicast group address and source address (if desired), in dotted decimal format, to clear information on a specific group. * Enter * to clear all multicast routes.
Usage Information If you use this command on a local VLT node, all multicast routes from the local PIM TIB, the entire multicast route table, and all the entries in the data plane are deleted. The entries in Peer PIM TIB (Sync) are not deleted but are marked for re-download. Both local and synced routes are removed from the multicast route table. The peer VLT node clears synced routes from the node.
delay-restore abort-threshold Increase the Boot Up timer to some value (>60 seconds). Syntax delay-restore abort-threshold To remove use the no delay-restore abort-threshold command. Defaults 60 seconds Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information LACP on the VLT ports (on a VLT switch or access device), which are members of the virtual link trunk, is not brought up until the VLT domain is recognized on the access device.
9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. peer-link port-channel Configure the specified port channel as the chassis interconnect trunk between VLT peers in the domain. Syntax Parameters peer-link port-channel port-channel-number {peer-down-vlan vlan id} port-channelnumber Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk.
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN (conf-vlt-domain) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added the IPV6/IPV4 support on the MXL. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. peer-routing-timeout Configure the timeout for the software to wait before connecting to a VLT peer with a Down status. This command is applicable for both IPV6/ IPV4.
Parameters value Default 32768 Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History To configure the primary role on a VLT peer, enter a lower value than the priority value of the remote peer. The range is from 1 to 65535. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Enter a VLAN ID to limit the information displayed to the multicast routes PIM-SM snooping discovers on a specified VLAN. The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094. Enter a multicast group address and, optionally, a source multicast address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) to limit the information displayed to the multicast routes PIM-SM snooping discovers for a specified multicast group and source.
Protocol: static, distance: 0, route-map: none, last change: 00:00:23 Example (snooping) Dell#show ip mroute snooping IPv4 Multicast Snooping Table (*, 224.0.0.0), uptime 17:46:23 Incoming vlan: Vlan 2 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 4/1 (*, 225.1.2.1), uptime 00:04:16 Incoming vlan: Vlan 2 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 4/2 TenGigabitEthernet 4/3 (165.87.1.7, 225.1.2.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 169.254.31.
Peer-Routing Peer-Routing-Timeout timer Multicast peer-routing timeout Dell# : Disabled : 0 seconds : 150 seconds show vlt detail Displays detailed status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch. Syntax show vlt detail Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Multicast Route --------------(22.22.22.200, 225.1.1.2) (*, 225.1.1.2) Dell# LocalIIF ---------VLAN 5 VLAN 15 PeerIIF --------VLAN 6 te 0/5 show vlt mismatch Display mismatches in VLT parameters. Syntax show vlt mismatch Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
show vlt role Display the VLT peer status, role of the local VLT switch, VLT system MAC address and system priority, and the MAC address and priority of the locally-attached VLT device. Syntax show vlt role Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Example Version Description 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Ndp-sync Pkts Rcvd:0 Ndp Reg Request sent:2 Ndp Reg Request rcvd:1 VLT multicast not enabled stack-unit iom-mode Set the switch operating mode to VLT mode. Syntax Parameters stack-unit iom-mode vlt unit number <0-5> Enter the number of the member stack unit. The range is from 0 to 5. The default is 0. vlt Enable virtual link trunking mode. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information When you create a VLT domain on a switch, Dell Networking OS automatically creates a VLT-system MAC address used for internal system operations. To reconfigure the default MAC address for the domain by entering a new MAC address in the format nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn, use the system-mac command.
To minimize the time required for the VLT system to determine the unit ID assigned to each peer switch when one peer reboots, use this command. vlt domain Enable VLT on a switch, configure a VLT domain, and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. Syntax Parameters vlt domain domain-id domain-id Enter the Domain ID number. Configure the same domain ID on the peer switch. The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. show vlt private-vlan Display the association of private VLAN (PVLAN) with the VLT LAG. You can configure VLT peer nodes in a PVLAN on the switch. Syntax show vlt private-vlan Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.
65 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) for IPv4 and IPv6. The following commands apply to both VRRP IPv4 and IPv6: • advertise-interval • description • disable • hold-time • preempt • priority • show config • track • virtual-address VRRP Ipv6 are in the VRRP for IPv6 Commands section.
• debug vrrp ipv6 • show vrrp ipv6 • vrrp-ipv6-group • version advertise-interval Set the time interval between VRRP advertisements. Syntax advertise-interval {seconds | centisecs centisecs} To return to the default settings, use the no advertise-interval command. Parameters seconds Enter a number of seconds. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 1 second. centisecs centisecs Enter the keyword centisecs followed by the number of centisecs in multiple of 25 centisecs.
To delete an authentication type and password, use the no authentication-type command. Parameters simple Enter the keyword simple to specify simple authentication. encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following numbers: password Defaults Not configured. Command Modes VRRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History • 0 (zero) specifies an un-encrypted authentication data follows. • 7 (seven) specifies a hidden authentication data follows.
Usage Information NOTE: This command also enables you to clear the port configurations corresponding to a range of ports. • You can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range. For example, if you want to clear the port configurations corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as clear counters interfaces interface-type 1/1 - 4. debug vrrp Allows you to enable debugging of VRRP.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you do not specify options, debug is active on all interfaces and all VRRP groups. description Configure a short text string describing the VRRP group. Syntax description text To delete a VRRP group description, use the no description command. Parameters text Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes VRRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a text string up to 80 characters long.
Usage Information To enable VRRP traffic, assign an IP address to the VRRP group using the virtualaddress command and enter no disable. Related Commands virtual-address — specifies the IP address of the virtual router. hold-time Specify a delay (in seconds) before a switch becomes the MASTER virtual router. By delaying the initialization of the VRRP MASTER, the new switch can stabilize its routing tables.
preempt To preempt or become the MASTER router, permit a BACKUP router with a higher priority value. Syntax preempt To prohibit preemption, use the no preempt command. Defaults Enabled (that is, a BACKUP router can preempt the MASTER router). Command Modes VRRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. priority Specify a VRRP priority value for the VRRP group.
Usage Information To guarantee that a VRRP group becomes MASTER, configure the VRRP group’s virtual address with same IP address as the interface’s primary IP address and change the priority of the VRRP group to 255. If you set the priority command to 255 and the virtual-address is not equal to the interface’s primary IP address, an error message appears. NOTE: Configuring VRRP priority 255 on an interface on which DHCP Client is enabled is not supported.
interface brief Command Modes Supported Modes Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For Port Channel interface types, enter the keywords port-channel then the number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094.
Example (Brief) Item Description Master addr Displays the IP address of the MASTER router. Virtual addr(s) Displays the virtual IP addresses of the VRRP routers associated with the interface. Dell>Interface Grp Pri Pre State Master addr Virtual addr(s) Description----------------------------------------------------TenGig 1/9 1 100 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.201 TenGig 1/9 2 100 Y Master 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.202 200.200.200.203 Description TenGig1/9 3 100 Y Master 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.
Example Item Description Authentication:... States whether authentication is configured for the VRRP group. If it is, the authentication type and the password are listed. Tracking states.. This line is displayed if the track command is configured on an interface. Below this line, the following information on the tracked interface is displayed: • Dn or Up states whether the interface is down or up. • the interface type slot/port information.
cost Defaults cost = 10 Command Modes VRRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For Port Channel interface types, enter the keywords port-channel then the number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094.
Command Modes VRRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The VRRP group only becomes active and sends VRRP packets when a virtual IP address is configured. When you delete the virtual address, the VRRP group stops sending VRRP packets. A system message appears after you enter or delete the virtual-address command.
• When the system reloads, VRRP waits 600 seconds (10 minutes) to bring up VRRP on all interfaces that are up and configured for VRRP. • When an interface comes up, whether as part of a system reload or an interface reload, the system waits 300 seconds (5 minutes) to bring up VRRP on that interface. Related Command vrrp delay reload — sets the delay time for VRRP initialization after a system reboot. vrrp delay reload Set the delay time for VRRP initialization after a system reboot.
vrrp-group Assign a VRRP ID to an interface. You can configure up to 12 VRRP groups per interface. Syntax Parameters vrrp-group vrrp-id vrrp-id Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a number as the group ID. The range is from 1 to 255. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information NOTE: This command also enables you to clear the port configurations corresponding to a range of ports. • You can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If no options are specified, debug is active on all interfaces and all VRRP groups. show vrrp ipv6 View the IPv6 VRRP groups that are active. If no VRRP groups are active, the system returns No Active VRRP group.
Line Beginning Description with GigabitEthernet... Displays the Interface, the VRRP group ID, and the network address. If the interface is no sending VRRP packets, 0.0.0.0 appears as the network address. State: master... Displays the interface’s state: • Na/If (not available). • master (MASTER virtual router). • backup (BACKUP virtual router). the interface’s priority and the IP address of the MASTER. Hold Down:... Adv rcvd:...
State: Master, Priority: 101, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe7a:6bb9 (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 64 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 1::255 fe80::255 vrrp-ipv6-group Assign an interface to a VRRP group. Syntax Parameters vrrp-ipv6-group vrid vrid Enter the virtual-router ID number of the VRRP group. The VRID range is from 1 to 255. Defaults Not configured.
version Set the VRRP protocol version for the IPv4 group. Syntax version {2 | 3 | both} To return to the default setting, use the no version command. Parameters 2 Enter the keyword 2 to specify VRRP version 2 as defined by RFC 3768, Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol. 3 Enter the keyword 3 to specify VRRP version 3 as defined by RFC 5798, Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol. both Enter the keyword both for in-service migration from VRRP version 2 to VRRP version 3.
3 both both VRRPv3 Interoperable, send VRRPv3 receive Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-100)#version 3 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) 1605
66 SNMP Traps This chapter lists the traps sent by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). Each trap is listed by the fields Message ID, Trap Type, and Trap Option. Table 4.
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option RMON_HC_RISHING_THRESHOLD SNMP NONE SNMP NONE NONE NONE ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE %RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_HC_RISING_THRESHOLD: RMON high-capacity rising threshold alarm from SNMP OID RMON_HC_FALLING_THRESHOLD %RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_HC_FALLING_THRESHOLD: RMON high-capacity falling threshold alarm from SNMP OID RESV N/A CHM_MIN_ALRM_TEMP %CHM
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option ENVMON NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE ETS NONE ETS NONE ETS NONE %CHMGR-5-MEM_THRESHOLD_CLR: Memory %s usage drops below threshold. MemUsage (%d) MACMGR_STN_MOVE %MACMGR-5-DETECT_STN_MOVE: Station Move threshold exceeded for Mac %s in vlan %d VRRP_BADAUTH %RPM1-P:RP2 %VRRP-3-VRRP_BAD_AUTH: vrid-1 on Gi 11/12 rcvd pkt with authentication type mismatch.
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option ETS_TRAP_TYPE_PEER_STATE_CHANGE ETS NONE PFC NONE PFC NONE PFC NONE PFC NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE %DIFFSERV-5-ETS_TRAP_TYPE_PEER_STATE_CHANGE : ETS Peer state changed to enabled for port %s %DIFFSERV-5-ETS_TRAP_TYPE_PEER_STATE_CHANGE : ETS Peer state changed to disabled for port %s PFC_TRAP_TYPE_MODULE_STATUS_CHANGE %DIFFSERV-5-PFC_TRAP_TYPE_MODULE_STATUS_CHANGE: PFC Module status changed to enabled %DIFFSERV-5-PFC_TRAP_TYPE_MODULE_STATUS_CHANGE:
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option FIPS_FCF_DROP FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE ENTITY NONE %FCOE-5-FCF_DROP: New FCF(%d,%s) discovered in Vlan %d is dropped as max-FCF-limit per VLAN is reached FIPS_ENODE_DROP %FCOE-5-ENODE_DROP: New ENode(%d,%s) discovered in interface %s dropped as max-ENode-limit in system reached FIPS_SESSION_DROP %FCOE-5-SESSION_DROP: New session(%d,%s) request in interface %s dropped as max-session-limit in system reached FIPS_ACL_INSTALL_FAIL %FCOE-5-ACL_INSTALL
67 FC Flex IO Modules This part provides a generic, broad-level description of the operations, capabilities, and configuration commands of the Fiber Channel (FC) Flex IO module. FC Flex IO Module mentioned in this guide refers to FCF Port Combo Card.
NPIV Proxy Gateway for FC Flex IO Modules The N-port identifier virtualization (NPIV) Proxy Gateway (NPG) feature provides FCoE-FC bridging capability on the system with the FC Flex IO module switch, allowing server CNAs to communicate with SAN fabrics over the FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module.
fabric Apply an FCoE map on a fabric-facing Fibre Channel (FC) port. Syntax Parameters fabric map-name map-name Maximum: 32 alphanumeric characters. Defaults None Command Modes INTERFACE FIBRE_CHANNEL Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module.
fabric-id vlan In an FCoE map, configure the association between the dedicated VLAN used to carry FCoE traffic between servers and a SAN, and the fabric where the desired storage arrays are installed. Syntax Parameters fabric-id fabric-num vlan vlan-id fabric-id fabricnum Enter a fabric ID number that is the same as the ID number of the dedicated VLAN used to carry FCoE storage traffic to the fabric specified in the FCoE map. You can enter a fabric ID in the range 1–4094.
fcf-priority In an FCoE map, configure the priority used by a server CNA to select an upstream FCoE forwarder (FCF). Syntax Parameters fcf—priority priority priority Defaults 128 Command Modes FCOE MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the priority assigned to the switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway, which appears to a downstream server CNA as an FCF. The range of FCF priority values is from 1 to 255. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.
Defaults None Command Modes FCoE MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN 2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. Usage Information The FC-MAP value you enter must match the FC-MAP value used by an FC switch or FCoE forwarder (FCF) in the fabric. An FCF switch accepts only FCoE traffic that uses the correct FC-MAP value.
Command Modes • Description: SAN_FABRIC • Fabric-id: 1002 • Fcoe-vlan: 1002 • Fc-map: 0x0efc00 • Fcf-priority: 128 • Fka-adv-period: 8000mSec • Keepalive: enable • Vlan priority: 3 CONFIGURATION INTERFACE Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module.
fka-adv-period In an FCoE map, configure the time interval used to transmit FIP keepalive (FKA) advertisements. Syntax Parameters fka-adv-period seconds seconds Defaults 8 seconds Command Modes FCOE MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the time period (in seconds) used to send FIP keepalive messages to peer devices. The range is from 8 to 90 seconds. Version Version 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3.0.0 Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module configured as an NPIV proxy gateway. Usage Information FCoE storage traffic received from servers on a switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway is de-capsulated into Fibre Channel packets and forwarded over FC links to SAN switches in a specified fabric.
Version Description 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. Usage Information FIP keepalive (FKA) messaging is used to detect if other FCoE devices are reachable. To remove FIP keepalive monitoring from an FCoE map, enter the no keepalive command. Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric.
An FCoE map is used to identify the SAN fabric to which FCoE storage traffic is sent and to virtualize the switch with the FC Flex IO module FC ports so that they appear to downstream server CNA ports as FCoE Forwarder (FCF) ports on an FCoE network. The following table describes the show fcoe-map brief output shown in the example below. Field Description Fabric-Name Name of a SAN fabric. Fabric ID The ID number of the SAN fabric to which FC traffic is forwarded.
Example Field Description FKA-ADV-period Time interval (in seconds) used to transmit FIP keepalive advertisements. FCF Priority The priority used by a server to select an upstream FCoE forwarder. Config-State Indicates whether the configured FCoE and FC parameters in the FCoE map are valid: Active (all mandatory FCoE and FC parameters are correctly configured) or Incomplete (either the FC-MAP value, fabric ID, or VLAN ID are not correctly configured).
show npiv devices Display the FCoE and FC devices currently logged in to a Switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show npiv devices [brief] brief Displays an overview of current server CNA-fabric connections over a switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.
Example Field Description Status Operational status of the link between a server CNA port and a SAN fabric: Logged In - Server has logged in to the fabric and is able to transmit FCoE traffic.
Example Related Commands ENode[0]: ENode MAC ENode Intf FCF MAC Fabric Intf FCoE Vlan Fabric Map ENode WWPN ENode WWNN FCoE MAC FC-ID LoginMethod Secs Status : : : : : : : : : : : : : 00:10:18:f1:94:21 Te 0/12 5c:f9:dd:ef:10:c8 Fc 0/5 1003 fid_1003 20:01:00:10:18:f1:94:20 20:00:00:10:18:f1:94:21 0e:fc:03:01:02:01 01:02:01 FLOGI 5593 LOGGED_IN ENode[1]: ENode MAC ENode Intf FCF MAC Fabric Intf FCoE Vlan Fabric Map ENode WWPN ENode WWNN FCoE MAC FC-ID LoginMethod Secs Status : : : : : : : : : : : : : 0
68 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter contains the following sections: • Offline Diagnostic Commands • Hardware Commands Topics: • Offline Diagnostic Commands • Hardware Commands • clear hardware stack-unit • clear hardware system-flow • show hardware layer2 acl • show hardware layer3 • diag stack-unit • hardware watchdog • online stack-unit • offline stack-unit • show diag • show hardware stack-unit • show hardware system-flow • show hardware buffer interface • show har
• Diagnostics only test connectivity, not the entire data path. The offline diagnostics commands are: • diag stack-unit • offline stack-unit • show diag Hardware Commands These commands display information from a hardware sub-component or ASIC. The hardware commands are: • clear hardware stack-unit • show diag • show hardware stack-unit • show hardware system-flow clear hardware stack-unit Clear statistics from selected hardware components.
NOTE: You can identify stack port numbers by physical inspection of the rear modules. The numbering is the same as for the 10G ports. You can also inspect the output of the show system stack-ports command. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
show hardware layer2 acl Display Layer 2 ACL or eg data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe. Syntax Parameters show hardware layer2 acl stack-unit 0–5 port-set 0–0 stack-unit0–5 Enter the keyword stack-unit then 0 to 5 to select a stack ID. port-set 0–0 Enter the keywords port-set with a port-pipe number. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. diag stack-unit Run offline diagnostics on a stack unit. Syntax Parameters diag stack-unit number {alllevels | level0 | level1 | level2 [verbose no-reboot]| terminate| interactive test } number Enter the stack-unit number. The range is from 0 to 5. alllevels Enter the keyword alllevels to run the complete set of offline diagnostic tests. level0 Enter the keyword level0 to run Level 0 diagnostics.
terminate Enter the keyword terminate to stop the execution of the level diag that is already started using the diag stack-unit command. Once this CLI is issued, syslogs indicating the termination of the diag test is displayed. The diag results for the executed tests are stored in the flash directory (TestReport-SU-X.txt). interactive Enter the keyword interactive to run some individual diag tests such as POWERLEDTEST, STATUSLEDTEST and so on.
online stack-unit Place a stack unit in the online state. Syntax Parameters online stack-unit number number Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Command History Enter the stack-unit number. The range is from 0 to 5. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. offline stack-unit Place a stack unit in the offline state.
Diagnostics. Please make sure that stacking/fanout not configured for Diagnostics execution. Also reboot/online command is necessary for normal operation after the offline command is issued. Proceed with Offline [confirm yes/no]:no Dell# Make sure that stacking is not configured for Diagnostics execution. Also, reboot/online command is necessary for normal operation after the offline command is issued. show diag View diagnostics information.
Stack-unit Member 0: No Unit diags executed yet (Stackunit not Offline). Stack-unit Member 1: Not present. Stack-unit Member 2: Not present. Stack-unit Member 3: Not present. Stack-unit Member 4: Not present. Stack-unit Member 5: Not present. -------------------------------------------Dell# Example 2 (show diag stack-unit Command) Dell#show diag stackunit 0 Diag status of Stackunit member 0: ----------------------------------------Stackunit is currently offline.
201 203 204 205 206 207 208 SFPPLUSPHYLNKSPEEDTEST MGMTPHYLOOPBACKTEST MGMTMACLOOPBACKTEST CPUSNAKESERVERPORTPHYLPBKTEST CPUSNAKESERVERPORTMACLPBKTEST CPUSNAKESFPPPHYLPBKTEST CPUSNAKESFPPMACLPBKTEST Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 Level2 tal Diagnostic Testcases in All Levels: 37 *********** END ******************* Dell# Example 4 (show diag testcase stack-unit interactive Command) Dell#show diag testcase stack-unit 0 interactive ******* Blade IOM Diagnostics Test ********** Test ID ------401
buffer Enter the keyword buffer. To display buffer statistics for a all interface, enter the keyword interface followed by the keyword all. To display the forwarding plane statistics containing the packet buffer usage per port per stack unit, enter the keyword unit then 0 for port-pipe 0, then port and the port number (42-53, and then buffer-info.
Example (dataplane) Dell#show hardware stack-unit 0 cpu data-plane statistics Example Dell#show hardware stack-unit 1 cpu party-bus statistics Input Statistics: 8189 packets, 8076608 bytes 0 dropped, 0 errors Output Statistics: 366 packets, 133100 bytes 0 errors Dell# Example (drop counters) Dell#show hardware stack-unit 1 unit 0 counters unit: 0 port: 1 (interface Te 1/1) Description bc pci driver statistics for device: rxHandle :9798 noMhdr :0 noMbuf :0 noClus :0 recvd :9798 dropped :0 recvToNet :97
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - IPV4 L3 Routed Multicast Packets IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter IPV6 L3 Routed Multicast Packets Unicast Packet Counter 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - Control Frame Counter Pause Control Frame Counter Oversized Frame Counter Jabber Counter VLAN Tag Frame Counter Double VLAN Tag Frame Counter RUNT Frame Counter Fragment Counter PFC Frame Priority 0 PFC Frame Priority 1 PFC Frame Priority 2 PFC Frame Priority 3 PFC Frame Priority 4 PFC Frame Priority 5 PFC Frame Priority 6 PFC Frame Priority 7 Debug Counter 0 Debug Counter 1 Debug Counter 2 Debug Counter 3 Debug Counter
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - RUNT Frame Counter Fragment Counter VLAN Tagged Packets Ingress Dropped Packet MTU Check Error Frame Counter PFC Frame Priority 0 PFC Frame Priority 1 PFC Frame Priority 2 PFC Frame Priority 3 PFC Frame Priority 4 PFC Frame Priority 5 PFC Frame Priority 6 PFC Frame Priority 7 Debug Counter 0 Debug Counter 1 Debug C
TX - Debug Counter 10 TX - Debug Counter 11 0 0 Example (portstatistics) Dell#show hardware stack-unit 0 unit 0 port-stats ena/ speed/ link auto STP lrn inter max loop port link duplex scan neg? state pause discrd ops face frame back xe0 up 10G FD SW Yes Forward None FA KR 11996 xe1 up 10G FD SW Yes Forward None FA KR 11996 xe2 up 10G FD SW Yes Forward None FA KR 11996 xe3 down 1G FD SW Yes Block RX None FA GMII 11996 xe4 up 10G FD SW Yes Forward None FA KR 11996 xe5 down 1G FD SW Yes Block RX None FA GM
0x0333a000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe18 = 0x00000000 0x0333e000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe19 = 0x00000000 0x03333000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe20 = 0x00000000 0x03337000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe21 = 0x00000000 0x0333b000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe22 = 0x00000000 0x0333f000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe23 = 0x00000000 0x03334000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe24 = 0x00000000 0x03338000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe25 = 0x00000000 0x0333c000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe26 = 0x00000000 0x03340000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe27 = 0x00000000 0x03335000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.xe28 = 0x00000000 0x03339000 ASF_PORT_SPEED.
----Maximum Shared Limit: 0 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the priority-group: 61440 Accounted Packet Buffer: 0 Example (buffer) Dell#show hardware stack-unit 0 buffer total-buffer ------ Buffer Details for Stack-Unit 0 -----Total Buffers allocated per Stack-Unit 19456 Dell# Example (Queue2/ Dell#show hardware stack-unit 1 buffer unit 0 interface all queue 6 buffer-info Buffer-Info) Buffer Stats for Front End Ports ================================ ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/1 Queue 6 ----Ma
Parameters acl | qos For the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe, display which system flow entry the packet hits and what queue the packet takes as it dumps the raw system flow tables. stack-unit 0–5 Enter the keywords stack-unit then 0 to 5 to select a stack member ID. port-set 0–0 [counters] Enter the keywords port-set with a port-pipe number—0. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword counters to display hit counters for the selected ACL or QoS option.
502 501 500 499 498 497 496 495 494 493 492 491 490 Dell# Example (noncounters) 249 147 145 144 773 772 771 770 769 FP Entry for NA IPv6 FP Entry for RA IPv6 FP Entry for NS IPv6 FP Entry for RS IPv6 FP Entry for MLD IPv6 L3 CPU Bound Traffic ClassId 2 to Q5 FP Entry for ICMP CPU Terminated IPv6 FP Entry for ICMP IPv6 L3 Term Traffic ClassID 1 to Q6 Unknown MCAST Packets 224.0.0.x 224.0.1.
00000000 , FPF4=0x00 MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 ffffffff ffff0000 00000000 00000000 , 0x00 action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CosQCpuNew, param0=7(0x07), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)}, meter=NULL, counter={idx=2, mode=0x01, entries=1} ################# FP Entry for redirecting GVRP traffic to RSM ########### EID 2044: gid=1, slice=15, slice_idx=0x03, prio=0x7fc, flags=0x8
Command Modes priority-group Identifier of the priority group in the range of 0 to 7. queue Enter the keyword queue followed by id for specific queue or keyword all. buffer-info To display total buffer information for the interface, enter the keywords buffer-info. EXEC EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN I/O Aggregator.
Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/1 Queue Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/1 Queue Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/1 Queue Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: Used Packet
Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the FN I/O Aggregator.
RX - Debug Counter 2
Ingress MMU Drops HOL DROPS(TOTAL) HOL DROPS on COS0 HOL DROPS on COS1 HOL DROPS on COS2 HOL DROPS on COS3 HOL DROPS on COS4 HOL DROPS on COS5 HOL DROPS on COS6 HOL DROPS on COS7 HOL DROPS on COS8 HOL DROPS on COS9 HOL DROPS on COS10 HOL DROPS on COS11 HOL DROPS on COS12 HOL DROPS on COS13 HOL DROPS on COS14 HOL DROPS on COS15 HOL DROPS on COS16 HOL DROPS on COS17 TxPurge CellErr Aged Drops --- Egress MAC counters--Egress FCS Drops --- Egress FORWARD PROCESSOR IPv4 L3UC Aged & Drops TTL Threshold Drops INVA
A Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Message Types This chapter lists and describes the possible ICMP message type resulting from a ping. The first three columns list the possible symbol or type/code. For example, you would receive a ! or 03 as an echo reply from your ping. Table 5. ICMP Messages and Their Definitions Symbol Type Code . Query Error Timeout (no reply) ! 0 U 3 C Description 4 3 echo reply . destination unreachable: 0 network unreachable . 1 host unreachable .
Symbol & Type Code Description 1 redirect for host . 2 redirect for type-of-service and network . 3 redirect for type-of-service and host . 8 0 echo request . 9 0 router advertisement . 10 0 router solicitation . 11 Query Error time exceeded: 0 time-to-live equals 0 during transit . 1 time-to-live equals 0 during reassembly . 12 parameter problem: 1 IP header bad (catchall error) . 2 required option missing . 13 0 timestamp request . 14 0 timestamp reply .